28. High-resolution timer (HRTIM)

28.1 Introduction

The high-resolution timer can generate up to 12 digital signals with highly accurate timings. It is primarily intended to drive power conversion systems such as switch mode power supplies or lighting systems, but can be of general purpose usage, whenever a very fine timing resolution is expected.

Its modular architecture allows to generate either independent or coupled waveforms. The wave-shape is defined by self-contained timings (using counters and compare units) and a broad range of external events, such as analog or digital feedbacks and synchronization signals. This allows to produce a large variety of control signal (PWM, phase-shifted, constant \( T_{on} \) ,...) and address most of conversion topologies.

For control and monitoring purposes, the timer has also timing measure capabilities and links to built-in ADC and DAC converters. Last, it features light-load management mode and is able to handle various fault schemes for safe shut-down purposes.

28.2 Main features

28.3 Functional description

28.3.1 General description

The HRTIM can be partitioned into several sub entities:

The master timer is based on a 16-bit up counter. It can set/reset any of the 12 outputs via 4 compare units and it provides synchronization signals to the 6 timer units. Its main purpose is to have the timer units controlled by a unique source. An interleaved buck converter is a typical application example where the master timer manages the phase-shifts between the multiple units.

The timer units are working either independently or coupled with the other timers including the master timer. Each timer contains the controls for two outputs. The outputs set/reset events are triggered either by the timing units compare registers or by events coming from the master timer, from the other timers or from external events.

The output stage has several duties

The burst mode controller can take over the control of one or multiple timers in case of light-load operation. The burst length and period can be programmed, as well as the idle state of the outputs.

The external event and fault signal conditioning logic includes:

The system interface allows the HRTIM to interact with the rest of the MCU:

The HRTIM registers are split into 8 groups:

Note: As a writing convention, references to the 6 timing units in the text and in registers are generalized using the “x” letter, where x can be any value from A to F.

The block diagram of the timer is shown in Figure 209 .

Figure 209. High-resolution timer overview

Block diagram of the High-resolution timer (HRTIM) showing internal components like Master timer, TIMERS A-F, APB interface, and external connections.

The diagram illustrates the internal architecture of the HRTIM. At the top, the Master timer is connected to external pins hrtim_in_sync[3:1] and hrtim_out_sync[3:1] . It receives control signals hrtim_upd_en[3:1] , hrtim_bm_trg , and hrtim_bm_ck . The Burst mode controller is also connected to these pins. Below the Master timer are six identical timing units: TIMER A , TIMER B , TIMER C , TIMER D , TIMER E , and TIMER F . Each timer unit contains a Reset block, an Event blanking window , 4xCMP (compare) blocks, and 2xCPT (capture) blocks. These units are interconnected by a Cross-timer counter reset bus . A central Set/reset crossbar (labeled 'a timer controls 2 outputs') manages signals between the timers. On the left, the APB and peripheral interface connects to the APB bus and provides control for DMA burst controller and External events conditioning . External pins include hrtim_adc_trg[10:1] , hrtim_dac_reset_trg[A:F] , hrtim_dac_step_trg[A:F] , hrtim_dac_trg[3:1] , hrtim_it[8:1] , hrtim_dma[7:1] , hrtim_ker_ck , hrtim_pclk , hrtim_eev1[4:1] , hrtim_eev10[4:1] , and fault pins HRTIM_FLT[6:1] , hrtim_in_flt[6:1] , and hrtim_sys_flt . The External events conditioning block outputs 6 (EEV1_muxout...EEV6_muxout) to the Fault conditioning block. On the right, the Output stage generates 12 channels: HRTIM_CHA1 , HRTIM_CHA2 , HRTIM_CHB1 , HRTIM_CHB2 , HRTIM_CHC1 , HRTIM_CHC2 , HRTIM_CHD1 , HRTIM_CHD2 , HRTIM_CHE1 , HRTIM_CHE2 , HRTIM_CHF1 , and HRTIM_CHF2 . Each channel has a Run/idle control. The diagram is identified by the code MSV47425V3 in the bottom right corner.

Block diagram of the High-resolution timer (HRTIM) showing internal components like Master timer, TIMERS A-F, APB interface, and external connections.

28.3.2 HRTIM pins and internal signals

The tables in this section summarize the HRTIM inputs and outputs, both on-chip and off-chip.

Table 222. HRTIM inputs/outputs summary

Signal nameSignal typeDescription
HRTIM_CHA1,
HRTIM_CHA2,
HRTIM_CHB1,
HRTIM_CHB2,
HRTIM_CHC1,
HRTIM_CHC2,
HRTIM_CHD1,
HRTIM_CHD2,
HRTIM_CHE1,
HRTIM_CHE2,
HRTIM_CHF1,
HRTIM_CHF2
OutputsMain HRTIM timer outputs. They can be coupled by pairs (HRTIM_CHx1 & HRTIM_CHx2) with deadtime insertion or work independently.
HRTIM_FLT[6:1]
hrtim_in_flt[6:1]
Digital inputFault inputs: immediately disable the HRTIM outputs when asserted (12 on-chip inputs and 6 off-chip HRTIM_FLTx inputs).
hrtim_sys_fltDigital inputSystem fault gathering MCU internal fault events.
hrtim_in_sync[3:1]Digital InputSynchronization inputs to synchronize the whole HRTIM with other internal or external timer resources:
hrtim_in_sync1: Reserved
hrtim_in_sync2: the source is the TIM1_TRGO output (see Table 227: Internal synchronization source )
hrtim_in_sync3: the source is HRTIM_SCIN input pins
hrtim_out_sync[2:1]Digital outputThe purpose of this output is to cascade or synchronize several HRTIM instances, either on-chip or off-chip:
hrtim_out_sync1: Reserved
hrtim_out_sync2: the destination is an off-chip HRTIM or peripheral (via HRTIM_SCOUT output pins)
hrtim_eev1[4:1]Digital inputExternal events. Each of the 10 events can be selected among 4 sources, either on-chip (from other built-in peripherals: comparator, ADC analog watchdog, TIMx timers, trigger outputs) or off-chip (HRTIM_EEVx input pins).
hrtim_eev2[4:1]
hrtim_eev3[4:1]
hrtim_eev4[4:1]
hrtim_eev5[4:1]
hrtim_eev6[4:1]
hrtim_eev7[4:1]
hrtim_eev8[4:1]
hrtim_eev9[4:1]
hrtim_eev10[4:1]
hrtim_upd_en[3:1]Digital inputA pulse on the update enable inputs hrtim_upd_end[3:1] (on-chip interconnect) triggers the transfer from shadow to active registers

Table 222. HRTIM inputs/outputs summary (continued)

Signal nameSignal typeDescription
hrtim_bm_trgDigital inputA pulse on this input triggers a burst mode entry. This input is connected to an internal source (see Table 226: Burst mode trigger source ).
hrtim_bm_ck[4:1]Digital inputBurst mode clock (on-chip interconnect)
hrtim_adc_trg[10:1]Digital outputADC start of conversion triggers. The hrtim_adc_trg1 .. hrtim_adc_trg10 outputs are here-after referred to as ADC trigger 1 to ADC trigger 10.
hrtim_dac_trg[3:1]Digital outputDAC conversion update triggers
hrtim_dac_reset_trg[6:1]
hrtim_dac_step_trg[6:1]
Digital outputDual channel DAC triggers
hrtim_it[8:1]Digital outputInterrupt requests
hrtim_dma[7:1]Digital outputDMA requests
hrtim_pclk-APB clock
hrtim_ker_ck-HRTIM kernel clock

Table 223. External events mapping and associated features

External event channelFast modeDigital filterBalanced fault timer A,B,CBalanced fault timer D,E,FSource (EExSRC[1:0])Comparator and input sources available per package
Src1 (00)Src2 (01)Src3 (10)Src4 (11)48-pin64-pin and 100-pin
hrtim_eev 1[4:1]Yes---PC12COMP2tim1_trgoadc1_awd1CompComp & input
hrtim_eev 2[4:1]Yes---PC11COMP4tim2_trgoadc1_awd2CompComp & input
hrtim_eev 3[4:1]Yes---PB7COMP6tim3_trgoadc1_awd3Comp & inputComp & input
hrtim_eev 4[4:1]Yes---PB6COMP1COMP5adc2_awd1Comp & inputComp & input
hrtim_eev 5[4:1]Yes---PB9COMP3COMP7adc2_awd2Comp & inputComp & input
hrtim_eev 6[4:1]-YesYes-PB5COMP2COMP1adc2_awd3Comp & inputComp & input
hrtim_eev 7[4:1]-YesYes-PB4COMP4tim7_trgoadc3_awd1Comp & inputComp & input
hrtim_eev 8[4:1]-Yes-YesPB8COMP6COMP3adc4_awd1Comp & inputComp & input
hrtim_eev 9[4:1]-Yes-YesPB3COMP5tim15_trgoCOMP4Comp & inputComp & input
hrtim_eev 10[4:1]-Yes--PC5/PC6COMP7tim6_trgoadc5_awd1-Comp & input

Table 224. Update enable inputs and sources

hrtim_upd_en[3:1]Update source
hrtim_upd_en1tim16_oc1
hrtim_upd_en2tim17_oc1
hrtim_upd_en3tim6_trgo

Table 225. Burst mode clock sources

hrtim_bm_ck[4:1]BMCLK[3:0]Clock source
hrtim_bm_ck10110tim16_oc1
hrtim_bm_ck20111tim17_oc1
hrtim_bm_ck31000tim17_trgo
hrtim_bm_ck41001Reserved

Table 226. Burst mode trigger source

-trigger source
hrtim_bm_trgtim7_trgo

Table 227. Internal synchronization source

-synchronization source
hrtim_in_sync2tim1_trgo

Table 228. Fault inputs

Fault channelExternal Input
FLTxSRC[1:0] =
00
HRTIM_FLT[6:1]
On-chip source
FLTxSRC[1:0] =
01
hrtim_in_flt[6:1]
On-chip source
FLTxSRC[1:0] =
10
hrtim internal
On-chip source
FLTxSRC[1:0] =
11
hrtim internal
Fault 1PA12COMP2EEV1_muxoutN/A
Fault 2PA15COMP4EEV2_muxoutN/A
Fault 3PB10COMP6EEV3_muxoutN/A
Fault 4PB11COMP1EEV4_muxoutN/A
Fault 5PB0/PC7COMP3EEV5_muxoutN/A
Fault 6PC10COMP5EEV6_muxoutN/A

Table 229. HRTIM DAC triggers connections

HRTIM DAC triggersDAC1_CH1
DAC_CH2
DAC2_CH1DAC3_CH1
DAC3_CH2
DAC4_CH1
DAC4_CH2
hrtim_dac_trg1Yes--Yes
hrtim_dac_trg2-Yes--
hrtim_dac_trg3--Yes-
hrtim_dac_reset_trg1
hrtim_dac_step_trg1
YesYesYesYes
hrtim_dac_reset_trg2
hrtim_dac_step_trg2
YesYesYesYes
hrtim_dac_reset_trg3
hrtim_dac_step_trg3
YesYesYesYes
hrtim_dac_reset_trg4
hrtim_dac_step_trg4
YesYesYesYes
hrtim_dac_reset_trg5
hrtim_dac_step_trg5
YesYesYesYes
hrtim_dac_reset_trg6
hrtim_dac_step_trg6
YesYesYesYes
Table 230. System fault connected to hrtim_sys_flt input
SourceEnable bit in SYSCFGR2 register
Cortex®-M4 with FPU LOCKUPCLL
Programmable Voltage Detector (PVD)PVDL
SRAM parity errorSPL
Flash double ECC errorECCL
Clock Security System (CSS)None (always enabled)

28.3.3 Clocks

The HRTIM must be supplied by the \( t_{HRTIM} \) APB2 clock to offer a full resolution. The \( t_{HRTIM} \) clock period is evenly divided into up to 32 intermediate steps using an edge positioning logic. All clocks present in the HRTIM are derived from this reference clock.

Definition of terms

Timer clock and prescaler

Each timer in the HRTIM has its own individual clock prescaler, which allows you to adjust the timer resolution (see Table 231 ).

Table 231. Timer resolution and min. PWM frequency for \( f_{HRTIM} = 170 \) MHz
CKPSC[2:0]Prescaling ratio\( f_{HRCK} \) equivalent frequencyResolutionMin PWM frequency
0001\( 170 \times 32 \) MHz = 5.44 GHz184 ps83.0 kHz
0012\( 170 \times 16 \) MHz = 2.72 GHz368 ps41.5 kHz
0104\( 170 \times 8 \) MHz = 1.36 GHz735 ps20.8 kHz
Table 231. Timer resolution and min. PWM frequency for \( f_{HRTIM} = 170\text{ MHz} \) (continued)
CKPSC[2:0]Prescaling ratio\( f_{HRCK} \)
equivalent frequency
ResolutionMin PWM frequency
0118\( 170 \times 4\text{ MHz} = 680\text{ MHz} \)1.47 ns10.4 kHz
10016\( 170 \times 2\text{ MHz} = 340\text{ MHz} \)2.94 ns5.19 kHz
10132170 MHz5.88 ns2.59 kHz
11064\( 170/2\text{ MHz} = 85\text{ MHz} \)11.76 ns1.30 kHz
111128\( 170/4\text{ MHz} = 42.5\text{ MHz} \)23.53 ns0.65 kHz

The high-resolution is available for edge positioning, PWM period adjustment and externally triggered pulse duration.

The high-resolution is not available for the following features

For clock prescaling ratios below 32 (CKPSC[2:0] < 5), the least significant bits of the counter and capture registers are not significant. The least significant bits cannot be written (counter register only) and return 0 when read.

For instance, if CKPSC[2:0] = 2 (prescaling by 4), writing 0xFFFF into the counter register yields an effective value of 0xFFF8. Conversely, any counter value between 0xFFFF and 0xFFF8 is read as 0xFFF8.

Figure 210. Counter and capture register format vs clock prescaling factor Diagram showing the bit format of a 16-bit counter and capture register for different prescaling factors (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32). The diagram shows 16 bits (b15 to b0) for each prescaling factor. Bits are shaded grey if they are significant (read returns effective value) and white if they are not significant (read returns 0). For prescaling 1, all 16 bits are significant. As the prescaling factor increases, the number of significant bits decreases: 15 bits for 2, 14 bits for 4, 13 bits for 8, 12 bits for 16, and 11 bits for 32. The least significant bits (the rightmost bits) are not significant for prescaling factors greater than 1.

b15 b0 Prescaling

1

2

4

8

16

32

Significant bit: read returns effective value

Not significant bit: read returns 0

MS32257V1

Diagram showing the bit format of a 16-bit counter and capture register for different prescaling factors (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32). The diagram shows 16 bits (b15 to b0) for each prescaling factor. Bits are shaded grey if they are significant (read returns effective value) and white if they are not significant (read returns 0). For prescaling 1, all 16 bits are significant. As the prescaling factor increases, the number of significant bits decreases: 15 bits for 2, 14 bits for 4, 13 bits for 8, 12 bits for 16, and 11 bits for 32. The least significant bits (the rightmost bits) are not significant for prescaling factors greater than 1.

Initialization

At start-up, it is mandatory to initialize first the prescaler bitfields before writing the compare and period registers. Once the timer is enabled (MCEN or TxCEN bit set in the HRTIM_MCR register), the prescaler cannot be modified.

When multiple timers are enabled, the prescalers are synchronized with the prescaler of the timer that was started first.


Warning: It is possible to have different prescaling ratios in the master and TIMA..E timers only if the counter and output behavior does not depend on other timers' information and signals. It is mandatory to configure identical prescaling ratios in these timers when one of the following events is propagated from one timing unit (or master timer) to another: output set/reset event, counter reset event, update event, external event filter or capture triggers. Prescaler factors not equal yield to unpredictable results.


Deadtime generator clock

The deadtime prescaler is supplied by \( (f_{\text{HRTIM}} \times 8) / 2^{(\text{DTPRSC}[2:0])} \) , programmed with DTPRSC[2:0] bits in the HRTIM_DTxR register.

\( t_{\text{DTG}} \) ranges from 735 ps to 94.1 ns for \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} = 170 \text{ MHz} \) .

Chopper stage clock

The chopper stage clock source \( f_{\text{CHPFRQ}} \) is derived from \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) with a division factor ranging from 16 to 256, so that \( 664 \text{ kHz} \leq f_{\text{CHPFRQ}} \leq 10.625 \text{ MHz} \) for \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} = 170 \text{ MHz} \) .

\( t_{\text{ISTPW}} \) is the length of the initial pulse in chopper mode, programmed with the STRPW[3:0] bits in the HRTIM_CHPxR register, as follows:

\[ t_{\text{ISTPW}} = (\text{STRPW}[3:0]+1) \times 16 \times t_{\text{HRTIM}} \]

It uses \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 16 \) as clock source (10.625 MHz for \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} = 170 \text{ MHz} \) ).

Burst mode prescaler

The burst mode controller counter clock \( f_{\text{BRST}} \) can be supplied by several sources, among which one is derived from \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) .

In this case, \( f_{\text{BRST}} \) ranges from \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) to \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 32768 \) (5.19 kHz for \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} = 170 \text{ MHz} \) ).

Fault input sampling clock

The fault input noise rejection filter has a time constant defined with \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} \) which can be either \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) or \( f_{\text{FLTS}} \) .

\( f_{\text{FLTS}} \) is derived from \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) and ranges from 170 MHz to 21.25 MHz for \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} = 170 \text{ MHz} \) .

External event input sampling clock

The fault input noise rejection filter has a time constant defined with \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} \) which can be either \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) or \( f_{\text{EEVS}} \) .

\( f_{\text{EEVS}} \) is derived from \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) and ranges from 170 MHz to 21.25 MHz for \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} = 170 \text{ MHz} \) .

28.3.4 Timer A..F timing units

The HRTIM embeds 6 identical timing units made of a 16-bit up-counter with an auto-reload mechanism to define the counting period, 4 compare and 2 capture units, as per Figure 211. Each unit includes all control features for 2 outputs, so that it operates as a standalone timer.

Figure 211. Timer A..F overview

Figure 211. Timer A..F overview block diagram showing internal components like Counter, Compare 1-4, Capture 1-2, Repetition Counter, and output stages.

The diagram illustrates the internal architecture of a Timer A..F timing unit. At its core is a Counter block. This counter receives a clock signal from \( f_{HRTIM} \) via a Prescaler . It also receives a RST signal from Reset Management . The counter's output is connected to Capture 1 and Capture 2 blocks, which generate CPT1 and CPT2 interrupt/DMA requests. The counter also feeds into a Repetition Counter (producing REP output) and a Period block. The Period block connects to Compare 1 through Compare 4 blocks. Each compare block generates a CMP interrupt/DMA request (e.g., CMP1 through CMP4 ). Compare 1 and Compare 3 are associated with a Half block, while Compare 2 and Compare 4 are associated with an Autodelay block. The compare blocks also feed into a Set / reset crossbar (2 outputs) block, which produces Out 1 and Out 2 signals to the output stage. This crossbar block also receives REP , CMP1 , CMP2 , CMP3 , CMP4 , and Update signals. It is preceded by a Push-pull and deadtime management block, which in turn receives signals from an Events Blanking and windowing block. This block receives 10 signals from external events conditioning . The entire unit is also influenced by a Master timer (6 signals) and Other timing units (9 signals). A legend indicates that a double-outlined box represents a Register with preload, and a jagged arrow represents an Interrupt / DMA request . The diagram is identified by the code MS32258V1.

Figure 211. Timer A..F overview block diagram showing internal components like Counter, Compare 1-4, Capture 1-2, Repetition Counter, and output stages.

The period and compare values must be within a lower and an upper limit related to the high-resolution implementation and listed in Table 232:

Table 232. Period and compare registers min and max values
CKPSC[2:0] valueMin (1)Max
00x00600xFFDF
10x00300xFFEF
20x00180xFFF7
30x000C0xFFFB
40x00060xFFFD
≥ 50x00030xFFFD
  1. 1. The value 0x0000 can be written in CMP1 and CMP3 registers only, to skip a PWM pulse. See Section : Null duty cycle exception case for details.

Note: A compare value greater than the period register value does not generate a compare match event.

Counter operating mode

Timer A..F operate in continuous (free-running) mode or in single-shot manner where counting is started by a reset event, using the CONT bit in the HRTIM_TIMxCR control register. An additional RETRIG bit allows you to select whether the single-shot operation is retriggerable or non-retriggerable. Details of operation are summarized on Table 233 and on Figure 212 and Figure 213 .

Table 233. Timer operating modes
CONTRETRIGOperating modeStart / stop conditions
Clocking and event generation
00Single-shot
Non-retriggerable
Setting the TxEN bit enables the timer but does not start the counter.
A first reset event starts the counting and any subsequent reset is ignored until the counter reaches the PER value.
The PER event is then generated and the counter is stopped.
A reset event re-starts the counting operation from 0x0000.
01Single-shot
Retriggerable
Setting the TxEN bit enables the timer but does not start the counter.
A reset event starts the counting if the counter is stopped, otherwise it clears the counter. When the counter reaches the PER value, the PER event is generated and the counter is stopped.
A reset event re-starts the counting operation from 0x0000.
1XContinuous modeSetting the TxEN bit enables the timer and starts the counter simultaneously.
When the counter reaches the PER value, it rolls-over to 0x0000 and resumes counting.
The counter can be reset at any time.

The TxEN bit can be cleared at any time to disable the timer and stop the counting.

Figure 212. Continuous timer operation

Timing diagram for continuous timer operation showing PER, Counter, Reset, and Enable signals.

Timing diagram for continuous timer operation. The diagram shows four signals over time: PER (dashed line), Counter (solid line), Reset (solid line), and Enable (solid line). The Counter signal is a sawtooth wave that increases linearly and then resets to zero. The Reset signal is a series of pulses. The Enable signal is a single pulse that starts the timer. The text 'Continuous mode (CONT = 1, RETRIG = X)' is shown at the bottom. The reference 'MS32259V1' is in the bottom right corner.

Timing diagram for continuous timer operation showing PER, Counter, Reset, and Enable signals.

Figure 213. Single-shot timer operation

Timing diagrams for single-shot timer operation in non-retriggerable and retriggerable modes.

Timing diagrams for single-shot timer operation. The figure contains two diagrams. The top diagram shows 'Single-shot mode, non-retriggerable (CONT = 0, RETRIG = 0)'. It displays four signals: PER (dashed line), Counter (solid line), Reset* (solid line), and Enable (solid line). The Counter signal is a sawtooth wave that increases linearly and then resets to zero. The Reset* signal is a series of pulses, some of which are marked with an 'X' to indicate they are ignored because the timer is still running. The Enable signal is a single pulse that starts the timer. The bottom diagram shows 'Single-shot mode, retriggerable (CONT = 0, RETRIG = 1)'. It displays the same four signals. In this mode, a new PER event while the timer is still running restarts the counter. A legend at the bottom left explains the Reset* signal: a solid line represents 'Reset active' and a line with an 'X' represents 'Reset ignored'. The reference 'MS32260V1' is in the bottom right corner.

Timing diagrams for single-shot timer operation in non-retriggerable and retriggerable modes.

Roll-over event

A counter roll-over event is generated when the counter goes back to 0 after having reached the period value set in the HRTIM_PERxR register in continuous mode.

This event is used for multiple purposes in the HRTIM:

If the initial counter value is above the period value when the timer is started, or if a new period is set while the counter is already above this value, the counter is not reset: it overflows at the maximum period value and the repetition counter does not decrement.

Timer reset

The reset of the timing unit counter can be triggered by up to 30 events that can be selected simultaneously in the HRTIM_RSTxR register, among the following sources:

Several events can be selected simultaneously to handle multiple reset sources. In this case, the multiple reset requests are ORed. When 2 counter reset events are generated within the same \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) clock cycle, the last counter reset is taken into account.

Additionally, it is possible to do a software reset of the counter using the TxRST bits in the HRTIM_CR2 register. These control bits are grouped into a single register to allow the simultaneous reset of several counters.

The reset requests are taken into account only once the related counters are enabled (TxCEN bit set).

When the \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) clock prescaling ratio is above 32 (counting period above \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) ), the counter reset event is delayed to the next active edge of the prescaled clock. This allows to maintain a jitterless waveform generation when an output transition is synchronized to the reset event (typically a constant Ton time converter).

Figure 214 shows how the reset is handled for a clock prescaling ratio of 128 ( \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) divided by 4).

Figure 214. Timer reset resynchronization (prescaling ratio above 32)

Timing diagram showing timer reset resynchronization. The diagram includes five horizontal lines: f_HRTIM (high-frequency clock), Prescaled clock, Reset event, Counter, and HRTIM_CHA1. The Counter shows values 5, 1, 2, 0, 1. A reset event occurs when the counter is at 2, causing it to reset to 0. The HRTIM_CHA1 signal is set high on the reset event and low on a compare match (when the counter reaches 2).

HRTIM_CHA1: Set on Timer A reset event, Reset on Compare 1 = 2

MS32261V2

Timing diagram showing timer reset resynchronization. The diagram includes five horizontal lines: f_HRTIM (high-frequency clock), Prescaled clock, Reset event, Counter, and HRTIM_CHA1. The Counter shows values 5, 1, 2, 0, 1. A reset event occurs when the counter is at 2, causing it to reset to 0. The HRTIM_CHA1 signal is set high on the reset event and low on a compare match (when the counter reaches 2).

Repetition counter

A common software practice is to have an interrupt generated when the period value is reached, so that the maximum amount of time is left for processing before the next period begins. The main purpose of the repetition counter is to adjust the period interrupt rate and off-load the CPU by decoupling the switching frequency and the interrupt frequency.

The timing units have a repetition counter. This counter cannot be read, but solely programmed with an auto-reload value in the HRTIM_REPxR register.

The repetition counter is initialized with the content of the HRTIM_REPxR register when the timer is enabled (TXCEN bit set). Once the timer has been enabled, any time the counter is cleared, either due to a reset event or due to a counter roll-over, the repetition counter is decreased. When it reaches zero, a REP interrupt or a DMA request is issued if enabled (REPIE and REPDE bits in the HRTIM_DIER register).

If the HRTIM_REPxR register is set to 0, an interrupt is generated for each and every period. For any value above 0, a REP interrupt is generated after (HRTIM_REPxR + 1) periods. Figure 215 presents the repetition counter operation for various values, in continuous mode.

Figure 215. Repetition rate versus HRTIM_REPxR content in continuous mode

Timing diagram for continuous mode showing PER, Counter, and HRTIM_REPxR values for different repetition rates.

The diagram illustrates the relationship between the Period (PER), the Counter, and the HRTIM_REPxR register content in continuous mode. The top section shows the PER signal as a sawtooth wave and the Counter as a series of sawtooth waves that reset when they reach the PER value. Below this, three rows show the HRTIM_REPxR register content and the resulting REP (Repetition) events for different repetition rates.

* denotes repetition counter internal values (not readable, for explanation purpose only)

MS32262V1

Timing diagram for continuous mode showing PER, Counter, and HRTIM_REPxR values for different repetition rates.

The repetition counter can also be used when the counter is reset before reaching the period value (variable frequency operation) either in continuous or in single-shot mode (Figure 216 here-below). The reset causes the repetition counter to be decremented, at the exception of the very first start following counter enable (TxCEN bit set).

Figure 216. Repetition counter behavior in single-shot mode

Timing diagram for single-shot mode showing PER, Counter, Reset, and HRTIM_REPxR values.

The diagram illustrates the repetition counter behavior in single-shot mode. The top section shows the PER signal as a sawtooth wave and the Counter as a series of sawtooth waves that reset when they reach the PER value. The Reset signal is shown as a series of pulses. The bottom section shows the HRTIM_REPxR register content and the resulting REP (Repetition) events for different repetition rates.

* denotes repetition counter internal values (not readable, for explanation purpose only)

MS32263V1

Timing diagram for single-shot mode showing PER, Counter, Reset, and HRTIM_REPxR values.

A reset or start event from the HRTIM_SCIN[3:1] source causes the repetition to be decremented as any other reset. However, in SYNCIN-started single-shot mode (SYNCSTRTx bit set in the HRTIM_TIMxCR register), the repetition counter is decremented only on the 1st reset event following the period. Any subsequent reset does not alter the repetition counter until the counter is re-started by a new request on HRTIM_SCIN[3:1] inputs.

Set / reset crossbar

A “set” event correspond to a transition to the output active state, while a “reset” event corresponds to a transition to the output inactive state.

The polarity of the waveform is defined in the output stage to accommodate positive or negative logic external components: an active level corresponds to a logic level 1 for a positive polarity (POLx = 0), and to a logic level 0 for a negative polarity (POLx = 1).

Each of the timing units handles the set/reset crossbar for two outputs. These 2 outputs can be set, reset or toggled by up to 32 events that can be selected among the following sources:

Note: In up/down mode (UDM bit set to 1), the counter period event is defined as per the OUTROM[1:0] bit setting.

The event sources are ORed and multiple events can be simultaneously selected.

Each output is controlled by two 32-bit registers, one coding for the set (HRTIM_SETxyR) and another one for the reset (HRTIM_RSTxyR), where x stands for the timing unit: A..F and y stands for the output 1 or 2 (e.g. HRTIM_SETA1R, HRTIM_RSTC2R,...).

If the same event is selected for both set and reset, it toggles the output. It is not possible to toggle the output state more than one time per \( t_{\text{HRTIM}} \) period: in case of two consecutive toggling events within the same cycle, only the first one is considered.

The set and reset requests are taken into account only once the counter is enabled (TxCEN bit set), except if the software is forcing a request to allow the prepositioning of the outputs at timer start-up.

Table 234 summarizes the events from other timing units that can be used to set and reset the outputs. The number corresponds to the timer events (such as TIMEVNTx) listed in the register, and empty locations are indicating non-available events.

For instance, timer A outputs can be set or reset by the following events: timer B compare 1 and 2, timer C compare 2 and 3,... and timer E compare 3 is listed as TIMEVNT7 in HRTIM_SETA1R.

Table 234. Events mapping across timer A to F

SourceTimer ATimer BTimer CTimer DTimer ETimer F
CMP1CMP2CMP3CMP4CMP1CMP2CMP3CMP4CMP1CMP2CMP3CMP4CMP1CMP2CMP3CMP4CMP1CMP2CMP3CMP4CMP1CMP2CMP3CMP4
DestinationTA----12---34-56----78---9
TB12--------34--5678----9-
TC-12--34-----5-6---78-9--
TD1--2-3-4---5----6--78-9-
TE---1--2345--67--------89
TF--1-2--34--5--67-89-----

Figure 217 represents how a PWM signal is generated using two compare events.

Figure 217. Compare events action on outputs: set on compare 1, reset on compare 2

Timing diagram showing the generation of a PWM signal using compare events. The diagram includes four horizontal timelines: fHRTIM Clock, Counter, CMP registers, and HRTIM_CHA1 Output. The Counter timeline shows values from 00 to 160, then rolling over to 00 and 20. The CMP registers show HRTIM_CMP1AR = 0x0000 0080 and HRTIM_CMP2AR = 0x0000 0150. The HRTIM_CHA1 Output is a square wave that is set high at the 80 mark and reset low at the 150 mark. Register settings are HRTIM_SETA1R = 0x0000 0008 and HRTIM_RSTA1R = 0x0000 0010.

Timing diagram illustrating the generation of a PWM signal using compare events. The diagram shows the relationship between the HRTIM Clock, Counter, CMP registers, and the HRTIM_CHA1 Output.

Register setting: HRTIM_SETA1R = 0x0000 0008, HRTIM_RSTA1R = 0x0000 0010

MS32264V2

Timing diagram showing the generation of a PWM signal using compare events. The diagram includes four horizontal timelines: fHRTIM Clock, Counter, CMP registers, and HRTIM_CHA1 Output. The Counter timeline shows values from 00 to 160, then rolling over to 00 and 20. The CMP registers show HRTIM_CMP1AR = 0x0000 0080 and HRTIM_CMP2AR = 0x0000 0150. The HRTIM_CHA1 Output is a square wave that is set high at the 80 mark and reset low at the 150 mark. Register settings are HRTIM_SETA1R = 0x0000 0008 and HRTIM_RSTA1R = 0x0000 0010.

Set / reset on update events

A set or reset event on update is done at low resolution. When CKPSC[2:0] < 5, the high-resolution delay is set to its maximum value so that a set/reset event on update always lags as compared to other compare set/reset events, with a jitter varying between 0 and 31/32 of a f HRTIM clock period.

Half mode

This mode aims at generating square signal with fixed 50% duty cycle and variable frequency (typically for converters using resonant topologies). It allows to have the duty cycle automatically forced to half of the period value when a new period is programmed.

This mode is enabled by writing HALF bit to 1 in the HRTIM_TIMxCR register. When the HRTIM_PERxR register is written, it causes an automatic update of the compare 1 value with HRTIM_PERxR/2 value.

The output on which a square wave is generated must be programmed to have one transition on CMP1 event, and one transition on the period event, as follows:

The HALF mode overrides the content of the HRTIM_CMP1xR register. The access to the HRTIM_PERxR register only causes compare 1 internal register to be updated. The user-accessible HRTIM_CMP1xR register is not updated with the HRTIM_PERxR / 2 value.

When the preload is enabled (PREEN = 1, MUDIS, TxUDIS), compare 1 active register is refreshed on the update event. If the preload is disabled (PREEN= 0), compare 1 active register is updated as soon as HRTIM_PERxR is written.

The period must be greater than or equal to 6 periods of the \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock (0xC0 if CKPSC[2:0] = 0, 0x60 if CKPSC[2:0] = 1, 0x30 if CKPSC[2:0] = 2,...) when the HALF mode is enabled.

Interleaved mode

This mode complements the Half mode and helps the implementation of interleaved topologies.

It allows to re-compute automatically the content of compare registers when the HRTIM_PERxR value is updated.

The selection is done using the HALF bit and the IL[1:0] bits in HRTIM_MCR and HRTIM_TIMxCR registers, as shown on the Table 235 below.

Table 235. Interleaved mode selection

HALF bitINTLVD [1:0] bitsMode
000Disabled
001Triple interleaved (120°)
010Quad interleaved (90°)
011Reserved
1xxDual interleaved (180°)

Table 236 gives the compare values for the 3 available modes. The content of the compare registers is overridden. The corresponding compare events can be used to trigger an output set / reset or to reset a slave timer.

Table 236. Compare 1..3 values in interleaved mode

ModeDual interleaved
180°
Triple interleaved
120°
Quad interleaved
90°
CMP1 valuePERxR/2PERxR/3PERxR/4
CMP2 valueNot affected2x (PERxR/3)PERxR/2
CMP3 valueNot affectedNot affected3x (PERxR/4)

Note: In half and interleaved modes, the compare registers are controlled by hardware and writing them has no effect. However the written value is stored in the preload register and becomes active on the update event following the exit of these modes.

Note: The triple and quad interleaved modes must not be used simultaneously with other modes using CMP2 (dual channel dac trigger and triggered-half modes).

Null duty cycle exception case

The high-resolution behavior is not supported for pulses narrower than 3 \( t_{HRTIM} \) periods (see Section 28.3.7: Set / reset events priorities and narrow pulses management ) and any value strictly below 3 periods of the \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock (that is 0x60 if CKPSC[2:0] = 0, 0x30 if CKPSC[2:0] = 1, 0x18 if CKPSC[2:0] = 2,...) in the HRTIM_TIMxCMPy register is forbidden (see 28.5.19: HRTIM timer x compare 1 register (HRTIM_CMP1xR) (x = A to F) ).

However, it is possible to skip an output pulse and have a null duty cycle by simply writing a null value in the following two registers: HRTIM_TIMxCMP1 and HRTIM_TIMxCMP3, if and only if the following conditions are met:

For any other use case, this can be done by programming the SET and RESET events with the very same compare values, above 3 periods of the \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock. In this case, the output is reset forced (following the set/reset priority scheme defined in the Section 28.3.7: Set / reset events priorities and narrow pulses management ).

Swap mode

This mode allows to swap the two outputs with a single bit access: the output 1 signal is connected to the output 2 pin and the output 2 signal is connected to output 1 pin. The output swap is triggered with the SWPx bits in the HRTIM_CR2 register and is effective on the next update event.

The outputs are swapped prior to the set/reset crossbar unit, as following:

The swap mode is only affecting the preload register, and not the active registers.

Note: The preload mode must be enabled when using the swap mode.

Consequently, it does not modify the auxiliary outputs in parallel with the regular outputs going to the output stage (see Section 28.3.18 for details). They provide the following internal status, events and signals:

For instance the SETx1 flag is related to the output 1 when SWP = 0 and is related to the output 2 when SWPx = 1.

Similarly, the swap mode does not change the attribution of control bits in the HRTIM_OUTxR register (DIDLx, CHPx, FAULTx[1:0], IDLESx, POLx bits). For instance, the POL1 bit controls the output 1 polarity whatever the SWP bit value.

Note: The SWPx bits are ignored in push-pull mode (PSHPLL = 1 in the HRTIM_TIMxCR register).

Capture

The timing unit has the capability to capture the counter value, triggered by internal and external events. The purpose is to:

The capture is done with \( f_{HRTIM} \) resolution: for a clock prescaling ratio below 32 (CKPSC[2:0] < 5), the least significant bits of the register are not significant (read as 0).

The timer has 2 capture registers: HRTIM_CPT1xR and HRTIM_CPT2xR. The capture triggers are programmed in the HRTIM_CPT1xCR and HRTIM_CPT2xCR registers.

The capture of the timing unit counter can be triggered by up to 28 events that can be selected simultaneously in the HRTIM_CPT1xCR and HRTIM_CPT2xCR registers, among the following sources:

Several events can be selected simultaneously to handle multiple capture triggers. In this case, the concurrent trigger requests are ORed. The capture can generate an interrupt or a DMA request when CPTxE and CPTxDE bits are set in the HRTIM_TIMxDIER register.

Over-capture is not prevented by the circuitry: a new capture is triggered even if the previous value was not read, or if the capture flag was not cleared.

Figure 218. Timer A timing unit capture circuitry

Figure 218. Timer A timing unit capture circuitry diagram

The diagram illustrates the capture circuitry for Timer A. On the left, various input signals are shown: Timer B (CMP1, CMP2, TB1 set, TB1 reset), Timer C, Timer D (4), Timer E (4), Timer F (4), External events 1..10 (10), Timer A Update, and Software. These inputs are connected to a block labeled 'Capture 1 Trigger selection (OR)'. The output of this block is labeled 'CPT1 (IRQ & DMA)' and is connected to a 'Capture' block. The 'Capture' block is also connected to a 'Capture 1 register' above it and a 'Timer A counter' below it. The 'Timer A counter' is connected to a 'Prescaler' block, which is in turn connected to the input \( f_{HRTIM} \) . The 'Capture' block has a bidirectional connection with the 'Capture 1 register' and a unidirectional connection with the 'Timer A counter'. The 'Timer A counter' has a unidirectional connection with the 'Capture' block. The 'Prescaler' block has a unidirectional connection with the 'Timer A counter'.

Figure 218. Timer A timing unit capture circuitry diagram

MS32265V1

Auto-delayed mode

This mode allows to have compare events generated relatively to capture events, so that for instance an output change can happen with a programmed timing following a capture. In this case, the compare match occurs independently from the timer counter value. It enables the generation of waveforms with timings synchronized to external events without the need of software computation and interrupt servicing.

As long as no capture is triggered, the content of the HRTIM_CMPxR register is ignored (no compare event is generated when the counter value matches the compare value). Once the capture is triggered, the compare value programmed in HRTIM_CMPxR is summed with the captured counter value in HRTIM_CPTxyR, and it updates the internal auto-delayed compare register, as seen on Figure 219. The auto-delayed compare register is internal to the timing unit and cannot be read. The HRTIM_CMPxR preload register is not modified after the calculation.

This feature is available only for compare 2 and compare 4 registers. compare 2 is associated with capture 1, while compare 4 is associated with capture 2. HRTIM_CMP2xR and HRTIM_CMP4xR compares cannot be programmed with a value below 3 \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock periods, as in the regular mode.

Figure 219. Auto-delayed overview (compare 2 only)

Block diagram of the HRTIM auto-delayed compare mechanism for Compare 2. The diagram shows a Counter connected to Capture 1, Compare 2, Compare 1, and Compare 3. Capture 1 triggers an 'Add' block. The 'Add' block also receives input from Compare 2 and a 'Timeout feature if DELCMP2[1..0] = 1x' signal. The output of the 'Add' block is fed into 'Autodelayed Compare 2'. The output of 'Autodelayed Compare 2' is fed into a multiplexer (MUX) controlled by DELCMP2[1..0] bits. The MUX has two inputs: 00 and !00. The output of the MUX is fed into Compare 2. The diagram also shows the flow of data from the Counter to the Compare blocks and from the Compare blocks to the MUX.
Block diagram of the HRTIM auto-delayed compare mechanism for Compare 2. The diagram shows a Counter connected to Capture 1, Compare 2, Compare 1, and Compare 3. Capture 1 triggers an 'Add' block. The 'Add' block also receives input from Compare 2 and a 'Timeout feature if DELCMP2[1..0] = 1x' signal. The output of the 'Add' block is fed into 'Autodelayed Compare 2'. The output of 'Autodelayed Compare 2' is fed into a multiplexer (MUX) controlled by DELCMP2[1..0] bits. The MUX has two inputs: 00 and !00. The output of the MUX is fed into Compare 2. The diagram also shows the flow of data from the Counter to the Compare blocks and from the Compare blocks to the MUX.

The auto-delayed compare is only valid from the capture up to the period event: once the counter has reached the period value, the system is re-armed with compare disabled until a capture occurs.

DELCMP2[1:0] and DELCMP4[1:0] bits in HRTIM_TIMxCR register allow to configure the auto-delayed mode as follows:

match (DELCMPx[1:0]= 10) or a compare 3 match (DELCMPx[1:0]= 11) to have a timeout function if capture 1/2 event is missing.

When the capture occurs, the comparison is done with the (HRTIM_CMP2/4xR + HRTIM_CPT1/2xR) value. If no capture is triggered within the period, the behavior depends on the DELCMPx[1:0] value:

The captures are enabled again at the beginning of the next PWM period.

If the result of the auto-delayed summation is above 0xFFFF (overflow), the value is ignored and no compare event is generated until a new period is started.

Note: DELCMPx[1:0] bitfield must be reset when reprogrammed from one value to the other to re-initialize properly the auto-delayed mechanism, for instance:

As an example, Figure 220 shows how the following signal is generated:

Note: To simplify the figure, the high-resolution is not used in this example (CKPSC[2:0] = 101), thus the counter is incremented at the \( f_{HRTIM} \) rate. Similarly, the external event signal is shown without any resynchronization delay: practically, there is a delay of 1 to 2 \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock periods between the falling edge and the capture event due to an internal resynchronization stage which is necessary to process external input signals.

Figure 220. Auto-delayed compare

Timing diagram for Figure 220. Auto-delayed compare. The diagram shows five horizontal timelines: Counter, HRTIM_CPT1xR, HRTIM_CMP2xR, HRTIM_CMP1xR, External event, and Output. The Counter timeline shows values 0 through 18, then 0 through 3. HRTIM_CPT1xR shows 'Previous' and '7'. HRTIM_CMP2xR shows 'Preload=5 Active: disabled', 'Preload=5 Active=12', and 'Preload=8 Active: disabled'. HRTIM_CMP1xR shows '2' and '5'. External event shows a falling edge. Output shows a pulse set at Counter=2 and reset at Counter=12 (5 cycles after the falling edge). An 'Update' event occurs at Counter=18. A 'Capture' event is indicated at the falling edge of the External event. A '~5 cycles' delay is shown between the falling edge and the output reset.
Timing diagram for Figure 220. Auto-delayed compare. The diagram shows five horizontal timelines: Counter, HRTIM_CPT1xR, HRTIM_CMP2xR, HRTIM_CMP1xR, External event, and Output. The Counter timeline shows values 0 through 18, then 0 through 3. HRTIM_CPT1xR shows 'Previous' and '7'. HRTIM_CMP2xR shows 'Preload=5 Active: disabled', 'Preload=5 Active=12', and 'Preload=8 Active: disabled'. HRTIM_CMP1xR shows '2' and '5'. External event shows a falling edge. Output shows a pulse set at Counter=2 and reset at Counter=12 (5 cycles after the falling edge). An 'Update' event occurs at Counter=18. A 'Capture' event is indicated at the falling edge of the External event. A '~5 cycles' delay is shown between the falling edge and the output reset.

A regular compare channel (e.g. compare 1) is used for the output set: as soon as the counter matches the content of the compare register, the output goes to its active state.

A delayed compare is used for the output reset: the compare event can be generated only if a capture event has occurred. No event is generated when the counter matches the delayed compare value (counter = 4). Once the capture event has been triggered by the external event, the content of the capture register is summed to the delayed compare value to have the new compare value. In the example, the auto-delayed value 4 is summed to the capture equal to 7 to give a value of 12 in the auto-delayed compare register. From this time on, the compare event can be generated and happens when the counter is equal to 12, causing the output to be reset.

Overcapture management in auto-delayed mode

Overcapture is prevented when the auto-delayed mode is enabled (DELCMPx[1:0] = 01, 10, 11).

When multiple capture requests occur within the same counting period, only the first capture is taken into account to compute the auto-delayed compare value. A new capture is possible only:

Changing auto-delayed compare values

When the auto-delayed compare value is preloaded (PREEN bit set), the new compare value is taken into account on the next coming update event (for instance on the period event), regardless of when the compare register was written and if the capture occurred (see Figure 220 , where the delay is changed when the counter rolls over).

When the preload is disabled (PREEN bit reset), the new compare value is taken into account immediately, even if it is modified after the capture event has occurred, as per the example below:

  1. 1. At t1, DELCMP2 = 1.
  2. 2. At t2, CMP2_act = 0x40 => comparison disabled
  3. 3. At t3, a capture event occurs capturing the value CPTR1 = 0x20. => comparison enabled, compare value = 0x60
  4. 4. At t4, CMP2_act = 0x100 (before the counter reached value CPTR1 + 0x40) => comparison still enabled, new compare value = 0x120
  5. 5. At t5, the counter reaches the period value => comparison disabled, cmp2_act = 0x100

Similarly, if the CMP1(CMP3) value changes while DELCMPx = 10 or 11, and preload is disabled:

  1. 1. At t1, DELCMP2 = 2.
  2. 2. At t2, CMP2_act = 0x40 => comparison disabled
  3. 3. At t3, CMP3 event occurs - CMP3_act = 0x50 before capture 1 event occurs => comparison enabled, compare value = 0x90
  4. 4. At t4, CMP3_act = 0x100 (before the counter reached value 0x90) => comparison still enabled, compare 2 event occurs at = 0x140

Triggered-half mode

The purpose of this mode is to allow the synchronization of 2 interleaved converters that have variable frequency operation and require a 180° phase-shift. The basic principle is to

have a master-slave system. The slave converter synchronization is continuously adjusted based on the previous switching period of the master converter.

This is done using the capture unit. The switching period of the master converter is captured, divided by 2 and then stored in the compare 2 register by hardware. The compare 2 register contains a value equal to half of the captured period, which is the master converter switching period. The compare 2 event can then be used to trigger a second timing unit that manages the slave converter.

This mode is enabled by setting the TRGH LF bit in the HRTIM_TIMxCR2 register. This bit cannot be changed once the timer is operating (TxEN bit set).

The triggered-half mode must not be used simultaneously with other modes using CMP2 (dual channel dac trigger, interleaved and balanced idle modes).

The initial value CMP2 can be written by the user, but is ignored once the first capture is triggered. The preload mechanism is disabled for CMP2 when the TRGH LF bit is reset.

Figure 221. Triggered-half mode example

Timing diagram for Figure 221. Triggered-half mode example. The diagram shows four waveforms over time: EEV1 (Event 1), Master (HRTIM_CHA1), Slave (HRTIM_CHB1), and Blanking (HRTIM_CHA2). EEV1 is a sawtooth-like signal with 'Capture' points marked at its rising edges. CMP1 and CMP2 are horizontal dashed lines representing compare levels. Master (HRTIM_CHA1) is a square wave that toggles between EEV1 rising edges (Capture) and EEV2 falling edges. Slave (HRTIM_CHB1) is a square wave that toggles between EEV2 falling edges and EEV3 rising edges. Blanking (HRTIM_CHA2) is a square wave that is high during the capture period (between EEV1 rising and EEV2 falling) and low otherwise. A legend at the bottom left details the configuration for each signal.

HRTIM_CHA1
Set on EEV1 (EEV1 triggers Capture1)
Reset on EEV2
EEV1 Blanking on TIMA_CMP1 (avoid frequency run-away)

HRTIM_CHB1
Set on CMP2 (triggered-half) or EEV1 blanking by TIMA_TA2
(TB1 is set if EEV1 occurs between CMP1 and CMP2, else on CMP2)
Reset on EEV3

HRTIM_CHA2
Set on TA_CMP1
Reset on TA_CMP2

MSv45796V3

Timing diagram for Figure 221. Triggered-half mode example. The diagram shows four waveforms over time: EEV1 (Event 1), Master (HRTIM_CHA1), Slave (HRTIM_CHB1), and Blanking (HRTIM_CHA2). EEV1 is a sawtooth-like signal with 'Capture' points marked at its rising edges. CMP1 and CMP2 are horizontal dashed lines representing compare levels. Master (HRTIM_CHA1) is a square wave that toggles between EEV1 rising edges (Capture) and EEV2 falling edges. Slave (HRTIM_CHB1) is a square wave that toggles between EEV2 falling edges and EEV3 rising edges. Blanking (HRTIM_CHA2) is a square wave that is high during the capture period (between EEV1 rising and EEV2 falling) and low otherwise. A legend at the bottom left details the configuration for each signal.

Note: In triggered half mode, the compare2 register is controlled by hardware and writing it has no effect. However the written value is stored in the preload register and becomes active on the update event following the exit of this mode.

Push-pull mode

This mode primarily aims at driving converters using push-pull topologies. It also needs to be enabled when the delayed idle protection is required, typically for resonant converters (refer to Section 28.3.10: Delayed protection ).

The push-pull mode is enabled by setting PSHPLL bit in the HRTIM_TIMxCR register.

It applies the signals generated by the crossbar to output 1 and output 2 alternatively, on the period basis, maintaining the other output to its inactive state. The redirection rate (push-pull frequency) is defined by the timer's period event, as shown on Figure 222 . The push-pull period is twice the timer counting period.

Figure 222. Push-pull mode block diagram

Figure 222. Push-pull mode block diagram. The diagram shows two inputs, 'Out 1 (from crossbar)' and 'Out 2 (from crossbar)', entering a 'Push-Pull logic' block. The logic block also receives 'Roll-over events'. The outputs of the logic block are connected to two 2-to-1 multiplexers. The first multiplexer selects between 'Inactive' (0) and the output of the logic block (1) to produce 'Out 1'. The second multiplexer selects between 'Inactive' (1) and the output of the logic block (0) to produce 'Out 2'. Both multiplexers are controlled by the 'PSHPLL' signal. The outputs 'Out 1' and 'Out 2' are then sent 'To the output stage'. A small label 'MS32268V1' is visible in the bottom right corner of the diagram.
Figure 222. Push-pull mode block diagram. The diagram shows two inputs, 'Out 1 (from crossbar)' and 'Out 2 (from crossbar)', entering a 'Push-Pull logic' block. The logic block also receives 'Roll-over events'. The outputs of the logic block are connected to two 2-to-1 multiplexers. The first multiplexer selects between 'Inactive' (0) and the output of the logic block (1) to produce 'Out 1'. The second multiplexer selects between 'Inactive' (1) and the output of the logic block (0) to produce 'Out 2'. Both multiplexers are controlled by the 'PSHPLL' signal. The outputs 'Out 1' and 'Out 2' are then sent 'To the output stage'. A small label 'MS32268V1' is visible in the bottom right corner of the diagram.

The push-pull mode is available when the timer operates in continuous mode and in single-shot mode. It is necessary to disable the timer to stop a push-pull operation and to reset the counter before re-enabling it.

To get a correct behavior, the event selected as source of the counter reset must be also selected for setting (or resetting) the output. It must set the output if the output is set on period, else it must reset it. If it is not done, the output switching from its inactive period to its active period may be incorrect (may unexpectedly rise or may unexpectedly stay low).

The signal shape is defined using HRTIM_SETxyR and HRTIM_RSTxyR for both outputs. It is necessary to have HRTIM_SETx1R = HRTIM_SETx2R and HRTIM_RSTx1R = HRTIM_RSTx2R to have both outputs with identical waveforms and to achieve a balanced operation. Still, it is possible to have different programming on both outputs for other uses.

The CPPSAT status bit in HRTIM_TIMxISR indicates on which output the signal is currently active. CPPSTAT is reset when the push-pull mode is disabled.

In the example given on Figure 223 , the timer internal waveform is defined as follows:

Figure 223. Push-pull mode example

Timing diagram for Figure 223: Push-pull mode example. It shows the relationship between a sawtooth counter, a compare level, and various logic outputs. The counter resets at the 'Period' level. 'Roll-over events' mark these resets. 'Push-Pull logic' toggles state at each roll-over. 'Crossbar output' is set high at the period and reset at 'Compare 1'. 'HRTIM_CHx1' and 'HRTIM_CHx2' show alternating pulses derived from the crossbar output and push-pull logic.

The diagram illustrates the following signals:

MS32269V2

Timing diagram for Figure 223: Push-pull mode example. It shows the relationship between a sawtooth counter, a compare level, and various logic outputs. The counter resets at the 'Period' level. 'Roll-over events' mark these resets. 'Push-Pull logic' toggles state at each roll-over. 'Crossbar output' is set high at the period and reset at 'Compare 1'. 'HRTIM_CHx1' and 'HRTIM_CHx2' show alternating pulses derived from the crossbar output and push-pull logic.

Figure 224 shows how the deadtime is inserted in push-pull mode, for both positive and negative deadtimes. In this case, the outputs are not complemented any more, and the deadtime is applied on each output individually (both output 1 and output 2 of the crossbar are used).

Figure 224. Push-pull with deadtime

Timing diagram for push-pull mode with deadtime. The diagram shows several signal traces over time. At the top, 'Compare 2' and 'Compare 1' are shown as sawtooth waveforms. Below them, 'Roll-over events' are indicated by vertical pulses. The 'Push-Pull logic' trace shows a square wave. The next section, 'Set on Period Reset on CMP1', shows the 'Crossbar output', 'HRTIM_CHx1', and 'HRTIM_CHx2' signals. Deadtime rising and falling intervals are marked between the rising and falling edges of the crossbar output and the corresponding channel outputs. The bottom section, 'Set on Period Reset on CMP2', shows the 'Crossbar output', 'HRTIM_CHx1', and 'HRTIM_CHx2' signals. Negative deadtime rising and falling intervals are marked between the rising and falling edges of the crossbar output and the corresponding channel outputs. The diagram is labeled MSv48356V2.
Timing diagram for push-pull mode with deadtime. The diagram shows several signal traces over time. At the top, 'Compare 2' and 'Compare 1' are shown as sawtooth waveforms. Below them, 'Roll-over events' are indicated by vertical pulses. The 'Push-Pull logic' trace shows a square wave. The next section, 'Set on Period Reset on CMP1', shows the 'Crossbar output', 'HRTIM_CHx1', and 'HRTIM_CHx2' signals. Deadtime rising and falling intervals are marked between the rising and falling edges of the crossbar output and the corresponding channel outputs. The bottom section, 'Set on Period Reset on CMP2', shows the 'Crossbar output', 'HRTIM_CHx1', and 'HRTIM_CHx2' signals. Negative deadtime rising and falling intervals are marked between the rising and falling edges of the crossbar output and the corresponding channel outputs. The diagram is labeled MSv48356V2.

Deadtime

A deadtime insertion unit allows to generate a couple of complementary signals from a single reference waveform, with programmable delays between active state transitions. This is commonly used for topologies using half-bridges or full bridges. It simplifies the software: only 1 waveform is programmed and controlled to drive two outputs.

The Dead time insertion is enabled by setting DTEN bit in HRTIM_OUTxR register. The complementary signals are built based on the reference waveform defined for output 1, using HRTIM_SETx1R and HRTIM_RSTx1R registers: HRTIM_SETx2R and HRTIM_RSTx2R registers are not significant when DTEN bit is set.

Two deadtimes can be defined in relationship with the rising edge and the falling edge of the reference waveform, as in Figure 225 .

Figure 225. Complementary outputs with deadtime insertion

Timing diagram showing complementary outputs with deadtime insertion. The diagram includes five waveforms: Counter Compare (a sawtooth wave), Crossbar output 1 (a square wave), Deadtime rising (indicated by a right arrow), Deadtime falling (indicated by a left arrow), and HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 (complementary square waves). The deadtime is shown as the time interval between the falling edge of one output and the rising edge of the other.

Timing diagram showing complementary outputs with deadtime insertion. The diagram includes five waveforms: Counter Compare (a sawtooth wave), Crossbar output 1 (a square wave), Deadtime rising (indicated by a right arrow), Deadtime falling (indicated by a left arrow), and HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 (complementary square waves). The deadtime is shown as the time interval between the falling edge of one output and the rising edge of the other.

MS32270V2

Timing diagram showing complementary outputs with deadtime insertion. The diagram includes five waveforms: Counter Compare (a sawtooth wave), Crossbar output 1 (a square wave), Deadtime rising (indicated by a right arrow), Deadtime falling (indicated by a left arrow), and HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 (complementary square waves). The deadtime is shown as the time interval between the falling edge of one output and the rising edge of the other.

Negative deadtime values can be defined when some control overlap is required. This is done using the deadtime sign bits (SDTFx and SDTRx bits in HRTIM_DTxR register).

Figure 226 shows complementary signal waveforms depending on respective signs.

Figure 226. Deadtime insertion versus deadtime sign (1 indicates negative deadtime)

Timing diagram showing deadtime insertion versus deadtime sign. The diagram includes five waveforms: Out 1 (from crossbar), Deadtime rising (indicated by a right arrow), Deadtime falling (indicated by a left arrow), and four pairs of complementary square waves (HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2) corresponding to different deadtime sign settings: SDTRx = 0, SDTFx = 0; SDTRx = 1, SDTFx = 1; SDTRx = 0, SDTFx = 1; and SDTRx = 1, SDTFx = 0. The deadtime is shown as the time interval between the falling edge of one output and the rising edge of the other.

Timing diagram showing deadtime insertion versus deadtime sign. The diagram includes five waveforms: Out 1 (from crossbar), Deadtime rising (indicated by a right arrow), Deadtime falling (indicated by a left arrow), and four pairs of complementary square waves (HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2) corresponding to different deadtime sign settings: SDTRx = 0, SDTFx = 0; SDTRx = 1, SDTFx = 1; SDTRx = 0, SDTFx = 1; and SDTRx = 1, SDTFx = 0. The deadtime is shown as the time interval between the falling edge of one output and the rising edge of the other.

MS32271V1

Timing diagram showing deadtime insertion versus deadtime sign. The diagram includes five waveforms: Out 1 (from crossbar), Deadtime rising (indicated by a right arrow), Deadtime falling (indicated by a left arrow), and four pairs of complementary square waves (HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2) corresponding to different deadtime sign settings: SDTRx = 0, SDTFx = 0; SDTRx = 1, SDTFx = 1; SDTRx = 0, SDTFx = 1; and SDTRx = 1, SDTFx = 0. The deadtime is shown as the time interval between the falling edge of one output and the rising edge of the other.

The deadtime values are defined with DTFx[8:0] and DTRx[8:0] bitfields and based on a specific clock prescaled according to DTPRSC[2:0] bits, as follows:

\[ t_{DTx} = \pm DTx[8:0] \times t_{DTG} \]

where x is either R or F and \( t_{DTG} = (2^{(DTPRSC[2:0])}) \times (t_{HRTIM} / 8) \) .

Table 237 gives the resolution and maximum absolute values depending on the prescaler value.

Table 237. Deadtime resolution and max absolute values

DTPRSC[2:0]\( t_{DTG} \)\( t_{DTx} \) max\( f_{HRTIM} = 170 \text{ MHz} \)
\( t_{DTG} \) (ns)\( |t_{DTx}| \) max ( \( \mu\text{s} \) )
000\( t_{HRTIM} / 8 \)\( 511 * t_{DTG} \)0.730.38
001\( t_{HRTIM} / 4 \)1.470.75
010\( t_{HRTIM} / 2 \)2.941.50
011\( t_{HRTIM} \)5.893.01
100\( 2 * t_{HRTIM} \)11.766.01
101\( 4 * t_{HRTIM} \)23.5312.03
110\( 8 * t_{HRTIM} \)47.0624.04
111\( 16 * t_{HRTIM} \)94.1248.10

Figure 227 to Figure 230 present how the deadtime generator behaves for reference waveforms with pulsewidth below the deadtime values, for all deadtime configurations.

Figure 227. Complementary outputs for low pulsewidth (SDTRx = SDTFx = 0)

Timing diagram for Figure 227 showing complementary outputs for low pulsewidth with SDTRx = SDTFx = 0. The diagram shows three waveforms: Ref., HRTIM_CHx1, and HRTIM_CHx2. The Ref. waveform is a periodic pulse. HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 are complementary outputs. The diagram illustrates that the deadtime is skipped when the pulsewidth is below the deadtime values. Labels include DTF (Deadtime Falling) and DTR (Deadtime Rising). Text below the waveforms indicates 'Deadtime rising skipped' and 'Deadtime falling skipped'. The diagram is labeled MS32272V3.
Timing diagram for Figure 227 showing complementary outputs for low pulsewidth with SDTRx = SDTFx = 0. The diagram shows three waveforms: Ref., HRTIM_CHx1, and HRTIM_CHx2. The Ref. waveform is a periodic pulse. HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 are complementary outputs. The diagram illustrates that the deadtime is skipped when the pulsewidth is below the deadtime values. Labels include DTF (Deadtime Falling) and DTR (Deadtime Rising). Text below the waveforms indicates 'Deadtime rising skipped' and 'Deadtime falling skipped'. The diagram is labeled MS32272V3.

Figure 228. Complementary outputs for low pulsewidth (SDTRx = SDTFx = 1)

Timing diagram for Figure 228 showing complementary outputs for low pulsewidth with SDTRx = SDTFx = 1. The diagram shows three waveforms: Ref., HRTIM_CHx1, and HRTIM_CHx2. The Ref. waveform is a periodic pulse. HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 are complementary outputs. The diagram illustrates that the deadtime is skipped when the pulsewidth is below the deadtime values. Labels include DTF (Deadtime Falling) and DTR (Deadtime Rising). Text below the waveforms indicates 'Deadtime rising skipped' and 'Deadtime falling skipped'. The diagram is labeled MS32273V3.
Timing diagram for Figure 228 showing complementary outputs for low pulsewidth with SDTRx = SDTFx = 1. The diagram shows three waveforms: Ref., HRTIM_CHx1, and HRTIM_CHx2. The Ref. waveform is a periodic pulse. HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 are complementary outputs. The diagram illustrates that the deadtime is skipped when the pulsewidth is below the deadtime values. Labels include DTF (Deadtime Falling) and DTR (Deadtime Rising). Text below the waveforms indicates 'Deadtime rising skipped' and 'Deadtime falling skipped'. The diagram is labeled MS32273V3.

Figure 229. Complementary outputs for low pulsewidth (SDTRx = 0, SDTFx = 1)

Timing diagram for Figure 229 showing complementary outputs for low pulsewidth. The diagram displays three waveforms: Ref., HRTIM_CHx1, and HRTIM_CHx2. The Ref. signal is a periodic square wave. HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 are complementary outputs. The diagram shows two instances of the Ref. signal. In the first instance, the falling edge of Ref. occurs while HRTIM_CHx1 is high and HRTIM_CHx2 is low. The deadtime falling and rising are skipped. In the second instance, the falling edge of Ref. occurs while HRTIM_CHx1 is low and HRTIM_CHx2 is high. The deadtime falling and rising are skipped. The text 'MS32274V3' is visible in the bottom right corner.
Timing diagram for Figure 229 showing complementary outputs for low pulsewidth. The diagram displays three waveforms: Ref., HRTIM_CHx1, and HRTIM_CHx2. The Ref. signal is a periodic square wave. HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 are complementary outputs. The diagram shows two instances of the Ref. signal. In the first instance, the falling edge of Ref. occurs while HRTIM_CHx1 is high and HRTIM_CHx2 is low. The deadtime falling and rising are skipped. In the second instance, the falling edge of Ref. occurs while HRTIM_CHx1 is low and HRTIM_CHx2 is high. The deadtime falling and rising are skipped. The text 'MS32274V3' is visible in the bottom right corner.

Figure 230. Complementary outputs for low pulsewidth (SDTRx = 1, SDTFx=0)

Timing diagram for Figure 230 showing complementary outputs for low pulsewidth. The diagram displays three waveforms: Ref., HRTIM_CHx1, and HRTIM_CHx2. The Ref. signal is a periodic square wave. HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 are complementary outputs. The diagram shows two instances of the Ref. signal. In the first instance, the falling edge of Ref. occurs while HRTIM_CHx1 is high and HRTIM_CHx2 is low. The deadtime falling and rising are skipped. In the second instance, the falling edge of Ref. occurs while HRTIM_CHx1 is low and HRTIM_CHx2 is high. The deadtime falling and rising are skipped. The text 'MS32275V3' is visible in the bottom right corner.
Timing diagram for Figure 230 showing complementary outputs for low pulsewidth. The diagram displays three waveforms: Ref., HRTIM_CHx1, and HRTIM_CHx2. The Ref. signal is a periodic square wave. HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 are complementary outputs. The diagram shows two instances of the Ref. signal. In the first instance, the falling edge of Ref. occurs while HRTIM_CHx1 is high and HRTIM_CHx2 is low. The deadtime falling and rising are skipped. In the second instance, the falling edge of Ref. occurs while HRTIM_CHx1 is low and HRTIM_CHx2 is high. The deadtime falling and rising are skipped. The text 'MS32275V3' is visible in the bottom right corner.

For safety purposes, it is possible to prevent any spurious write into the deadtime registers by locking the sign and/or the value of the deadtime using DTFLKx, DTRLKx, DTFSLKx and DTRSLKx. Once these bits are set, the related bits and bitfields are becoming read only until the next system reset.

Caution: DTEN bit must not be changed in the following cases:

Otherwise, an unpredictable behavior would result.

It is therefore necessary to disable the timer (TxCEN bit reset) and have the corresponding outputs disabled.

For the particular case where DTEN must be set while the burst mode is enabled with a deadtime upon entry (BME = 1, DIDL = 1, IDLEM = 1), it is necessary to force the two outputs in their IDLES state by software commands (SST, RST bits) before setting DTEN bit. This is to avoid any side effect resulting from a burst mode entry that would happen immediately before a deadtime enable.

28.3.5 Master timer

The main purpose of the master timer is to provide common signals to the 6 timing units, either for synchronization purpose or to set/reset outputs. It does not have direct control over any outputs, but still can be used indirectly by the set/reset crossbars.

Figure 231 provides an overview of the master timer.

Figure 231. Master timer overview

Figure 231. Master timer overview diagram showing the internal architecture of the HRTIM master timer.

The diagram illustrates the internal architecture of the master timer. At the top left, an external clock signal \( f_{HRTIM} \) is divided by a Prescaler to provide a clock (ck) to the Counter. The Counter is also controlled by Start and Reset signals from an External Synchronization Unit, which outputs a SYNC signal. The Counter's output is connected to a Period register and a Half register. The Period register is connected to a Repetition unit, which outputs a REP signal, and also to a 'To Timer A..F crossbars' block. The Half register is connected to the same crossbars block. The Counter's output is also connected to four Compare units (Compare 1, Compare 2, Compare 3, and Compare 4). Each Compare unit has a corresponding Compare register (CMP1, CMP2, CMP3, CMP4) and outputs a compare signal (CMP1, CMP2, CMP3, CMP4) to the crossbars block. A Register unit, which denotes a register with preload, is connected to the Counter and outputs an Interrupt / DMA request signal. The crossbars block on the right receives inputs from the Repetition unit, the Period register, the Half register, the Compare units, and the Register unit, and outputs signals to the Timer A..F crossbars.

Figure 231. Master timer overview diagram showing the internal architecture of the HRTIM master timer.

The master timer is based on the very same architecture as the timing units, with the following differences:

The master timer control register includes all the timer enable bits, for the master and timer A..F timing units. This allows to have all timer synchronously started with a single write access.

It also handles the external synchronization for the whole HRTIM timer (see Section 28.3.19: Synchronizing the HRTIM with other timers or HRTIM instances ), with both MCU internal and external (inputs/outputs) resources.

Master timer control registers are mapped with the same offset as the timing units' registers.

28.3.6 Up-down counting mode

The HRTIM is natively designed with up-counters. It offers however an operating mode with up-down counters, also called center-aligned mode.

This mode is enabled using the UDM bit in the HRTIM_TIMxCR2 register. This bit must not be changed once the timer is operating (TxEN bit set). It is only available for the TIMA..F. The master timer only works in up-counting mode.

Not all HRTIM features are supported in up-down counting. This section details the functional differences versus up-counting mode.

The period in HRTIM_PERxR must be preloaded (or static) in up-down mode. It can be updated only on period event or on counter reset.

The set/reset crossbar programming differs as follows:

The events coming from the timing units are setting/resetting the outputs depending on the counter up/down direction:

This applies to :

The Figure 232 below shows how to generate basic waveforms.

Figure 232. Basic symmetric waveform in up-down counting mode

Timing diagram showing basic symmetric waveforms in up-down counting mode. The top graph shows the Counter value (a sawtooth wave) and four comparison levels (CMP1, CMP2, CMP3, CMP4). The bottom graph shows the output waveforms for HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2. HRTIM_CHx1 is set by CMP1 during up-counting and reset by CMP1 during down-counting. HRTIM_CHx2 is set by CMP1 during up-counting and reset by CMP2 during down-counting. The diagram illustrates the relationship between the counter direction and the output state changes.

The figure is a timing diagram illustrating basic symmetric waveforms in up-down counting mode. At the top, the 'Counter' is shown as a sawtooth waveform that ramps up and then down. Four horizontal dashed lines represent comparison levels: CMP4 (highest), CMP3, CMP2, and CMP1 (lowest). Below the counter, two output waveforms are shown: HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2. HRTIM_CHx1 is initially low. It transitions to high when the counter is up-counting and reaches the CMP1 level ('Set on CMP1'). It transitions back to low when the counter is down-counting and reaches the CMP1 level ('Set on CMP1'). HRTIM_CHx2 is initially low. It transitions to high when the counter is up-counting and reaches the CMP1 level ('Set on CMP1'). It transitions back to low when the counter is down-counting and reaches the CMP2 level ('Reset on CMP2'). Vertical dashed lines connect the counter's comparison points to the output transitions. The diagram is labeled 'MSv45797V2' in the bottom right corner.

Timing diagram showing basic symmetric waveforms in up-down counting mode. The top graph shows the Counter value (a sawtooth wave) and four comparison levels (CMP1, CMP2, CMP3, CMP4). The bottom graph shows the output waveforms for HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2. HRTIM_CHx1 is set by CMP1 during up-counting and reset by CMP1 during down-counting. HRTIM_CHx2 is set by CMP1 during up-counting and reset by CMP2 during down-counting. The diagram illustrates the relationship between the counter direction and the output state changes.

The Figure 233 below shows how to generate some more complex waveforms, using the 4 available compare units and the toggle mode.

Figure 233. Complex symmetric waveform in up-down counting mode

Timing diagram for Figure 233 showing a symmetric waveform in up-down counting mode. The diagram includes a 'Counter' sawtooth wave, four compare levels (CMP1, CMP2, CMP3, CMP4), and two output waveforms (HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2). HRTIM_CHx1 is controlled by 'Set on CMP1', 'Set on CMP2', 'Reset on CMP3', and 'Reset on CMP4'. HRTIM_CHx2 is controlled by 'Set on CMP1', 'Toggle on CMP2', 'Toggle on CMP3', and 'Toggle on CMP4'. Vertical dashed lines indicate the timing of these events relative to the counter's up and down slopes.
Timing diagram for Figure 233 showing a symmetric waveform in up-down counting mode. The diagram includes a 'Counter' sawtooth wave, four compare levels (CMP1, CMP2, CMP3, CMP4), and two output waveforms (HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2). HRTIM_CHx1 is controlled by 'Set on CMP1', 'Set on CMP2', 'Reset on CMP3', and 'Reset on CMP4'. HRTIM_CHx2 is controlled by 'Set on CMP1', 'Toggle on CMP2', 'Toggle on CMP3', and 'Toggle on CMP4'. Vertical dashed lines indicate the timing of these events relative to the counter's up and down slopes.

The Figure 234 shows how to generate an asymmetric waveform. In this case, it must be noticed that it is necessary to have compare 2 value greater than compare 1 value for the waveform to be asymmetric.

Figure 234. Asymmetric waveform in up-down counting mode

Timing diagram for Figure 234 showing an asymmetric waveform in up-down counting mode. The diagram includes a 'Counter' sawtooth wave, two compare levels (CMP1 and CMP2), and one output waveform (HRTIM_CHx2). HRTIM_CHx2 is controlled by 'Set on CMP1' and 'Set on CMP2'. The diagram shows that the waveform is asymmetric because CMP2 is set to a higher value than CMP1.
Timing diagram for Figure 234 showing an asymmetric waveform in up-down counting mode. The diagram includes a 'Counter' sawtooth wave, two compare levels (CMP1 and CMP2), and one output waveform (HRTIM_CHx2). HRTIM_CHx2 is controlled by 'Set on CMP1' and 'Set on CMP2'. The diagram shows that the waveform is asymmetric because CMP2 is set to a higher value than CMP1.

Note: For asymmetric operation, it is required that \( CMP2 > CMP1 \) .

The behavior of the software forcing bits and external events EXTEVNT1..10 is identical for up-only and up-down counting mode. The Figure 235 below shows how a pulse can be shorted in response to external events.

Figure 235. External event management in up-down counting mode

Timing diagram for Figure 235 showing external event management in up-down counting mode. The diagram includes a 'Counter' (triangle wave), 'CMP2' and 'CMP1' (dashed lines), 'Set on CMP1' (upward arrow), 'External event 1' (downward arrows), and 'HRTIM_CHx2' (square wave). The counter starts at 0, ramps up, and when it reaches the CMP1 threshold, a 'Set on CMP1' event occurs. The counter continues to ramp up to a peak and then ramps down. When it reaches the CMP1 threshold again, an 'External event 1' occurs, which shortens the pulse on HRTIM_CHx2. The counter continues to ramp down to 0 and then ramps up again. The HRTIM_CHx2 signal is high when the counter is between the CMP1 and CMP2 thresholds and low otherwise. The diagram is labeled MSv47418V2.
Timing diagram for Figure 235 showing external event management in up-down counting mode. The diagram includes a 'Counter' (triangle wave), 'CMP2' and 'CMP1' (dashed lines), 'Set on CMP1' (upward arrow), 'External event 1' (downward arrows), and 'HRTIM_CHx2' (square wave). The counter starts at 0, ramps up, and when it reaches the CMP1 threshold, a 'Set on CMP1' event occurs. The counter continues to ramp up to a peak and then ramps down. When it reaches the CMP1 threshold again, an 'External event 1' occurs, which shortens the pulse on HRTIM_CHx2. The counter continues to ramp down to 0 and then ramps up again. The HRTIM_CHx2 signal is high when the counter is between the CMP1 and CMP2 thresholds and low otherwise. The diagram is labeled MSv47418V2.

The up-down counting mode is available for both continuous and single-shot (retriggerable and non-retriggerable) operating modes. A reset causes the counter to re-start from 0. The Figure 236 below shows the counter behavior in single-shot retriggerable mode, for TimB.

Figure 236. Interleaved up-down counter operation

Timing diagram for Figure 236 showing interleaved up-down counter operation. The diagram includes 'Master' (triangle wave), 'TimA' (triangle wave), 'TimB' (triangle wave), 'HRTIM_CHx1' (square wave), and 'HRTIM_CHy1' (square wave). The Master timer resets TimB. TimA and TimB are interleaved up-down counters. HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHy1 are output signals. The diagram is labeled MSv47419V2.
Timing diagram for Figure 236 showing interleaved up-down counter operation. The diagram includes 'Master' (triangle wave), 'TimA' (triangle wave), 'TimB' (triangle wave), 'HRTIM_CHx1' (square wave), and 'HRTIM_CHy1' (square wave). The Master timer resets TimB. TimA and TimB are interleaved up-down counters. HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHy1 are output signals. The diagram is labeled MSv47419V2.

Figure 237. Interleaved up-down counter operation

Timing diagram for Figure 237 showing interleaved up-down counter operation. It features four signal traces: TimA and TimB (triangular/sawtooth waveforms) and HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHy1 (square wave outputs). TimA and TimB are phase-shifted. HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHy1 pulses are triggered by counter events. An arrow points to a specific pulse on HRTIM_CHy1 with the text 'Shorten pulse on TB1 on TimB counter reset'.
Timing diagram for Figure 237 showing interleaved up-down counter operation. It features four signal traces: TimA and TimB (triangular/sawtooth waveforms) and HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHy1 (square wave outputs). TimA and TimB are phase-shifted. HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHy1 pulses are triggered by counter events. An arrow points to a specific pulse on HRTIM_CHy1 with the text 'Shorten pulse on TB1 on TimB counter reset'.
Note:

In up-down counting mode, the compare values must be 3 periods of the \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock below the period value ( \( TIMx\_PER - 0xC0 \) if \( CKPSC[2:0] = 0 \) , \( TIMx\_PER - 0x60 \) if \( CKPSC[2:0] = 1 \) , \( TIMx\_PER - 0x30 \) if \( CKPSC[2:0] = 2, \dots \) ). This applies for the compare events generated inside the timing unit. For compare events generated in other timing units, it is mandatory to avoid any event occurring within less than 1 period of the \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock of a counter direction change (counter at 0, period event or counter reset).

The following features are supported in up-down counting mode:

Figure 238. Push-pull up-down mode example

Timing diagram for Figure 238 showing push-pull up-down mode. It shows a triangular counter waveform with two horizontal threshold lines: 'Reset on CMP2' and 'Set on CMP1'. Below are two square wave outputs, HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2, which alternate pulses based on the counter reaching the CMP1 and CMP2 thresholds during up and down cycles.
Timing diagram for Figure 238 showing push-pull up-down mode. It shows a triangular counter waveform with two horizontal threshold lines: 'Reset on CMP2' and 'Set on CMP1'. Below are two square wave outputs, HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2, which alternate pulses based on the counter reaching the CMP1 and CMP2 thresholds during up and down cycles.

Figure 239. Up-down mode with “greater than” comparison

Timing diagram showing the relationship between a triangular wave (Set on CMP1) and a pulse-width modulated signal (HRTIM_CHx1) in up-down mode with 'greater than' comparison. The diagram shows three cycles of the triangular wave. The HRTIM_CHx1 signal is high when the counter value is greater than the comparison value (CMP1). The signal transitions occur at the points where the triangular wave crosses the comparison level. The diagram is labeled MSv50805V1.
Timing diagram showing the relationship between a triangular wave (Set on CMP1) and a pulse-width modulated signal (HRTIM_CHx1) in up-down mode with 'greater than' comparison. The diagram shows three cycles of the triangular wave. The HRTIM_CHx1 signal is high when the counter value is greater than the comparison value (CMP1). The signal transitions occur at the points where the triangular wave crosses the comparison level. The diagram is labeled MSv50805V1.

Caution: The following features are not supported in up-down counting mode:

The capture function is supported with the following differences:

The counter roll-over event is defined differently in up-down counting mode to support various operating condition. It can be either generated:

This event is used for multiple purposes in the HRTIM. The generation mode (valley, crest or both) can be programmed individually depending on the destination. Table 238 summarizes the use cases and associated roll-over mode (xxROM[1:0]) programming bits in the HRTIM_TIMxCR2 register.

Table 238. Roll-over event destination and mode programming

Roll-over event useProgramming bits
Output set/resetOUTROM[1:0]
Register content update trigger (transfer from preload to active)ROM[1:0]
IRQ and/or DMA request triggerROM[1:0]
Burst mode clock source and /or burst start triggerBMROM[1:0]
ADC trigger (see Section : ADC post-scaler for details)ADROM[1:0]
External event filteringROM[1:0]
Repetition counter decrementROM[1:0]
Fault and event counterFEROM[1:0]

Note: For events where both reset and roll-over are considered (IRQ/DMA and TxRSTU), the ROM[1:0] only influences the roll-over generation. The reset event is always taken into account whatever the ROM[1:0] value.

The roll-over event generation is defined as per following xxROM[1:0] bitfield setting:

Figure 240 here-below shows a push-pull up-down mode with set on period event and OUTROM[1:0] =10.

Figure 240. Up-down mode with output set on period event, for OUTROM[1:0]=10

Timing diagram for HRTIM up-down mode with output set on period event.

The timing diagram illustrates the operation of an HRTIM timer in up-down mode. The top waveform shows the counter value over time, forming a triangular wave. Key events are marked: 'Set on Period' at the peaks (crest mode) and 'Reset on CMP2' at the valleys. Below the counter waveform, two output signals are shown: HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2. HRTIM_CHx1 is a square wave that toggles its state at each 'Set on Period' event. HRTIM_CHx2 is a square wave that toggles its state at each 'Reset on CMP2' event. Vertical dashed lines connect the events on the counter waveform to the corresponding transitions on the output signals. The diagram is labeled with 'MSv50807V1' in the bottom right corner.

Timing diagram for HRTIM up-down mode with output set on period event.

Figure 241 below shows how the repetition counter is decremented in up-down counting mode.

Figure 241. Repetition counter behavior in up-down counting mode

Timing diagram showing Counter, REP, and ROM[1:0] signals over time. The Counter signal is a sawtooth wave. The REP signal is high when the Counter is at its peak. The ROM[1:0] signal is a 2-bit bus that changes its value based on the REP signal. The diagram shows six rows of signals. The first row shows Counter, REP = 0, ROM[1:0] = 00. The second row shows Counter, REP = 0, ROM[1:0] = 01. The third row shows Counter, REP = 0, ROM[1:0] = 10. The fourth row shows Counter, REP = 1, ROM[1:0] = 01. The fifth row shows Counter, REP = 1, ROM[1:0] = 10. The sixth row shows Counter, REP = 2, ROM[1:0] = 00. The diagram illustrates that the repetition counter is decremented in up-down counting mode.
Timing diagram showing Counter, REP, and ROM[1:0] signals over time. The Counter signal is a sawtooth wave. The REP signal is high when the Counter is at its peak. The ROM[1:0] signal is a 2-bit bus that changes its value based on the REP signal. The diagram shows six rows of signals. The first row shows Counter, REP = 0, ROM[1:0] = 00. The second row shows Counter, REP = 0, ROM[1:0] = 01. The third row shows Counter, REP = 0, ROM[1:0] = 10. The fourth row shows Counter, REP = 1, ROM[1:0] = 01. The fifth row shows Counter, REP = 1, ROM[1:0] = 10. The sixth row shows Counter, REP = 2, ROM[1:0] = 00. The diagram illustrates that the repetition counter is decremented in up-down counting mode.

The dual channel DAC triggers are working as for the up-counting mode.

The event blanking and windowing differs so as to have the blanking or windowing done within the output pulse, at a programmable time. The EExFLTR[3:0] codes are depending on the UDM bit setting, as per the Table 239 below. Whenever the roll-over event is used for blanking or windowing, the ROM[1:0] programming applies for defining when it is generated.

Table 239. EExFLTR[3:0] codes depending on UDM bit setting

EE1FLTR[3:0]Up-counting mode (UDM = 0)Up/down-counting mode (UDM = 1)
0010Blanking from counter reset/roll-over to compare 2Blanking from compare 1 to compare 2, only during the up-counting phase
0100Blanking from counter reset/roll-over to compare 4Blanking from compare 3 to compare 4, only during the up-counting phase
1101Windowing from counter reset/roll-over to compare 2Windowing from compare 2 to compare 3, only during the up-counting phase
1110Windowing from counter reset/roll-over to compare 3Windowing from compare 2 to compare 3, only during the down-counting phase
1111Windowing from another timing unit: TIMWIN source (see Table 243 for details)Windowing from compare 2 during the up-counting phase to compare 3 during the down-counting phase

28.3.7 Set / reset events priorities and narrow pulses management

This section describes how the output waveform is generated when several set and/or reset requests are occurring within 3 consecutive \( t_{HRTIM} \) periods.

Case 1: clock prescaler CKPSC[2:0] < 5

An arbitration is performed during each \( t_{HRTIM} \) period, in 3 steps:

  1. 1. For each active event, the desired output transition is determined (set, reset or toggle).
  2. 2. A predefined arbitration is performed among the active events (from highest to lowest priority CMP4 → CMP3 → CMP2 → CMP1 → PER, see Section : Concurrent set requests/ Concurrent reset requests ).
  3. 3. A high-resolution delay-based arbitration is performed with reset having the highest priority, among the low-resolution events and events having won the predefined arbitration.

When set and reset requests from two different sources are simultaneous, the reset action has the highest priority. If the interval between set and reset requests is below 2 \( t_{HRTIM} \) period, the behavior depends on the time interval and on the alignment with the \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock, as shown on Figure 242 .

  1. Note:
  2. If the set and reset requests are simultaneous and coming from the same timing unit, the CMPx priority applies, as shown in step 2 here-above. For instance, taking CMP2 = CMP4:
    • - If CMP2 does a set and CMP4 a reset, the output is reset.
    • - If CMP2 does a reset and CMP4 a set, the output is set.

Figure 242. Short distance set/reset management for narrow pulse generation

Timing diagram showing various set/reset event scenarios for narrow pulse generation with the HRTIM clock.

The diagram illustrates the timing relationships between the \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock and set (S) and reset (R) events for narrow pulse generation. The clock is a periodic square wave. The diagram is divided into several horizontal sections, each showing a different scenario:

MS32277V1

Timing diagram showing various set/reset event scenarios for narrow pulse generation with the HRTIM clock.

If the set and reset events are generated within the same \( t_{HRTIM} \) period, the reset event has the highest priority and the set event is ignored.

If the set and reset events are generated with an interval below \( t_{HRTIM} \) period, across 2 periods, a pulse of 1 \( t_{HRTIM} \) period is generated.

If the set and reset events are generated with an interval below 2 \( t_{HRTIM} \) periods, a pulse of 2 \( t_{HRTIM} \) periods is generated.

If the set and reset events are generated with an interval between 2 and 3 \( t_{HRTIM} \) periods, the high-resolution is available if the interval is over 2 complete \( t_{HRTIM} \) periods.

If the set and reset events are generated with an interval above 3 \( t_{HRTIM} \) periods, the high-resolution is always available.

Concurrent set requests/ Concurrent reset requests

When multiple sources are selected for a set event, an arbitration is performed when the set requests occur within the same \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock period.

In case of multiple requests from adjacent timers (TIMEVNT1..9), the request which occurs first is taken into account. The arbitration is done in 2 steps, depending on:

  1. 1. the source (CMP4 → CMP3 → CMP2 → CMP1),
  2. 2. the delay.

If multiple requests from the master timer occur within the same \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock period, a predefined arbitration is applied and a single request is taken into account, whatever the effective high-resolution setting (from the highest to the lowest priority):

MSTCMP4 → MSTCMP3 → MSTCMP2 → MSTCMP1 → MSTCMPER

Note: It is advised to avoid generating multiple set (reset) requests from the master timer to a given timer with an interval below 3x \( t_{HRTIM} \) to maintain the high-resolution.

When multiple requests internal to the timer occur within the same \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock period, a predefined arbitration is applied and the requests are taken with the following priority, whatever the effective timing (from highest to lowest):

CMP4 → CMP3 → CMP2 → CMP1 → PER

Note: Practically, this is of a primary importance when multiple compare events can be simultaneously generated or when using auto-delayed compare 2 and compare 4 simultaneously (i.e. when the effective set/reset cannot be determined a priori because it is related to an external event). In this case, the highest priority signal must be affected to the CMP4 event.

Last, the highest priority is given to low-resolution events: EXTEVNT1..10, RESYNC (coming from SYNC event if SYNCRSTx or SYNCSTRTx is set or from a software reset), update and software set (SST). The update event is considered as having the largest delay (0x1F if PSC = 0).

As a summary, in case of a close vicinity (events occurring within the same \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock period), the effective set (reset) event is arbitrated between:

The same arbitration principle applies for concurrent reset requests. In this case, the reset request has the highest priority.

Case 2: clock prescaler CKPSC[2:0] ≥ 5

The narrow pulse management is simplified when the high-resolution is not effective.

A set or reset event occurring within the prescaler clock cycle is delayed to the next active edge of the prescaled clock (as for a counter reset), even if the arbitration is still performed every \( t_{HRTIM} \) cycle.

If a reset event is followed by a set event within the same prescaler clock cycle, the latest event is considered.

28.3.8 External events global conditioning

The HRTIM timer can handle events not generated within the timer, referred to as “external event”. These external events come from multiple sources, either on-chip or off-chip:

The external events conditioning circuitry allows to select the signal source for a given channel (with a 4:1 multiplexer) and to convert it into an information that can be processed by the crossbar unit (for instance, to have an output reset triggered by a falling edge detection on an external event channel).

Up to 10 external event channels can be conditioned and are available simultaneously for any of the 6 timers. This conditioning is common to all timers, since this is usually dictated by external components (such as a zero-crossing detector) and environmental conditions (typically the filter set-up is related to the applications noise level and signature). Figure 243 presents an overview of the conditioning logic for a single channel.

Figure 243. External event conditioning overview (1 channel represented)

Figure 243. External event conditioning overview (1 channel represented). The diagram shows the signal flow for a single external event channel (EEVx). It starts with 'hrtim_eevx[4:1]' inputs being multiplexed by 'EExSRC[1:0]'. The output goes to 'EEVx_muxout (to FAULT circuitry)' and also through 'Edge and polarity' logic (inverters and AND gates) controlled by 'EExPOL' and 'EExSNS[1:0]'. The signal then passes through a 'Digital Filter' (labeled 'Filtering (EEV6..10 only)') controlled by 'EExF[3:0]' and 'Prescaler' (labeled 'Prescaler (EEV6..10 only)') controlled by 'EExSD[1:0]'. The filtered signal enters a 'Fast asynchronous path' (labeled 'Fast path (EEV1..5 only)') controlled by 'EExFAST'. This path leads to 'Timer A..F' and 'Output stage'. A 'Synchronous path' (labeled 'Synchronous path EExFAST = 0') also connects the 'Timer A..F' to the 'Output stage'. 'Other EEVNT channels' (labeled '9') are also connected to 'Timer A..F'. The diagram is divided into four sections: 'Source selection', 'Edge and polarity', 'Filtering (EEV6..10 only)', and 'Fast path (EEV1..5 only)'. A reference 'MSv48375V1' is in the bottom right.
Figure 243. External event conditioning overview (1 channel represented). The diagram shows the signal flow for a single external event channel (EEVx). It starts with 'hrtim_eevx[4:1]' inputs being multiplexed by 'EExSRC[1:0]'. The output goes to 'EEVx_muxout (to FAULT circuitry)' and also through 'Edge and polarity' logic (inverters and AND gates) controlled by 'EExPOL' and 'EExSNS[1:0]'. The signal then passes through a 'Digital Filter' (labeled 'Filtering (EEV6..10 only)') controlled by 'EExF[3:0]' and 'Prescaler' (labeled 'Prescaler (EEV6..10 only)') controlled by 'EExSD[1:0]'. The filtered signal enters a 'Fast asynchronous path' (labeled 'Fast path (EEV1..5 only)') controlled by 'EExFAST'. This path leads to 'Timer A..F' and 'Output stage'. A 'Synchronous path' (labeled 'Synchronous path EExFAST = 0') also connects the 'Timer A..F' to the 'Output stage'. 'Other EEVNT channels' (labeled '9') are also connected to 'Timer A..F'. The diagram is divided into four sections: 'Source selection', 'Edge and polarity', 'Filtering (EEV6..10 only)', and 'Fast path (EEV1..5 only)'. A reference 'MSv48375V1' is in the bottom right.

The 10 external events are initialized using the HRTIM_EECR1 and HRTIM_EECR2 registers:

Note: The external events used as triggers for reset, capture, burst mode, ADC triggers and delayed protection are edge-sensitive even if EExSNS bit is reset (level-sensitive selection): if POL = 0 the trigger is active on external event rising edge, while if POL = 1 the trigger is active on external event falling edge.

The external events are discarded as long as the counters are disabled (TxCEN bit reset) to prevent any output state change and counter reset, except if they are used as ADC triggers.

Additionally, it is possible to enable digital noise filters, for external events 6 to 10, using EExF[3:0] bits in the HRTIM_EECR3 register.

A digital filter is made of a counter in which a number N of valid samples is needed to validate a transition on the output. If the input value changes before the counter has reached the value N, the counter is reset and the transition is discarded (considered as a spurious event). If the counter reaches N, the transition is considered as valid and

transmitted as a correct external event. Consequently, the digital filter adds a latency to the external events being filtered, depending on the sampling clock and on the filter length (number of valid samples expected).

The sampling clock is either the \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock or a specific prescaled clock \( f_{EEVS} \) derived from \( f_{HRTIM} \) , defined with EEVSD[1:0] bits in HRTIM_EECR3 register.

Table 240 summarizes the available features associated with each of the 10 external events channels. The features and sources are summarized in Table 223 .

Table 240. External events features

External event channelFast modeDigital filterBalanced fault timer A,B,CBalanced fault timer D,E,F
hrtim_eev1[4:1]Yes---
hrtim_eev2[4:1]Yes---
hrtim_eev3[4:1]Yes---
hrtim_eev4[4:1]Yes---
hrtim_eev5[4:1]Yes---
hrtim_eev6[4:1]-YesYes-
hrtim_eev7[4:1]-YesYes-
hrtim_eev8[4:1]-Yes-Yes
hrtim_eev9[4:1]-Yes-Yes
hrtim_eev10[4:1]-Yes--

Latency to external events

The external event conditioning gives the possibility to adjust the external event processing time (and associated latency) depending on performance expectations:

EExFAST bits in the HRTIM_EECR1 register allow to define the operating for channels 1 to 5. This influences the latency and the jitter present on the output pulses, as summarized in the table below.

Table 241. Output set/reset latency and jitter versus external event operating mode
EExFASTResponse time latencyResponse time jitterJitter on output pulse (counter reset by ext. event)
05 to 6 cycles of \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock1 cycles of \( f_{HRTIM} \) clockNo jitter, pulse width maintained with high-resolution
1Minimal latency (depends whether the comparator or digital input is used)Minimal jitter1 cycle of \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock jitter pulse width resolution down to \( t_{HRTIM} \)

The EExFAST mode is only available with level-sensitive programming (EExSNS[1:0] = 00); the edge-sensitivity cannot be programmed.

It is possible to apply event filtering to external events (both blanking and windowing with EExFLTR[3:0] != 0000, see Section 28.3.9 ). In this case, EExLTCHx bit must be reset: the postponed mode is not supported, neither the windowing timeout feature.

Note: The external event configuration (source and polarity) must not be modified once the related EExFAST bit is set.

A fast external event cannot be used to toggle an output: it must be enabled either in HRTIM_SETxyR or HRTIM_RSTxyR registers, not in both.

When a set and a reset event - from 2 independent fast external events - occur simultaneously, the reset has the highest priority in the crossbar and the output becomes inactive.

When EExFAST bit is set, the output cannot be changed during the 11 \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock periods following the external event.

Figure 244 and Figure 245 give practical examples of the reaction time to external events, for output set/reset and counter reset.

Figure 244. Latency to external events (counter reset and output set)

Timing diagram for Figure 244 showing latency to external events for counter reset and output set. It compares synchronous (EExFAST=0) and asynchronous (EExFAST=1) paths. The synchronous path shows a 6-7 cycle delay with 1 clock cycle jitter at the pulse start but no jitter in pulsewidth. The asynchronous path shows minimal latency with no jitter at the pulse start but 1 clock cycle jitter in pulsewidth.

External Event

HRTIMER output

EExFAST = 0

6-7 cycles delay (synchronous path)

\( t_{HRTIM} \)

Pulse starts with 1 clock cycle jitter with respect to trigger
High-resolution pulsewidth has no jitter

EExFAST = 1

Minimal latency (asynchronous path)

Pulse starts with no jitter with respect to trigger
Pulsewidth has 1 clock cycle jitter

MSv32279V2

Timing diagram for Figure 244 showing latency to external events for counter reset and output set. It compares synchronous (EExFAST=0) and asynchronous (EExFAST=1) paths. The synchronous path shows a 6-7 cycle delay with 1 clock cycle jitter at the pulse start but no jitter in pulsewidth. The asynchronous path shows minimal latency with no jitter at the pulse start but 1 clock cycle jitter in pulsewidth.

Figure 245. Latency to external events (output reset on external event)

Timing diagram for Figure 245 showing latency to external events for output reset on external event. It compares synchronous (EExFAST=0) and asynchronous (EExFAST=1) paths. The synchronous path shows a 6-7 cycle delay. The asynchronous path shows minimal latency.

External Event

HRTIMER output

EExFAST = 0

6-7 cycles delay (synchronous path)

\( t_{HRTIM} \)

EExFAST = 1

Minimal latency (asynchronous path)

MSv32239V3

Timing diagram for Figure 245 showing latency to external events for output reset on external event. It compares synchronous (EExFAST=0) and asynchronous (EExFAST=1) paths. The synchronous path shows a 6-7 cycle delay. The asynchronous path shows minimal latency.

28.3.9 External event filtering in timing units

Once conditioned, the 10 external events are available for all timing units.

They can be used directly and are active as soon as the timing unit counter is enabled (TxCEN bit set).

They can also be filtered to have an action limited in time, usually related to the counting period. Two operations can be performed:

These modes are enabled using HRTIM_EExFLTR[3:0] bits in the HRTIM_EEFxR1 and HRTIM_EEFxR2 registers. Each of the 6 timer A..F timing units has its own programmable filter settings for the 10 external events.

Blanking mode

In event blanking mode (see Figure 246 ), the external event is ignored if it happens during a given blanking period. This is convenient, for instance, to avoid a current limit to trip on switching noise at the beginning of a PWM period. This mode is active for EExFLTR[3:0] bitfield values ranging from 0001 to 1100.

Figure 246. Event blanking mode

Figure 246. Event blanking mode diagram. It shows three waveforms: 'External event' (a pulse that occurs while the 'Blanking source' is high), 'Blanking source' (a signal that goes high and then low), and 'Resulting event' (which is ignored during the blanking period). A logic diagram on the left shows an AND gate with inputs 'Ext./int. event' and 'Blanking' (active-low). The output of the AND gate is connected to the 'Resulting event' waveform.
Figure 246. Event blanking mode diagram. It shows three waveforms: 'External event' (a pulse that occurs while the 'Blanking source' is high), 'Blanking source' (a signal that goes high and then low), and 'Resulting event' (which is ignored during the blanking period). A logic diagram on the left shows an AND gate with inputs 'Ext./int. event' and 'Blanking' (active-low). The output of the AND gate is connected to the 'Resulting event' waveform.

In event postpone mode, the external event is not taken into account immediately but is memorized (latched) and generated as soon as the blanking period is completed, as shown on Figure 247 . This mode is enabled by setting EExLTCH bit in HRTIM_EEFxR1 and HRTIM_EEFxR2 registers.

Figure 247. Event postpone mode

Figure 247. Event postpone mode diagram. It shows three waveforms: 'External event' (a pulse that occurs while the 'Blanking source' is high), 'Blanking source' (a signal that goes high and then low), and 'Resulting event' (which is generated after the blanking period ends). A logic diagram on the left shows an AND gate with inputs 'Ext./int. event' (coming from a 'Latch' block) and 'Blanking' (active-low). The output of the AND gate is connected to the 'Resulting event' waveform.
Figure 247. Event postpone mode diagram. It shows three waveforms: 'External event' (a pulse that occurs while the 'Blanking source' is high), 'Blanking source' (a signal that goes high and then low), and 'Resulting event' (which is generated after the blanking period ends). A logic diagram on the left shows an AND gate with inputs 'Ext./int. event' (coming from a 'Latch' block) and 'Blanking' (active-low). The output of the AND gate is connected to the 'Resulting event' waveform.

The blanking signal comes from several sources:

The EExFLTR[3:0] configurations from 0101 to 1100 are referred to as TIMFLTR1 to TIMFLTR8 in the bit description, and differ from one timing unit to the other. Table 242 gives the 8 available options per timer: CMPx refers to blanking from counter reset to compare match, Tx2 refers to the timing unit TIMx output 2 waveform defined with HRTIM_SETx2 and HRTIM_RSTx2 registers. For instance, timer B (TIMFLTR6) is timer C output 2 waveform.

Table 242. Filtering signals mapping per timer

SourceTimer ATimer BTimer CTimer DTimer ETimer F
CMP1CMP2CMP4TA2CMP1CMP2CMP4TB2CMP1CMP2CMP4TC2CMP1CMP2CMP4TD2CMP1CMP2CMP4TE2CMP1CMP2CMP4TF2
DestinationTimer A----1-234-5-7---8---6---
Timer B1-23----45---7--8----6--
Timer C-1--2-3-----5-67--8-4---
Timer D1----2--34-5----6-78--8-
Timer E-1--2---3---6-78------45
Timer F--1--2----3--45-6-78----

Figure 248 and Figure 249 give an example of external event blanking for all edge and level sensitivities, in regular and postponed modes.

Figure 248. External trigger blanking with edge-sensitive trigger

Timing diagram showing external trigger blanking with edge-sensitive trigger. It displays the Counter, Compare 1, Blanking window, External event, EExLTCH = 0, EExLTCH = 1, and EExSNS[1:0] settings. The diagram illustrates how the external event is filtered by the blanking window to generate an internal event.

The timing diagram illustrates the external trigger blanking process. The 'Counter' shows a sawtooth waveform. 'Compare 1' shows a horizontal line representing a comparison value. The 'Blanking window' is a rectangular pulse that is high during the counter's active period. The 'External event' shows a series of pulses. Below the external event, two rows show the effect of different sensitivity settings (EExSNS[1:0]). For EExLTCH = 0, the output is high for rising edges (01), low for falling edges (10), and high for both (11). For EExLTCH = 1, the output is high for falling edges (10), low for rising edges (01), and high for both (11). Vertical dashed lines indicate the timing of the external event pulses relative to the blanking window. An arrow at the bottom indicates the 'Internal event generated after blanking' which occurs when an external event falls within the blanking window and matches the configured sensitivity.

Timing diagram showing external trigger blanking with edge-sensitive trigger. It displays the Counter, Compare 1, Blanking window, External event, EExLTCH = 0, EExLTCH = 1, and EExSNS[1:0] settings. The diagram illustrates how the external event is filtered by the blanking window to generate an internal event.

Figure 249. External trigger blanking, level sensitive triggering

Timing diagram for external trigger blanking, level sensitive triggering. The diagram shows the relationship between a Counter, Compare 1, Blanking window, External event, and four possible output signals based on POL and LTCH settings. The Counter and Compare 1 signals are sawtooth-like. The Blanking window is a periodic pulse. The External event is a square wave. The output signals are labeled POL = 0 (H), LTCH = 0; POL = 1 (L), LTCH = 0; POL = 0 (H), LTCH = 1; and POL = 1 (L), LTCH = 1. The POL = 0 (H), LTCH = 1 signal is latched. The diagram also includes labels for POL = EExPOL and LTCH = EExLTCH, and a note that a high level denotes a continuous event generation after blanking. The code MS32297V1 is present in the bottom right corner.

Counter

Compare 1

Blanking window

External event

POL = 0 (H), LTCH = 0 *

POL = 1 (L), LTCH = 0 *

POL = 0 (H), LTCH = 1 *

POL = 1 (L), LTCH = 1 *

latched

POL = EExPOL

LTCH = EExLTCH

* A high level denotes a continuous event generation after blanking

MS32297V1

Timing diagram for external trigger blanking, level sensitive triggering. The diagram shows the relationship between a Counter, Compare 1, Blanking window, External event, and four possible output signals based on POL and LTCH settings. The Counter and Compare 1 signals are sawtooth-like. The Blanking window is a periodic pulse. The External event is a square wave. The output signals are labeled POL = 0 (H), LTCH = 0; POL = 1 (L), LTCH = 0; POL = 0 (H), LTCH = 1; and POL = 1 (L), LTCH = 1. The POL = 0 (H), LTCH = 1 signal is latched. The diagram also includes labels for POL = EExPOL and LTCH = EExLTCH, and a note that a high level denotes a continuous event generation after blanking. The code MS32297V1 is present in the bottom right corner.

Windowing mode

In event windowing mode, the event is taken into account only if it occurs within a given time window, otherwise it is ignored. This mode is active for EExFLTR[3:0] ranging from 1101 to 1111.

Figure 250. Event windowing mode

Timing diagram for event windowing mode. On the left, a logic diagram shows 'Ext./int. event' and 'Windowing' as inputs to an AND gate, with 'Output' as the result. On the right, a timing diagram shows 'External event' (a pulse), 'Blanking source' (a pulse), and 'Resulting event' (a pulse that occurs only when the external event is within the blanking source pulse). The code MS32298V1 is present in the bottom right corner.

Ext./int. event

Windowing

Output

External event

Blanking source

Resulting event

MS32298V1

Timing diagram for event windowing mode. On the left, a logic diagram shows 'Ext./int. event' and 'Windowing' as inputs to an AND gate, with 'Output' as the result. On the right, a timing diagram shows 'External event' (a pulse), 'Blanking source' (a pulse), and 'Resulting event' (a pulse that occurs only when the external event is within the blanking source pulse). The code MS32298V1 is present in the bottom right corner.

EExLTCH bit in EEFxR1 and EEFxR2 registers allows to latch the signal, if set to 1: in this case, an event is accepted if it occurs during the window but is delayed at the end of it.

A use case of the windowing mode is to filter synchronization signals. The timeout generation allows to force a default synchronization event, when the expected synchronization event is lacking (for instance during a converter start-up).

There are 3 sources for each external event windowing, coded as follows:

Table 243. Windowing signals mapping per timer (EEFLTR[3:0] = 1111)

DestinationTimer ATimer BTimer CTimer DTimer ETimer F
TIMWIN (source)Timer B CMP2Timer A CMP2Timer D CMP2Timer C CMP2Timer F CMP2Timer E CMP2

Note: The timeout event generation is not supported if the external event is programmed in fast mode.

Figure 251 and Figure 252 present how the events are generated for the various edge and level sensitivities, as well as depending on EExLTCH bit setting. Timeout events are specifically mentioned for clarity reasons.

Figure 251. External trigger windowing with edge-sensitive trigger

Timing diagram showing Counter, Compare 1, Window, External event, and EExLTCH settings (0 and 1) with edge-sensitive triggers (rising, falling, both) and resulting Timeout events. The diagram illustrates how the windowing signal is generated based on the counter and compare match, and how external events are filtered by this window. For EExLTCH = 0, rising, falling, and both edges are shown. For EExLTCH = 1, only rising and falling edges are shown. Timeout events are indicated for some external events that occur outside the window.

The figure is a timing diagram illustrating external trigger windowing with an edge-sensitive trigger. It shows the relationship between the Counter, Compare 1, Window, External event, and EExLTCH settings. The Counter is a sawtooth wave. Compare 1 is a horizontal line. The Window is a pulse that is high when the Counter is between Compare 1 and the next compare match. The External event is a series of pulses. The EExLTCH settings are shown for two cases: EExLTCH = 0 and EExLTCH = 1. For EExLTCH = 0, the external event is filtered by the window for rising, falling, and both edges. For EExLTCH = 1, the external event is filtered by the window for rising and falling edges. The legend indicates the edge-sensitive trigger settings: EExSNS[1:0] = 01 (rising edge), EExSNS[1:0] = 10 (falling edge), and EExSNS[1:0] = 11 (both edges). Timeout events are shown for external events that occur outside the window.

Timing diagram showing Counter, Compare 1, Window, External event, and EExLTCH settings (0 and 1) with edge-sensitive triggers (rising, falling, both) and resulting Timeout events. The diagram illustrates how the windowing signal is generated based on the counter and compare match, and how external events are filtered by this window. For EExLTCH = 0, rising, falling, and both edges are shown. For EExLTCH = 1, only rising and falling edges are shown. Timeout events are indicated for some external events that occur outside the window.

Figure 252. External trigger windowing, level sensitive triggering

Timing diagram for external trigger windowing with level sensitive triggering. It shows the relationship between a Counter, Compare 1, a window signal, and an External event. Below the diagram, four rows show different POL and LTCH settings: POL = 0 (H), LTCH = 0; POL = 1 (L), LTCH = 0; POL = 0 (H), LTCH = 1; and POL = 1 (L), LTCH = 1. The first row indicates a timeout when the external event is high while the window is high. The other rows show continuous event generation (high level) after windowing. Labels at the bottom indicate POL = EExPOL and LTCH = EExLTCH. A note states: '* A high level denotes continuous event generation after windowing'. Reference MS32330V1.
Timing diagram for external trigger windowing with level sensitive triggering. It shows the relationship between a Counter, Compare 1, a window signal, and an External event. Below the diagram, four rows show different POL and LTCH settings: POL = 0 (H), LTCH = 0; POL = 1 (L), LTCH = 0; POL = 0 (H), LTCH = 1; and POL = 1 (L), LTCH = 1. The first row indicates a timeout when the external event is high while the window is high. The other rows show continuous event generation (high level) after windowing. Labels at the bottom indicate POL = EExPOL and LTCH = EExLTCH. A note states: '* A high level denotes continuous event generation after windowing'. Reference MS32330V1.

External event counter

Each timing unit also features an external event counter following the filtering unit, typically for valley skipping implementation.

The circuitry allows to filter any of the 10 external events filtered, as shown on Figure 253.

Figure 253. External event counter – channel A

Block diagram of the external event counter for channel A. It shows 10 external events (1-10) being multiplexed by EEVASEL[3:0] to produce 'External event A'. This signal enters a 'Counter external event A' block. The counter is controlled by EEVACNT[5:0], EEVARSTM, and EEVACRES. A 'Reset/roll-over event' is also input to the counter. The counter output is multiplexed back to the 10 external events by another EEVASEL[3:0] block. Reference MSV47422V1.
Block diagram of the external event counter for channel A. It shows 10 external events (1-10) being multiplexed by EEVASEL[3:0] to produce 'External event A'. This signal enters a 'Counter external event A' block. The counter is controlled by EEVACNT[5:0], EEVARSTM, and EEVACRES. A 'Reset/roll-over event' is also input to the counter. The counter output is multiplexed back to the 10 external events by another EEVASEL[3:0] block. Reference MSV47422V1.

The counter is enabled using the EEVACE bit in the HRTIM_EEFxR3 register. This mode is only valid for edge-sensitive external events (EEASNS[1:0] bit = 01, 10 or 11).

The external event is propagated to the timer only if the number of active edges is greater or equal to the value programmed in (EEVACNT[5:0]+1).

Two operating modes are available:

The external event counter must be enabled after having programmed the counter value (the EEVACE bit must be set after having written the EEVACNT[5:0] bits).

Once the counter is enabled, the EEVACNT[5:0] bits can then be changed on-the-fly at any time. The new value is taken into account on the following reset/rollover event as per the EEVARSTM bit programming, or after a software reset (EEVACRES bit set).

The EEVASEL[3:0] bits must not be modified once the EEVACE bit is set.

Figure 254. External event counter cumulative mode (EEVxRSTM = 1, EEVxCNT = 2)

Timing diagram illustrating the external event counter cumulative mode. The diagram shows five waveforms over time: Counter (sawtooth), EEV input (pulses), EEV edge detector (pulses on rising edges), EEV counter (values 0, 1, 2, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 0), EEV event (pulses when counter reaches 2 or 3), and PWM output (square wave). The counter resets to 0 upon reaching 2 or 3. The EEV event is generated when the counter reaches 2 or 3. The PWM output is shown as a square wave. The diagram is labeled MSv47423V2.
Timing diagram illustrating the external event counter cumulative mode. The diagram shows five waveforms over time: Counter (sawtooth), EEV input (pulses), EEV edge detector (pulses on rising edges), EEV counter (values 0, 1, 2, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 0), EEV event (pulses when counter reaches 2 or 3), and PWM output (square wave). The counter resets to 0 upon reaching 2 or 3. The EEV event is generated when the counter reaches 2 or 3. The PWM output is shown as a square wave. The diagram is labeled MSv47423V2.

28.3.10 Delayed protection

The HRTIM features specific protection schemes, typically for resonant converters when it is necessary to shut down the PWM outputs in a delayed manner, either once the active pulse is completed or once a push-pull period is completed. These features are enabled with DLYPRTEN bit in the HRTIM_OUTxR register, and are using specific external event channels.

Delayed idle

In this mode, the active pulse is completed before the protection is activated. The selected external event causes the output to enter in idle mode at the end of the active pulse (defined by an output reset event in HRTIM_RSTx1R or HRTIM_RSTx2R).

Once the protection is triggered, the idle mode is permanently maintained but the counter continues to run, until the output is re-enabled. Tx1OEN and Tx2OEN bits are not affected

by the delayed idle entry. To exit from delayed idle and resume operation, it is necessary to overwrite Tx1OEN and Tx2OEN bits to 1. The output state changes on the first transition to an active state following the output enable command.

Note: The delayed idle mode cannot be exited immediately after having been entered, before the active pulse is completed: it is mandatory to make sure that the outputs are in idle state before resuming the run mode. This can be done by waiting up to the next period, for instance, or by polling the O1CPY and/or O2CPY status bits in the TIMxISR register.

The delayed idle mode can be applied to a single output (DLYPRT[2:0] = x00 or x01) or to both outputs (DLYPRT[2:0] = x10).

An interrupt or a DMA request can be generated in response to a Delayed Idle mode entry. The DLYPRT flag in HRTIM_TIMxISR is set as soon as the external event arrives, independently from the end of the active pulse on output.

When the Delayed Idle mode is triggered, the output states can be determined using O1STAT and O2STAT in HRTIM_TIMxISR. Both status bits are updated even if the delayed idle is applied to a single output. When the push-pull mode is enabled, the IPPSTAT flag in HRTIM_TIMxISR indicates during which period the delayed protection request occurred.

This mode is available whatever the timer operating mode (regular, push-pull, deadtime). It is available with 2 external events only:

The delayed protection mode can be triggered only when the counter is enabled (TxCEN bit set). It remains active even if the TxEN bit is reset, until the TxyOEN bits are set.

Figure 255. Delayed Idle mode entry

Timing diagram Figure 255 showing three scenarios for Delayed Idle mode entry. 
  Scenario 1: 'Delayed Idle mode for both outputs'. Shows HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 signals. An 'External Event' occurs during a high pulse of CHx1. After a delay 'DLYPRT', CHx1 goes low and stays low (Idle mode), while CHx2 continues its PWM pattern. Label: Idle mode (O1STAT = 1, O2STAT = 0).
  Scenario 2: 'Delayed Idle mode for both outputs'. An 'External Event' occurs. After 'DLYPRT', both HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 enter Idle mode. Labels: HRTIM_CHx1 Run mode, HRTIM_CHx2 Run mode, HRTIM_CHx1 Idle mode, HRTIM_CHx2 Idle mode (O1STAT = 1, O2STAT = 1).
  Scenario 3: 'Delayed Idle mode for HRTIM_CH2 output only'. An 'External Event' occurs. After 'DLYPRT', only HRTIM_CHx2 enters Idle mode, while HRTIM_CHx1 continues its PWM pattern. Labels: HRTIM_CHx2 Run mode, HRTIM_CHx2 Idle mode.

Delayed Idle mode for both outputs

MSv50808V1

Timing diagram Figure 255 showing three scenarios for Delayed Idle mode entry. Scenario 1: 'Delayed Idle mode for both outputs'. Shows HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 signals. An 'External Event' occurs during a high pulse of CHx1. After a delay 'DLYPRT', CHx1 goes low and stays low (Idle mode), while CHx2 continues its PWM pattern. Label: Idle mode (O1STAT = 1, O2STAT = 0). Scenario 2: 'Delayed Idle mode for both outputs'. An 'External Event' occurs. After 'DLYPRT', both HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 enter Idle mode. Labels: HRTIM_CHx1 Run mode, HRTIM_CHx2 Run mode, HRTIM_CHx1 Idle mode, HRTIM_CHx2 Idle mode (O1STAT = 1, O2STAT = 1). Scenario 3: 'Delayed Idle mode for HRTIM_CH2 output only'. An 'External Event' occurs. After 'DLYPRT', only HRTIM_CHx2 enters Idle mode, while HRTIM_CHx1 continues its PWM pattern. Labels: HRTIM_CHx2 Run mode, HRTIM_CHx2 Idle mode.

The delayed idle mode has a higher priority than the burst mode: any burst mode exit request is discarded once the delayed idle protection has been triggered. On the contrary, If the delayed protection is exited while the burst mode is active, the burst mode is resumed normally and the output is maintained in the idle state until the burst mode exits. Figure 256 gives an overview of these different scenarios.

Figure 256. Burst mode and delayed protection priorities (DIDL = 0)

Timing diagram showing Output and State over time for two scenarios. The top scenario shows burst entry, a discarded delayed protection entry, a discarded delayed protection exit, and a burst exit. The bottom scenario shows a delayed protection entry, burst entry, a discarded burst exit, and a delayed protection exit. States are labeled RUN, IDLE, and RUN.

The figure consists of two timing diagrams illustrating the interaction between burst mode and delayed protection in an HRTIM output. Both diagrams show the 'Output' signal and the 'State' over time.

Top Diagram:

Bottom Diagram:

The state transitions are labeled as RUN, IDLE, and RUN. The IDLE state corresponds to the low output level.

Timing diagram showing Output and State over time for two scenarios. The top scenario shows burst entry, a discarded delayed protection entry, a discarded delayed protection exit, and a burst exit. The bottom scenario shows a delayed protection entry, burst entry, a discarded burst exit, and a delayed protection exit. States are labeled RUN, IDLE, and RUN.

MS32280V1

The same priorities are applied when the delayed burst mode entry is enabled (DIDL bit set), as shown on Figure 257 .

Figure 257. Burst mode and delayed protection priorities (DIDL = 1)

Timing diagrams illustrating burst mode and delayed protection priorities (DIDL = 1).

The figure consists of two timing diagrams illustrating the behavior of HRTIM outputs during burst mode with delayed protection priorities (DIDL = 1).

Top Diagram: Shows the sequence of events when a burst entry occurs while the output is active.

Bottom Diagram: Shows the sequence of events when a burst entry occurs while the output is already in the IDLES level.

MS32281V1

Timing diagrams illustrating burst mode and delayed protection priorities (DIDL = 1).

Balanced idle

Only available in push-pull mode, the balanced idle allows to have a balanced pulsemode on the two outputs when one of the active pulse is shortened due to a protection. The pulsemode, terminated earlier than programmed, is copied on the alternate output, then the two outputs are put in idle state, until the normal operation is resumed by software. This mode is enabled by writing x11 in DLYPRT[2:0] bitfield in HRTIM_OUTxR.

This mode is available with only 2 external events:

Figure 258. Balanced Idle protection example

Timing diagram illustrating the Balanced Idle protection example for the HRTIM. The diagram shows the relationship between the PER counter, CMP1, Taref (internal), HRTIM_CHx1, HRTIM_CHx2, CPPSTAT, EEV, IPPSTAT, and DLYPRT signals over time, divided into Run mode and Idle mode.

The diagram illustrates the timing for a balanced idle protection example. It shows the following signals and states:

MSV50809V1

Timing diagram illustrating the Balanced Idle protection example for the HRTIM. The diagram shows the relationship between the PER counter, CMP1, Taref (internal), HRTIM_CHx1, HRTIM_CHx2, CPPSTAT, EEV, IPPSTAT, and DLYPRT signals over time, divided into Run mode and Idle mode.

When the balanced Idle mode is enabled, the selected external event triggers a capture of the counter value into the compare 4 active register (this value is not user-accessible). The push-pull is maintained for one additional period so that the shorten pulse can be repeated: a new output reset event is generated while the regular output set event is maintained.

The Idle mode is then entered and the output takes the level defined by IDLESx bits in the HRTIM_OUTxR register. The balanced idle mode entry is indicated by the DLYPRT flag.

while the IPPSTAT flag indicates during which period the external event occurred, to determine the sequence of shorten pulses (A1 then A2 or vice versa).

The timer operation is not interrupted (the counter continues to run).

To enable the balanced idle mode, it is necessary to have the following initialization:

Note: The HRTIM_CMP4xR register must not be written during a balanced idle operation. The CMP4 event is reserved and cannot be used for another purpose.

In balanced idle mode, it is recommended to avoid multiple external events or software-based reset events causing an output reset. If such an event arrives before a balanced idle request within the same period, it causes the output pulses to be unbalanced (1st pulse length defined by the external event or software reset, while the 2nd pulse is defined by the balanced idle mode entry).

The minimum pulsewidth that can be handled in balanced idle mode is 4 \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) clock periods (0x80 if CKPSC[2:0] = 0, 0x40 if CKPSC[2:0] = 1, 0x20 if CKPSC[2:0] = 2,...).

If the capture occurs before the counter has reached this minimum value, the current pulse is extended up to 4 \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) clock periods before being copied into the secondary output. In any case, the pulsewidths are always balanced.

Tx1OEN and Tx2OEN bits are not affected by the balanced idle entry. To exit from balanced idle and resume the operation, it is necessary to overwrite Tx1OEN and Tx2OEN bits to 1 simultaneously. The output state changes on the first active transition following the output enable.

It is possible to resume operation similarly to the delayed idle entry. For instance, if the external event arrives while output 1 is active (delayed idle effective after output 2 pulse), the re-start sequence can be initiated for output 1 first. To do so, it is necessary to poll CPPSTAT bit in the HRTIM_TIMxISR register. Using the above example (IPPSTAT flag equal to 0), the operation is resumed when CPPSTAT bit is 0.

In order to have a specific re-start sequence, it is possible to poll the CPPSTAT to know which output is active first. This allows, for instance, to re-start with the same sequence as the idle entry sequence: if the external event arrives during output 1 active, the re-start sequence is initiated when the output 1 is active (CPPSTAT = 0).

Note: The balanced idle mode must not be disabled while a pulse balancing sequence is ongoing. It is necessary to wait until the CMP4 flag is set, thus indicating that the sequence is completed, to reset the DLYPRTEN bit.

The balanced idle protection mode can be triggered only when the counter is enabled (TxCEN bit set). It remains active even if the TxCEN bit is reset, until TxyOEN bits are set.

Balanced idle can be used together with the burst mode under the following conditions:

The balanced idle mode has a higher priority than the burst mode: any burst mode exit request is discarded once the balanced idle protection has been triggered. On the contrary, if the delayed protection is exited while the burst mode is active, the burst mode is resumed normally.

  1. Note: Although the output state is frozen in idle mode, a number of events are still generated on the auxiliary outputs (see Section 28.3.18 ) during the idle period following the delayed protection:
    • - Output set/reset interrupt or DMA requests
    • - External event filtering based on output signal
    • - Capture events triggered by set/reset

Balanced idle automatic resuming

The balanced Idle mode can be configured to have an automatic resuming of operation after a trigger.

Once the shorten pulse has been copied to the alternate output, the pulse width is reset to its original value and the timer resumes operation: the two outputs keep on being in RUN mode.

This is enabled by setting the BIAR bit in the HRTIM_OUTxR register.

This mode must be used only when the period in HRTIM_PERxR is greater than 6 periods of the \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock (0xC0 if CKPSC[2:0] = 0, 0x60 if CKPSC[2:0] = 1, 0x30 if CKPSC[2:0] = 2, ...).

Note: This bit is only significant if DLYPRT[2:0] = 011 or 111, it is ignored otherwise.

Note: In balanced idle automatic resuming mode, it is mandatory to set the IDLES state to inactive.

28.3.11 Register preload and update management

Most of HRTIM registers are buffered and can be preloaded if needed. Typically, this allows to prevent the waveforms from being altered by a register update not synchronized with the active events (set/reset).

When the preload mode is enabled, accessed registers are shadow registers. Their content is transferred into the active register after an update request, either software or synchronized with an event.

By default, PREEN bits in HRTIM_MCR and HRTIM_TIMxCR registers are reset and the registers are not preloaded: any write directly updates the active registers. If PREEN bit is reset while the timer is running and preload was enabled, the content of the preload registers is directly transferred into the active registers.

Each timing unit and the master timer have their own PREEN bit. If PRREN is set, the preload registers are enabled and transferred to the active register only upon an update event.

There are two options to initialize the timer when the preload feature is needed:

Table 244 lists the registers which can be preloaded, together with a summary of available update events.

Table 244. HRTIM preloadable control registers and associated update sources

TimerPreloadable registersPreload enableUpdate sources
Master timerHRTIM_DIER
HRTIM_MPER
HRTIM_MREP
HRTIM_MCMP1R
HRTIM_MCMP2R
HRTIM_MCMP3R
HRTIM_MCMP4R
PREEN bit in HRTIM_MCRSoftware
Repetition event
Burst DMA event
Repetition event following a burst DMA event
Timer x
x = A..F
HRTIM_TIMxDIER
HRTIM_TIMxPER
HRTIM_TIMxREP
HRTIM_TIMxCMP1R
HRTIM_TIMxCMP1CR
HRTIM_TIMxCMP2R
HRTIM_TIMxCMP3R
HRTIM_TIMxCMP4R
HRTIM_DTxR
HRTIM_SETx1R
HRTIM_RSTx1R
HRTIM_SETx2R
HRTIM_RSTx2R
HRTIM_RSTxR
PREEN bit in HRTIM_TIMxCRSoftware
TIMx repetition event
TIMx reset event
Burst DMA event
Update event from other timers (TIMy, master)
Update event following a burst DMA event
Update enable inputs
hrtim_upd_en[3:1]
Update event following an update enable input following an update event on hrtim_upd_en[3:1] inputs
HRTIM CommonHRTIM_ADC1R
HRTIM_ADC2R
HRTIM_ADC3R
HRTIM_ADC4R
TIMx or master timer Update, depending on ADxUSRC[2:0] bits in HRTIM_CR1, if PREEN = 1 in the selected timer

The master timer has 4 update options:

  1. 1. Software: writing 1 into MSWU bit in HRTIM_CR2 forces an immediate update of the registers. In this case, any pending hardware update request is cancelled.
  2. 2. Update done when the master counter rolls over and the master repetition counter is equal to 0. This is enabled when MREPU bit is set in HRTIM_MCR.
  3. 3. Update done once burst DMA is completed (see Section 28.3.23 for details). This is enabled when BRSTDMA[1:0] = 01 in HRTIM_MCR. It is possible to have both MREPU=1 and BRSTDMA=01.

Note: The update can take place immediately after the end of the burst sequence if SWU bit is set (i.e. forced update mode). If SWU bit is reset, the update is done on the next update event following the end of the burst sequence.

  1. 4. Update done when the master counter rolls over following a burst DMA completion. This is enabled when BRSTDMA[1:0] = 10 in HRTIM_MCR.

An interrupt or a DMA request can be generated by the master update event.

Each timer (TIMA..F) can also have the update done as follows:

The update enable inputs hrtim_upd_en[3:1] allow to have an update event synchronized with on-chip events coming from the general-purpose timers. These inputs are rising-edge sensitive.

Table 224 lists the connections between update enable inputs and the on-chip sources.

This allows to synchronize low frequency update requests with high-frequency signals (for instance an update on the counter roll-over of a 100 kHz PWM that has to be done at a 100 Hz rate).

Note: The update events are synchronized to the prescaler clock when CKPSC[2:0] > 5.

The update coming from adjacent timers (when MSTU, TAU, TBU, TCU, TDU, TEU, TFU bit is set) or from a software update (TxSWU bit) can either be taken into account immediately or re-synchronized with the timers reset/roll-over event. This is done with the RSYNCU bit in the HRTIM_TIMxCR register, as show on Figure 259 below):

The RSYNCU bit is significant only when UPDGAT[3:0] = 0000, it is ignored otherwise.

An interrupt or a DMA request can be generated by the Timx update event.

Figure 259. Resynchronized timer update (TAU=1 in HRTIM_TIMBCR)

Timing diagram showing resynchronized timer update. The diagram displays several waveforms over time: TIMA Counter (sawtooth), HRTIM_CHx1 (pulses), TIMB update (with RSYNCU=0 and RSYNCU=1 options), TIMB Counter (sawtooth), and HRTIM_CHy1 (pulses). Vertical dashed lines indicate update events. Arrows show the transfer of update values from preload to active registers. The RSYNCU=0 path shows immediate updates, while the RSYNCU=1 path shows updates delayed until the next TIMB Counter repetition. A small note 'MSV47432V2' is in the bottom right corner of the diagram area.
Timing diagram showing resynchronized timer update. The diagram displays several waveforms over time: TIMA Counter (sawtooth), HRTIM_CHx1 (pulses), TIMB update (with RSYNCU=0 and RSYNCU=1 options), TIMB Counter (sawtooth), and HRTIM_CHy1 (pulses). Vertical dashed lines indicate update events. Arrows show the transfer of update values from preload to active registers. The RSYNCU=0 path shows immediate updates, while the RSYNCU=1 path shows updates delayed until the next TIMB Counter repetition. A small note 'MSV47432V2' is in the bottom right corner of the diagram area.

MUDIS and TxUDIS bits in the HRTIM_CR1 register allow to temporarily disable the transfer from preload to active registers, whatever the selected update event. This allows to modify several registers in multiple timers. The regular update event takes place once these bits are reset.

MUDIS and TxUDIS bits are all grouped in the same register. This allows the update of multiple timers (not necessarily synchronized) to be disabled and resumed simultaneously.

The following example is a practical use case. A first power converter is controlled with the master, TIMB and TIMC. TIMB and TIMC must be updated simultaneously with the master timer repetition event. A second converter works in parallel with TIMA, TIMD and TIME, and TIMD, TIME must be updated with TIMA repetition event.

First converter

In HRTIM_MCR, MREPU bit is set: the update occurs at the end of the master timer counter repetition period. In HRTIM_TIMBCR and HRTIM_TIMCCR, MSTU bits are set to have TIMB and TIMC timers updated simultaneously with the master timer.

When the power converter set-point has to be adjusted by software, MUDIS, TBUDIS and TCUDIS bits of the HRTIM_CR register must be set prior to write accessing registers to update the values (for instance the compare values). From this time on, any hardware update request is ignored and the preload registers can be accessed without any risk to have them transferred into the active registers. Once the software processing is over, MUDIS, TBUDIS and TCUDIS bits must be reset. The transfer from preload to active registers is done as soon as the master repetition event occurs.

Second converter

In HRTIM_TIMACR, TAREPU bit is set: the update occurs at the end of the timer A counter repetition period. In HRTIM_TIMDCR and HRTIM_TIMECR, TAU bits are set to have TIMD and TIME timers updated simultaneously with timer A.

When the power converter set-point has to be adjusted by software, TAUDIS, TDUDIS and TEUDIS bits of the HRTIM_CR register must be set prior to write accessing the registers to update the values (for instance the compare values). From this time on, any hardware update request is ignored and the preload registers can be accessed without any risk to have them transferred into the active registers. Once the software processing is over, TAUDIS, TDUDIS and TEUDIS bits can be reset: the transfer from preload to active registers is done as soon as the timer A repetition event occurs.

28.3.12 PWM mode with “greater than” comparison

A specific no-latency update mode is available for PWM signals generated with the CMP1 and CMP3 registers. It allows to have a new duty cycle value applied as soon as possible within the PWM cycle, without having to wait the completion of the current PWM period. This reduces the overall delay time in software control loops. As shown on Figure 260 below, this eventually allows to have:

The output signal is left unchanged when the new compare value and current compare value are both below the counter.

This feature is only available for CMP1 or CMP3 RESET events, and is enabled using the GTCMP1 and GTCMP3 enable bits in the HRTIM_TIMxCR2 register.

The preload mechanism is inactive for a compare register when the corresponding GTCMPx bit is set, whatever the PREEN bit value. This mode is intended to have the new compare value taken into account as soon as possible after a new value write, without waiting for the preload to active register transfer.

These bits are defining the compare 1 and compare 3 operating modes as following

The “greater than” compare mode causes the crossbar to act differently depending on comparison result. Let’s consider the CMP1 event is doing an output RESET. When the new compare value is written, two cases are considered

The “greater than” compare mode is supported for both SET and RESET actions.

The “greater than” compare mode must only be used for the following configuration:

  1. 1. In the fixed frequency configuration, the period event must trigger the output set and the “greater than” compare triggers the output reset (or vice versa the period must trigger the reset if the “greater-than” compare triggers the set).
  2. 2. For variable frequency configuration, the event selected as counter reset source must also be selected as set or reset source for the timer output (opposite direction as the “greater than” compare event).

Note: The “greater-than” modes must not be used when the CMP1 and/or CMP3 modes are controlled by hardware in half and interleaved modes.

Figure 260. Early turn-ON and early turn-OFF behavior in “greater than” PWM mode

Timing diagram showing Counter, CMP1, Output (GTCMP1 = 1), and Output (GTCMP1 = 0) waveforms. The diagram illustrates early turn-on and early turn-off behavior in 'greater than' PWM mode. The Counter waveform is a sawtooth wave. The CMP1 waveform is a dashed line representing the compare value. The Output (GTCMP1 = 1) waveform shows the output state when GTCMP1 is set, with early turn-on and early turn-off events. The Output (GTCMP1 = 0) waveform shows the output state when GTCMP1 is reset, with regular PWM mode and update on roll-over. CMP1 flag set events are indicated by arrows pointing to the output waveforms.

The diagram shows four waveforms over time:

Below each output waveform, an arrow points to a “CMP1 flag set” event, which occurs when the counter matches the CMP1 value. The diagram is labeled MSV48376V1 in the bottom right corner.

Timing diagram showing Counter, CMP1, Output (GTCMP1 = 1), and Output (GTCMP1 = 0) waveforms. The diagram illustrates early turn-on and early turn-off behavior in 'greater than' PWM mode. The Counter waveform is a sawtooth wave. The CMP1 waveform is a dashed line representing the compare value. The Output (GTCMP1 = 1) waveform shows the output state when GTCMP1 is set, with early turn-on and early turn-off events. The Output (GTCMP1 = 0) waveform shows the output state when GTCMP1 is reset, with regular PWM mode and update on roll-over. CMP1 flag set events are indicated by arrows pointing to the output waveforms.

The immediate update mode implies that the content of the preload register is transferred into the active register at the very same time the register is written. When GTCMP1 and/or GTCMP3 bits are set, their respective preload mechanism is disabled (for HRTIM_TIMxCMP1 and/or HRTIM_TIMxCMP3 registers), whatever the PREEN bit value.

Note: The compare interrupt flags (CMP1 and CMP3 in HRTIM_TIMxISR) are not generated in case of late turn-ON and early turn-OFF, as shown on Figure 260.

Note: The “Greater than” comparison must not be done on both CMP1 and CMP3 for the same output (GTCMP1 and GTCMP3 bits must not be set simultaneously).

28.3.13 Events propagation within or across multiple timers

The HRTIM offers many possibilities for cascading events or sharing them across multiple timing units, including the master timer, to get full benefits from its modular architecture. These are key features for converters requiring multiple synchronized outputs.

This section summarizes the various options and specifies whether and how an event is propagated within the HRTIM.

TIMx update triggered by the master timer update

The sources listed in Table 245 are generating a master timer update. The table indicates if the source event can be used to trigger a simultaneous update in any of TIMx timing units.

Operating condition: MSTU bit is set in HRTIM_TIMxCR register.

Table 245. Master timer update event propagation

SourceConditionPropagationComment
Burst DMA endBRSTDMA[1:0] = 01NoMust be done in TIMxCR (UPDGAT[3:0] = 0001)
Roll-over event following a burst DMA endBRSTDMA[1:0] = 10Yes-
Repetition event caused by a counter roll-overMREPU = 1Yes-
Repetition event caused by a counter reset (from HRTIM_SCIN or software)No-
Software updateMSWU = 1NoAll software update bits (TxSWU) are grouped in the HRTIM_CR2 register and can be used for a simultaneous update

TIMx update triggered by the TIMy update

The sources listed in Table 246 are generating a TIMy update. The table indicates if the given event can be used to trigger a simultaneous update in another or multiple TIMx timers.

Operating condition: TyU bit set in HRTIM_TIMxCR register (source = TIMy and destination = TIMx).

Table 246. TIMx update event propagation

SourceConditionPropagationComment
Burst DMA endUPDGAT[3:0] = 0001NoMust be done directly in HRTIM_TIMxCR (UPDGAT[3:0] = 0001)
Update caused by the update enable inputs hrtim_upd_en[3:1]UPDGAT[3:0] = 0011, 0100, 0101NoMust be done directly in HRTIM_TIMxCR (UPDGAT[3:0] = 0011, 0100, 0101)
Master updateMSTU = 1 in HRTIM_TIMyCRNoMust be done with MSTU = 1 in HRTIM_TIMxCR
Another TIMx update (TIMz>TIMy>TIMx)TzU=1 in HRTIM_TIMyCR
TyU=1 in TIMxCR
NoMust be done with TzU=1 in HRTIM_TIMxCR
TzU=1 in HRTIM_TIMyCR
Repetition event caused by a counter roll-overTyREPU = 1Yes-
Repetition event caused by a counter resetTyREPU = 1-Refer to counter reset cases below
Counter roll-overTyRSTU = 1Yes-

Table 246. TIMx update event propagation (continued)

SourceConditionPropagationComment
Counter software resetTyRST=1 in HRTIM_CR2NoCan be done simultaneously with update in HRTIM_CR2 register
Counter reset caused by a TIMz compareTIMzCMPn in HRTIM_RSTyRYes-
Counter reset caused by external eventsEXTEVNTn in HRTIM_RSTyRYes-
Counter reset caused by a master compare or a master periodMSTCMPn or MSTPER in HRTIM_RSTyRYes-
Counter reset caused by a TIMy compareCMPn in HRTIM_RSTyRYes-
Counter reset caused by an updateUPDT in HRTIM_RSTyRNoPropagation would result in a lock-up situation (update causing reset causing update)
Counter reset caused by HRTIM_SCINSYNCRSTy in HRTIM_TIMyCRNo-
Software updateTySWU = 1NoAll software update bits (TxSWU) are grouped in the HRTIM_CR2 register and can be used for a simultaneous update

TIMx counter reset causing a TIMx update

Table 247 lists the counter reset sources and indicates whether they can be used to generate an update.

Operating condition: TxRSTU bit in HRTIM_TIMxCR register.

Table 247. Reset events able to generate an update

SourceConditionPropagationComment
Counter roll-over-Yes-
Update eventUPDT in HRTIM_RSTxRNoPropagation would result in a lock-up situation (update causing a reset causing an update)
External eventEXTEVNTn in HRTIM_RSTxRYes-
TIMy compareTIMyCMPn in HRTIM_RSTxRYes-
Master compareMSTCMPn in HRTIM_RSTxRYes-
Master periodMSTPER in HRTIM_RSTxRYes-
Compare 2 and 4CMPn in HRTIM_RSTxRYes-
SoftwareTxRST=1 in HRTIM_CR2Yes-
HRTIM_SCINSYNCRSTx in HRTIM_TIMxCRYes-

TIMx update causing a TIMx counter reset

Table 248 lists the update event sources and indicates whether they can be used to generate a counter reset.

Operating condition: UPDT bit set in HRTIM_RSTxR.

Table 248. Update event propagation for a timer reset

SourceConditionPropagationComment
Burst DMA endUPDGAT[3:0] = 0001Yes-
Update caused by the update enable inputs hrtim_upd_en[3:1]UPDGAT[3:0] = 0011, 0100, 0101Yes-
Master update caused by a roll-over after a burst DMAMSTU = 1 in HRTIM_TIMxCR
BRSTDMA[1:0] = 10 in HRTIM_MCR
Yes-

Table 248. Update event propagation for a timer reset (continued)

SourceConditionPropagationComment
Master update caused by a repetition event following a roll-overMSTU = 1 in HRTIM_TIMxCRYes-
Master update caused by a repetition event following a counter reset (software or due to HRTIM_SCIN)MREPU = 1 in HRTIM_MCRNo-
Software triggered master timer updateMSTU = 1 in HRTIM_TIMxCR
MSWU = 1 in HRTIM_CR2
NoAll software update bits (TxSWU) are grouped in the HRTIM_CR2 register and can be used for a simultaneous update
TIMy update caused by a TIMy counter roll-overTyU = 1 in HRTIM_TIMxCR
TyRSTU = 1 in HRTIM_TIMyCR
Yes-
TIMy update caused by a TIMy repetition eventTyU = 1 in HRTIM_TIMxCR
TyREPU = 1 in HRTIM_TIMyCR
Yes-
TIMy update caused by an external event or a TIMy compare (through a TIMy reset)TyU = 1 in HRTIM_TIMxCR
TyRSTU = 1 in HRTIM_TIMyCR
EXTEVNTn or CMP4/2 in HRTIM_RSTyCR
Yes-
TIMy update caused by sources other than those listed aboveTyU = 1 in HRTIM_TIMxCRNo-
Repetition event following a roll-overTxREPU = 1 in HRTIM_TIMxCRYes-
Repetition event following a counter resetTxREPU = 1 in HRTIM_TIMxCRNo-
Timer resetTxRSTU = 1 in HRTIM_TIMxCRNoPropagation would result in a lock-up situation (reset causing an update causing a reset)
SoftwareTxSWU in HRTIM_CR2No-

28.3.14 Output management

Each timing unit controls a pair of outputs. The outputs have three operating states:

The output status is indicated by TxyOEN bit in HRTIM_OENR register and TxyODS bit in HRTIM_ODSR register, as in Table 249 .

Table 249. Output state programming, x= A..F, y = 1 or 2

TxyOEN (control/status)
(set by software,
cleared by hardware)
TxyODS (status)Output operating state
1xRUN
00IDLE
01FAULT

TxyOEN bit is both a control and a status bit: it must be set by software to have the output in RUN mode. It is cleared by hardware when the output goes back in IDLE or FAULT mode. When TxyOEN bit is cleared, TxyODS bit indicates whether the output is in the IDLE or FAULT state. A third bit in the HRTIM_ODISR register allows to disable the output by software.

Figure 261. Output management overview

Figure 261. Output management overview diagram showing the internal logic of the HRTIM output stage. A Timing Unit block connects to a Chopper block, which is controlled by CPHx. The Chopper output is connected to a 2-to-1 multiplexer. The multiplexer has three inputs: RUN (from the Chopper), IDLE (from an IDLE State block), and FAULT (from a FAULT State block). The multiplexer is controlled by a Status: OEN/ODS register. The output of the multiplexer is connected to an inverter and a POLx input, resulting in the HRTIM_CHxy output. The IDLE State block is controlled by IDLESx and the FAULT State block is controlled by FAULTx[1:0]. The Status: OEN/ODS register is updated by RUN entry (Software (OEN bit set)), IDLE entry (Software (ODIS bit set) or Hardware: Burst / Delayed protection), and FAULT entry (Hardware (FAULTx inputs) or breakpoint).
Figure 261. Output management overview diagram showing the internal logic of the HRTIM output stage. A Timing Unit block connects to a Chopper block, which is controlled by CPHx. The Chopper output is connected to a 2-to-1 multiplexer. The multiplexer has three inputs: RUN (from the Chopper), IDLE (from an IDLE State block), and FAULT (from a FAULT State block). The multiplexer is controlled by a Status: OEN/ODS register. The output of the multiplexer is connected to an inverter and a POLx input, resulting in the HRTIM_CHxy output. The IDLE State block is controlled by IDLESx and the FAULT State block is controlled by FAULTx[1:0]. The Status: OEN/ODS register is updated by RUN entry (Software (OEN bit set)), IDLE entry (Software (ODIS bit set) or Hardware: Burst / Delayed protection), and FAULT entry (Hardware (FAULTx inputs) or breakpoint).

Figure 262 summarizes the bit values for the three states and how the transitions are triggered. Faults can be triggered by any external or internal fault source, as listed in

Section 28.3.17 , while the Idle state can be entered when the burst mode or delayed protections are active.

Figure 262. HRTIM output states and transitions

Figure 262. HRTIM output states and transitions diagram showing three states: IDLE, RUN, and FAULT with their respective conditions and transitions.
stateDiagram-v2
    [*] --> IDLE
    IDLE --> RUN : OEN bit set
    RUN --> IDLE : ODIS bit set
    IDLE --> FAULT : (Fault or breakpoint* & (FAULTx[1:0] > 0) & OEN = 1)
    FAULT --> IDLE : ODIS bit set
    RUN --> FAULT : Fault (if FAULTx > 0) or breakpoint*
    FAULT --> RUN : OEN bit set

    state "IDLE State" as IDLE {
        OEN = 0
        ODS = 0
    }
    state "RUN State" as RUN {
        O EN = 1
        O DS = X
    }
    state "FAULT State" as FAULT {
        OEN = 0
        ODS = 1
    }

    note right of FAULT : Breakpoint*: this condition is valid only if DBG_HRTIM_STOP = 1
    note right of FAULT : Txy prefix is omitted for clarity: (OEN = TxyOEN, ODIS = TxyODIS, ODS = TxyODS)
    note right of FAULT : MS32333V1
  

The diagram illustrates the state transitions for HRTIM outputs. It features three states: IDLE, RUN, and FAULT. Transitions are triggered by specific conditions involving OEN, ODIS, and FAULTx bits. The IDLE state is the initial state with OEN=0 and ODS=0. The RUN state is entered from IDLE when OEN is set, with O EN=1 and O DS=X. The FAULT state is entered from IDLE if a fault or breakpoint occurs while OEN=1, or from RUN if a fault or breakpoint occurs. In the FAULT state, OEN=0 and ODS=1. Transitions back to IDLE or RUN from FAULT are triggered by ODIS being set. A note indicates that the Txy prefix is omitted for clarity, and a breakpoint condition is only valid if DBG_HRTIM_STOP = 1.

Figure 262. HRTIM output states and transitions diagram showing three states: IDLE, RUN, and FAULT with their respective conditions and transitions.

The FAULT and IDLE levels are defined as active or inactive. Active (or inactive) refers to the level on the timer output that causes a power switch to be closed (or opened for an inactive state).

The IDLE state has the highest priority: the transition FAULT → IDLE is possible even if the FAULT condition is still valid, triggered by ODIS bit set.

The FAULT state has priority over the RUN state: if TxyOEN bit is set simultaneously with a fault event, the FAULT state is entered. The condition is given on the transition IDLE → FAULT, as in Figure 262 : fault protection needs to be enabled (FAULTx[1:0] bits = 01, 10, 11) and the Txy OEN bit set with a fault active (or during a breakpoint if DBG_HRTIM_STOP = 1).

The output polarity is programmed using POLx bits in HRTIM_OUTxR. When POLx = 0, the polarity is positive (output active high), while it is active low in case of a negative polarity (POLx = 1). Practically, the polarity is defined depending on the power switch to be driven (PMOS versus NMOS) or on a gate driver polarity.

The output level in the FAULT state is configured using FAULTx[1:0] bits in HRTIM_OUTxR, for each output, as follows:

Note: FAULTx[1:0] bits must not be changed as long as the outputs are in FAULT state.

The level of the output in IDLE state is configured using IDLESx bit in HRTIM_OUTxR, as follows:

When TxyOEN bit is set to enter the RUN state, the output is immediately connected to the crossbar output. If the timer clock is stopped, the level is either inactive (after an HRTIM reset) or corresponds to the RUN level (when the timer is stopped and the output disabled).

During the HRTIM initialization, the output level can be prepositioned prior to have it in RUN mode, using the software forced output set and reset in the HRTIM_SETx1R and HRTIM_RSTx1R registers.

28.3.15 Burst mode controller

The burst mode controller allows to have the outputs alternatively in IDLE and RUN state, by hardware, so as to skip some switching periods with a programmable periodicity and duty cycle.

Burst mode operation is of common use in power converters when operating under light loads. It can significantly increase the efficiency of the converter by reducing the number of transitions on the outputs and the associated switching losses.

When operating in burst mode, one or a few pulses are outputs followed by an idle period equal to several counting periods, typically, where no output pulses are produced, as shown in the example on Figure 263 .

Figure 263. Burst mode operation example

Timing diagram of Burst mode operation showing Counter, Output, Output state, Burst clock, and Burst counter signals. The Output state alternates between RUN and IDLE. During RUN, the Output produces PWM pulses. During IDLE, the Output is flat. The Burst counter increments on each Burst clock pulse. HRTIM_BMCMP defines the transition from IDLE to RUN, and HRTIM_BMPER defines the total cycle period.

The figure illustrates the timing relationship in burst mode. - Burst Trigger : An external or internal event that initiates the burst sequence. - Counter : A standard sawtooth waveform representing the timer counter. - Output : Shows PWM pulses during the RUN state and remains at a constant level during the IDLE state. - Output state : A logic signal indicating whether the system is in the RUN or IDLE phase. - Burst clock : A periodic clock signal used by the burst controller. - Burst counter : Increments with the Burst clock. It resets to 0 at the start of an IDLE period. - HRTIM_BMCMP = 4 : Indicates that the transition from IDLE to RUN occurs when the burst counter reaches 4. - HRTIM_BMPER = 7 : Indicates the total period of the burst cycle (from 0 to 7), after which the counter resets to 0 and a new IDLE period begins.

Timing diagram of Burst mode operation showing Counter, Output, Output state, Burst clock, and Burst counter signals. The Output state alternates between RUN and IDLE. During RUN, the Output produces PWM pulses. During IDLE, the Output is flat. The Burst counter increments on each Burst clock pulse. HRTIM_BMCMP defines the transition from IDLE to RUN, and HRTIM_BMPER defines the total cycle period.

The burst mode controller consists of:

The burst mode controller is able to take over the control of any of the 10 PWM outputs. The state of each output during a burst mode operation is programmed using IDLESx and IDLEMx bits in the HRTIM_OUTxR register, as in Table 250 .

Table 250. Timer output programming for burst mode

IDLEMxIDLESxOutput state during burst mode
0XNo action: the output is not affected by the burst mode operation.
10Output inactive during the burst
11Output active during the burst

Note: IDLEMx bit must not be changed while the burst mode is active.

The burst mode controller only acts on the output stage. A number of events are still generated during the idle period:

During the burst mode, neither start nor reset events are generated on the hrtim_out_sync[2:1] output, even if TxBM bit is set.

Operating mode

It is necessary to have the counter enabled (TxCEN bit set) before using the burst mode on a given timing unit. The burst mode is enabled with BME bit in the HRTIM_BMCR register.

It can operate in continuous or single-shot mode, using BMOM bit in the HRTIM_BMCR register. The continuous mode is enabled when BMOM = 1. The burst operation is maintained until BMSTAT bit in HRTIM_BMCR is reset to terminate it.

In single-shot mode (BMOM = 0), the idle sequence is executed once, following the burst mode trigger, and the normal timer operation is resumed immediately after.

The duration of the idle and run periods is defined with a burst mode counter and 2 registers. The HRTIM_BMCMPR register defines the number of counts during which the selected timer(s) are in an idle state (idle period). HRTIM_BMPER defines the overall burst mode period (sum of the idle and run periods). Once the initial burst mode trigger has occurred, the idle period length is HRTIM_BMCMPR+1, the overall burst period is HRTIM_BMPER+1.

Note: The burst mode period must not be less than or equal to the deadtime duration defined with DTRx[8:0] and DTFx[8:0] bitfields.

The counters of the timing units and the master timer can be stopped and reset during the burst mode operation. HRTIM_BMCR holds 6 control bits for this purpose: MTBM (master) and TABM..TEBM for timer A..E.

When MTBM or TxBM bit is reset, the counter clock is maintained. This allows to keep a phase relationship with other timers in multiphase systems, for instance.

When MTBM or TxBM bit is set, the corresponding counter is stopped and maintained in reset state during the burst idle period. This allows to have the timer restarting a full period when exiting from idle. If SYNCSRC[1:0] = 00 or 10 (synchronization output on the master

start or timer A start), a pulse is sent on the HRTIM_SCOUT output when exiting the burst mode.

Note: TxBM bit must not be set when the balanced idle mode is active (DLYPRT[1:0] = 0x11).

Burst mode clock

The burst mode controller counter can be clocked by several sources, selected with BMCLK[3:0] bits in the HRTIM_BMCR register:

The pulse width on TIMx OC output must be at least N \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock cycles long to be detected by the HRTIM burst mode controller.

Burst mode triggers

To trigger the burst operation, 32 sources are available and are selected using the HRTIM_BMTRGR register:

These sources can be combined to have multiple concurrent triggers.

Burst mode is not re-triggerable. In continuous mode, new triggers are ignored until the burst mode is terminated, while in single-shot mode, the triggers are ignored until the current burst completion including run periods (HRTIM_BMPER+1 cycles). This is also valid for software trigger (the software bit is reset by hardware even if it is discarded).

Figure 264 shows how the burst mode is started in response to an external event, either immediately or on the timer period following the event.

Figure 264. Burst mode trigger on external event

Timing diagram showing burst mode trigger on external event. The diagram illustrates the relationship between an external event, a counter, and output states (RUN, IDLE) for two trigger sources: 'Trigger on external event' and 'Trigger on timer period following external event'. The counter is shown as a sawtooth waveform. The 'Trigger on external event' output is shown as a pulse train that goes high when the counter is in the RUN state and low when it is in the IDLE state. The 'Trigger on timer period following external event' output is shown as a pulse train that goes high when the counter is in the RUN state and low when it is in the IDLE state. The diagram shows that the counter is reset by the external event, and the output states are updated accordingly. The diagram is labeled MS32284V1.
Timing diagram showing burst mode trigger on external event. The diagram illustrates the relationship between an external event, a counter, and output states (RUN, IDLE) for two trigger sources: 'Trigger on external event' and 'Trigger on timer period following external event'. The counter is shown as a sawtooth waveform. The 'Trigger on external event' output is shown as a pulse train that goes high when the counter is in the RUN state and low when it is in the IDLE state. The 'Trigger on timer period following external event' output is shown as a pulse train that goes high when the counter is in the RUN state and low when it is in the IDLE state. The diagram shows that the counter is reset by the external event, and the output states are updated accordingly. The diagram is labeled MS32284V1.

For TAEEV7 and TDEEV8 combined triggers (trigger on a timer period following an external event), the external event detection is always active, regardless of the burst mode programming and the on-going burst operation:

Note: TAEEV7 and TDEEV8 triggers are valid only after a period event. If the counter is reset before the period event, the pending hrtim_eev7 or hrtim_eev8 event is discarded.

Burst mode delayed entry

By default, the outputs are taking their idle level (as per IDLES1 and IDLES2 setting) immediately after the burst mode trigger.

It is also possible to delay the burst mode entry and force the output to an inactive state during a programmable period before the output takes its idle state. This is useful when driving two complementary outputs, one of them having an active idle state, to avoid a deadtime violation as shown on Figure 265 . This prevents any risk of shoot through current in half-bridges, but causes a delayed response to the burst mode entry.

Figure 265. Delayed burst mode entry with deadtime enabled and IDLESx = 1

Timing diagram showing delayed burst mode entry with deadtime enabled and IDLESx = 1. The diagram illustrates the output state transition from RUN to IDLE for two HRTIM channels (CHx1 and CHx2) under different deadtime insertion settings (DIDL1, DIDL2).

The diagram shows the timing of HRTIM outputs during a burst mode entry. A 'Burst Trigger' signal initiates the transition from 'RUN' to 'IDLE' state. The diagram is divided into two sections based on the configuration of the DIDLx bits in the HRTIM_OUTxR register.

The diagram illustrates that when DIDLx = 1 and IDLESx = 1 , a deadtime insertion is enforced before the output takes its idle state, resulting in a 'Delayed idle state'. When DIDLx = 0 , no deadtime insertion is enforced, which can lead to a 'Deadtime violation' if the output transitions too quickly.

MS32285V2

Timing diagram showing delayed burst mode entry with deadtime enabled and IDLESx = 1. The diagram illustrates the output state transition from RUN to IDLE for two HRTIM channels (CHx1 and CHx2) under different deadtime insertion settings (DIDL1, DIDL2).

The delayed burst entry mode is enabled with DIDLx bit in the HRTIM_OUTxR register (one enable bit per output). It forces a deadtime insertion before the output takes its idle state. Each TIMx output has its own deadtime value:

DIDLx bits can be set only if one of the outputs has an active idle level during the burst mode ( IDLES = 1 ) and only when positive deadtimes are used ( SDTR/SDTF set to 0).

Note: The delayed burst entry mode uses deadtime generator resources. Consequently, when any of the 2 DIDLx bits is set and the corresponding timing unit uses the deadtime insertion ( DTEN bit set in HRTIM_OUTxR ), it is not possible to use the timerx output 2 as a filter for external events ( Tx2 filtering signal is not available).

When durations defined by DTRx[8:0] and DTFx[8:0] are lower than 3 \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock cycle periods, the limitations related to the narrow pulse management listed in Section 28.3.7 must be applied.

When the burst mode entry arrives during the regular deadtime, it is aborted and a new deadtime is re-started corresponding to the inactive period, as on Figure 266 .

Figure 266. Delayed burst mode entry during deadtime

Timing diagram showing delayed burst mode entry during deadtime for HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2. The diagram illustrates the transition from an active state to an IDLE state, with a regular deadtime (DT) and a delayed burst mode entry deadtime (DT) indicated.

The diagram shows two output waveforms, HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2. Both start in an active state (high for CHx1, low for CHx2). A vertical dashed line marks the 'Burst mode entry' point. At this point, the 'Regular deadtime (aborted when burst is triggered)' is shown as a short interval. Below this, a 'Delayed Burst mode entry deadtime' is shown as a longer interval. After the deadtime, both outputs transition to an 'IDLES' state. The label 'MS32286V3' is in the bottom right corner.

Timing diagram showing delayed burst mode entry during deadtime for HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2. The diagram illustrates the transition from an active state to an IDLE state, with a regular deadtime (DT) and a delayed burst mode entry deadtime (DT) indicated.

Burst mode exit

The burst mode exit is either forced by software (in continuous mode) or once the idle period is elapsed (in single-shot mode). In both cases, the counter is re-started immediately (if it was hold in a reset state with MTBM or TxBM bit = 1), but the effective output state transition from the idle to active mode only happens after the programmed set/reset event.

A burst period interrupt is generated in single-shot and continuous modes when BMPERIE enable bit is set in the HRTIM_IER register. This interrupt can be used to synchronize the burst mode exit with a burst period in continuous burst mode.

Figure 267 shows how a normal operation is resumed when the deadtime is enabled. Although the burst mode exit is immediate, this is only effective on the first set event on any of the complementary outputs.

Two different cases are presented:

  1. 1. The burst mode ends while the signal is inactive on the crossbar output waveform. The active state is resumed on Tx1 and Tx2 on the set event for the Tx1 output, and the Tx2 output does not take the complementary level on burst exit.
  2. 2. The burst mode ends while the crossbar output waveform is active: the activity is resumed on the set event of Tx2 output, and Tx1 does not take the active level immediately on burst exit.

Figure 267. Burst mode exit when the deadtime generator is enabled

Timing diagram showing burst mode exit when the deadtime generator is enabled. The diagram illustrates the relationship between the Timx counter, Out1 crossbar waveform, Burst state, and HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 outputs. The Timx counter is a sawtooth waveform. The Out1 crossbar waveform is a square wave. The Burst state transitions from IDLE to RUN. The HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 outputs are shown in two scenarios: one where they are active during the IDLE state and reset upon entering RUN, and another where they are inactive during the IDLE state and become active upon entering RUN. Vertical dashed lines indicate the transition points between IDLE and RUN states.

The figure is a timing diagram illustrating the behavior of an HRTIM timer in burst mode when the deadtime generator is enabled. It consists of two main sections, each showing a different output configuration.

The vertical dashed lines indicate the transition points between the IDLE and RUN states. The diagram shows that the outputs are reset or forced to a specific state at the beginning of the RUN period, depending on their configuration.

MS32287V3

Timing diagram showing burst mode exit when the deadtime generator is enabled. The diagram illustrates the relationship between the Timx counter, Out1 crossbar waveform, Burst state, and HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 outputs. The Timx counter is a sawtooth waveform. The Out1 crossbar waveform is a square wave. The Burst state transitions from IDLE to RUN. The HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 outputs are shown in two scenarios: one where they are active during the IDLE state and reset upon entering RUN, and another where they are inactive during the IDLE state and become active upon entering RUN. Vertical dashed lines indicate the transition points between IDLE and RUN states.

The behavior described above is slightly different when the push-pull mode is enabled. The push-pull mode forces an output reset at the beginning of the period if the output is inactive, or symmetrically forces an active level if the output was high during the preceding period.

Consequently, an output with an active idle state can be reset at the time the burst mode is exited even if no transition is explicitly programmed. For symmetrical reasons, an output can be set at the time the burst mode is exited even if no transition is explicitly programmed, in case it was active when it entered in idle state.

Burst mode registers preloading and update

BMPREN bit (burst mode preload enable) allows to have the burst mode compare and period registers preloaded (HRTIM_BMCMP and HRTIM_BMPER).

When BMPREN is set, the transfer from preload to active register happens:

A write into the HRTIM_BMPER period register disables the update temporarily, until the HRTIM_BMCMP compare register is written, to ensure the consistency of the two registers when they are modified.

If the compare register only needs to be changed, a single write is necessary. If the period only needs to be changed, it is also necessary to re-write the compare to have the new values taken into account.

When BMPREN bits is reset, the write access into BMCMR and BMPER directly updates the active register. In this case, it is necessary to consider when the update is done during the overall burst period, for the 2 cases below:

a) Compare register update

If the new compare value is above the current burst mode counter value, the new compare is taken into account in the current period.

If the new compare value is below the current burst mode counter value, the new compare is taken into account in the next burst period in continuous mode, and ignored in single-shot mode (no compare match occurs and the idle state lasts until the end of the idle period).

b) Period register update

If the new period value is above the current burst mode counter value, the change is taken into account in the current period.

Note: If the new period value is below the current burst mode counter value, the new period is not taken into account, the burst mode counter overflows (at 0xFFFF) and the change is effective in the next period. In single-shot mode, the counter rolls over at 0xFFFF and the burst mode re-starts for another period up to the new programmed value.

Burst mode emulation using a compound register

The burst mode controller only controls one or a set of timers for a single converter. When the burst mode is necessary for multiple independent timers, it is possible to emulate a simple burst mode controller using the DMA and the HRTIM_CMP1CxR compound register, which holds aliases of both the repetition and the compare 1 registers.

This is applicable to a converter which only requires a simple PWM (typically a buck converter), where the duty cycle only needs to be updated. In this case, the CMP1 register is used to reset the output (and define the duty cycle), while it is set on the period event.

In this case, a single 32-bit write access in CMP1CxR is sufficient to define the duty cycle (with the CMP1 value) and the number of periods during which this duty cycle is maintained (with the repetition value). To implement a burst mode, it is then only necessary to transfer by DMA (upon repetition event) two 32-bit data in continuous mode, organized as follows:

CMP1CxR = {REP_Idle; CMP1 = Duty_Cycle}, {REP_Run; CMP1 = 0}

For instance, the values:

{0x0001 0000}: CMP1 = 0 for 2 periods during Idle

{0x0003 0800}: CMP1 = 0x0800 for 4 periods during Run

provide a burst mode with 2 periods active every 6 PWM periods, as shown on Figure 268 .

Figure 268. Burst mode emulation example

Timing diagram for burst mode emulation showing Counter, CMPC1xR, and Output signals over time.

The diagram illustrates burst mode emulation using the HRTIM. It consists of three horizontal timelines:

MS32288V2

Timing diagram for burst mode emulation showing Counter, CMPC1xR, and Output signals over time.

28.3.16 Chopper

A high-frequency carrier can be added on top of the timing unit output signals to drive isolation transformers. This is done in the output stage before the polarity insertion, as shown on Figure 269, using CHP1 and CHP2 bits in the HRTIM_OUTxR register, to enable chopper on outputs 1 and 2, respectively.

Figure 269. Carrier frequency signal insertion

Block diagram of the chopper and carrier frequency signal insertion mechanism.

The diagram shows the internal logic for carrier frequency insertion into the HRTIM outputs. Key components include:

MS32334V2

Block diagram of the chopper and carrier frequency signal insertion mechanism.

The chopper parameters can be adjusted using the HRIM_CHPxR register, with the possibility to define a specific pulsewidth at the beginning of the pulse, to be followed by a carrier frequency with programmable frequency and duty cycle, as in Figure 270 .

CARFRQ[3:0] bits define the frequency, ranging from 664 kHz to 10.625 MHz (for \( f_{HRTIM} = 170 \text{ MHz} \) ) following the formula \( F_{CHPFRQ} = f_{HRTIM} / (16 \times (CARFRQ[3:0]+1)) \) .

The duty cycle can be adjusted by 1/8 step with CARDTY[2:0], from 0/8 up to 7/8 duty cycle. When CARDTY[2:0] = 000 (duty cycle = 0/8), the output waveform only contains the starting pulse following the rising edge of the reference waveform, without any added carrier.

The pulsewidth of the initial pulse is defined using the STRPW[3:0] bitfield as follows: \( t_{1STPW} = (STRPW[3:0]+1) \times 16 \times t_{HRTIM} \) and ranges from 94.1 ns to 1.51 µs (for \( f_{HRTIM} = 170 \text{ MHz} \) ).

The carrier frequency parameters are defined based on the \( f_{HRTIM} \) frequency, and are not dependent from the CKPSC[2:0] setting.

In chopper mode, the carrier frequency and the initial pulsewidth are combined with the reference waveform using an AND function. A synchronization is performed at the end of the initial pulse to have a repetitive signal shape.

The chopping signal is stopped at the end of the output waveform active state, without waiting for the current carrier period to be completed. It can thus contain shorter pulses than programmed.

Figure 270. HRTIM outputs with Chopper mode enabled

Timing diagram showing three waveforms: Output x1, Carrier, and HRTIM_CHx1. Output x1 is a high-level signal. Carrier is a square wave. HRTIM_CHx1 is the AND of Output x1 and Carrier. The diagram shows the 'Start pulsewidth' (the duration of the first pulse of HRTIM_CHx1) and the 'Carrier period' (the duration of one carrier cycle). A 'Start' label indicates the beginning of the pulse sequence. The diagram is labeled MS32335V3.
Timing diagram showing three waveforms: Output x1, Carrier, and HRTIM_CHx1. Output x1 is a high-level signal. Carrier is a square wave. HRTIM_CHx1 is the AND of Output x1 and Carrier. The diagram shows the 'Start pulsewidth' (the duration of the first pulse of HRTIM_CHx1) and the 'Carrier period' (the duration of one carrier cycle). A 'Start' label indicates the beginning of the pulse sequence. The diagram is labeled MS32335V3.

Note: CHP1 and CHP2 bits must be set prior to the output enable done with TxyOEN bits in the HRTIM_OENR register.

CARFRQ[2:0], CARDTY[2:0] and STRPW[3:0] bitfields cannot be modified while the chopper mode is active (at least one of the two CHPx bits is set).

28.3.17 Fault protection

The HRTIM has a versatile fault protection circuitry to disable the outputs in case of an abnormal operation. Once a fault has been triggered, the outputs take a predefined safe state. This state is maintained until the output is re-enabled by software. In case of a permanent fault request, the output remains in its fault state, even if the software attempts to re-enable them, until the fault source disappears.

The HRTIM has 6 FAULT input channels; all of them are available and can be combined for each of the 6 timing units, as shown on Figure 271 .

Figure 271. Fault protection circuitry (FAULT1 fully represented, FAULT2..6 partially)

Figure 271: Fault protection circuitry diagram. The diagram shows the internal logic for fault protection in an HRTIM. At the top, 'Timer x' is connected to two comparators. The first comparator takes 'FAULT1[1:0]' as input and its output is connected to 'HRTIM_CHx1'. The second comparator takes 'FAULT2[1:0]' as input and its output is connected to 'HRTIM_CHx2'. Below the timers, a 'Counter' block is shown with inputs 'FLT1RSTM' and 'FLT1CREG'. It has two feedback loops: one through a switch labeled 'FLT1P' and another through a block labeled 'FLT1CNT[3:0]'. The 'Counter' output is connected to a 'Filter' block. The 'Filter' block has inputs 'FLT1SRC[1:0]' (selecting between 'HRTIM_FLT[1]', 'hrtim_in_flt1', 'EEV1_muxout', and 'N/A'), 'FLT1P' (polarity), and 'fILTERS FLT1F[3:0]' (filter length). The 'Filter' output is connected to a 'Blanking sources' block. The 'Blanking sources' block output is connected to a 'SYSFLT' block, which outputs 'hrtim_sys_flt'. The 'SYSFLT' output is also connected to a series of AND gates. The first AND gate takes 'FLT1E' and 'Fault2' as inputs. The second AND gate takes 'FLT2EN' and 'Fault3' as inputs. The third AND gate takes 'FLT3EN' and 'Fault4' as inputs. The outputs of these AND gates are connected to a 3-input OR gate, which outputs 'Fault 6', 'Fault 5', and 'Fault 4'. The 'SYSFLT' output is also connected to the 'FLT1CNT[3:0]' block.
Figure 271: Fault protection circuitry diagram. The diagram shows the internal logic for fault protection in an HRTIM. At the top, 'Timer x' is connected to two comparators. The first comparator takes 'FAULT1[1:0]' as input and its output is connected to 'HRTIM_CHx1'. The second comparator takes 'FAULT2[1:0]' as input and its output is connected to 'HRTIM_CHx2'. Below the timers, a 'Counter' block is shown with inputs 'FLT1RSTM' and 'FLT1CREG'. It has two feedback loops: one through a switch labeled 'FLT1P' and another through a block labeled 'FLT1CNT[3:0]'. The 'Counter' output is connected to a 'Filter' block. The 'Filter' block has inputs 'FLT1SRC[1:0]' (selecting between 'HRTIM_FLT[1]', 'hrtim_in_flt1', 'EEV1_muxout', and 'N/A'), 'FLT1P' (polarity), and 'fILTERS FLT1F[3:0]' (filter length). The 'Filter' output is connected to a 'Blanking sources' block. The 'Blanking sources' block output is connected to a 'SYSFLT' block, which outputs 'hrtim_sys_flt'. The 'SYSFLT' output is also connected to a series of AND gates. The first AND gate takes 'FLT1E' and 'Fault2' as inputs. The second AND gate takes 'FLT2EN' and 'Fault3' as inputs. The third AND gate takes 'FLT3EN' and 'Fault4' as inputs. The outputs of these AND gates are connected to a 3-input OR gate, which outputs 'Fault 6', 'Fault 5', and 'Fault 4'. The 'SYSFLT' output is also connected to the 'FLT1CNT[3:0]' block.

Each fault channel is fully configurable using HRTIM_FLTINR1 and HRTIM_FLTINR2 registers before being routed to the timing units. FLTxSRC FLTxSRC[1:0] bit selects the source of the fault signal, that can be either a digital input or an internal event (built-in comparator output).

Table 228 details the 3 available sources for each of the 6 faults channels.

The EEVx_muxout event mentioned in Figure 271 above is taken after the hrtim_eevx[4:1] input multiplexer controlled by the EExSRC[1:0] bits. Refer to Figure 243 for details.

The polarity of the signal can be selected to define the active level, using the FLTxP polarity bit in HRTIM_FLTINRx registers. If FLTxP = 0, the signal is active at low level; if FLTxP = 1, it is active when high.

The fault information can be filtered after the polarity setting. If FLTxF[3:0] bitfield is set to 0000, the signal is not filtered and acts asynchronously, independently from the \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock. For all other FLTxF[3:0] bitfield values, the signal is digitally filtered. The digital filter is made of a counter in which a number N of valid samples is needed to validate a transition on the output. If the input value changes before the counter has reached the value N, the counter is reset and the transition is discarded (considered as a spurious event). If the counter reaches N, the transition is considered as valid and transmitted as a correct external event. Consequently, the digital filter adds a latency to the external events being filtered, depending on the sampling clock and on the filter length (number of valid samples expected). Figure 272 shows how a spurious fault signal is filtered.

Figure 272. Fault signal filtering (FLTxF[3:0] = 0010:\( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) , N = 4) Timing diagram showing fault signal filtering. The top section shows a continuous high-frequency clock (f_HRTIM) and a 'Fault input' signal that goes high and stays high. The 'Filter counter' starts at 0, increments to 1, 2, 3, 4, and then stays at 4. The 'Filtered signal' goes high when the counter reaches 4. The bottom section shows the same clock and a 'Fault input' signal that goes high, then low, then high again. The 'Filter counter' starts at 0, increments to 1, 2, then resets to 0 when the input goes low, then increments back to 1, 2, 3, 4 when the input goes high again. The 'Filtered signal' goes high when the counter reaches 4.
Timing diagram showing fault signal filtering. The top section shows a continuous high-frequency clock (f_HRTIM) and a 'Fault input' signal that goes high and stays high. The 'Filter counter' starts at 0, increments to 1, 2, 3, 4, and then stays at 4. The 'Filtered signal' goes high when the counter reaches 4. The bottom section shows the same clock and a 'Fault input' signal that goes high, then low, then high again. The 'Filter counter' starts at 0, increments to 1, 2, then resets to 0 when the input goes low, then increments back to 1, 2, 3, 4 when the input goes high again. The 'Filtered signal' goes high when the counter reaches 4.

The filtering period ranges from 2 cycles of the \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) clock up to 8 cycles of the \( f_{\text{FLTS}} \) clock divided by 32. \( f_{\text{FLTS}} \) is defined using FLTSD[1:0] bits in the HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Table 251 summarizes the sampling rate and the filter length. A jitter of 1 sampling clock period must be subtracted from the filter length to take into account the uncertainty due to the sampling and have the effective filtering.

Table 251. Sampling rate and filter length vs FLTxF[3:0] and clock setting

-\( f_{\text{FLTS}} \) vs FLTSD[1:0]Filter length for \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} = 170 \text{ MHz} \)
FLTxF[3:0]00011011MinMax
0001,0010,0011\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) , N = 2
11.8 ns
\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) , N = 8
47.1 ns
0100, 0101\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 2 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 4 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 8 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 16 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 2 \) , N = 6
70.6 ns
\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 16 \) , N = 8
753 ns
0110, 0111\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 4 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 8 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 16 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 32 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 4 \) , N = 6
141 ns
\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 32 \) , N = 8
1.51 \( \mu\text{s} \)
1000, 1001\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 8 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 16 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 32 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 64 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 8 \) , N = 6
282 ns
\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 64 \) , N = 8
3.01 \( \mu\text{s} \)
1010, 1011, 1100\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 16 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 32 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 64 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 128 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 16 \) , N = 5
471 ns
\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 128 \) , N = 8
6.02 \( \mu\text{s} \)
1101, 1110, 1111\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 32 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 64 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 128 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 256 \)\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 32 \) , N = 5
941 ns
\( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 256 \) , N = 8
12.05 \( \mu\text{s} \)

Fault blanking and event counting

The fault inputs can be temporarily disabled to blank spurious fault events. The blanking sources are listed in the Table 252 below.

Table 252. Fault input blanking events

Fault inputFLTxBLS = 0, reset-aligned windowFLTxBLS = 1 moving window
Blanking window startBlanking window endBlanking window startBlanking window end
Fault 1Timer A reset/roll-overTimer A CMP3 eventTimer A CMP4 eventTimer A CMP3 event
Fault 2Timer B reset/roll-overTimer B CMP3 eventTimer B CMP4 eventTimer B CMP3 event
Fault 3Timer C reset/roll-overTimer C CMP3 eventTimer C CMP4 eventTimer C CMP3 event
Fault 4Timer D reset/roll-overTimer D CMP3 eventTimer D CMP4 eventTimer D CMP3 event
Fault 5Timer E reset/roll-overTimer E CMP3 eventTimer E CMP4 eventTimer E CMP3 event
Fault 6Timer F reset/roll-overTimer F CMP3 eventTimer F CMP4 eventTimer F CMP3 event

A fault counter also allows to discard multiple spurious fault events and define an acceptance criteria.

The FLTxCNT[3:0] bitfield selects the FAULTx counter threshold. A fault is considered valid when the number of events is equal to the FLTxCNT[3:0] value.

This FLTxRSTM selects the FAULTx counter reset mode

The fault counter can be reset by software with the FLTxCRES bit at anytime.

Figure 273. Fault counter cumulative mode (FLTxRSTM = 1, FLTxCNT[3:0] = 2)

Timing diagram illustrating the fault counter cumulative mode. The diagram shows five waveforms over time: Counter (sawtooth), FLT input (pulses), FLT edge detector (narrow pulses), FLT counter (values 0, 1, 2, 0, 1, 2, 3, 0), FLT event (high pulse), and PWM output (square wave). The FLT counter increments on each rising edge of the FLT input and resets to 0 on each Counter roll-over. The FLT event is generated when the FLT counter reaches the threshold value of 2. The PWM output is affected by the FLT event.

The diagram shows the following signal levels and transitions:

Timing diagram illustrating the fault counter cumulative mode. The diagram shows five waveforms over time: Counter (sawtooth), FLT input (pulses), FLT edge detector (narrow pulses), FLT counter (values 0, 1, 2, 0, 1, 2, 3, 0), FLT event (high pulse), and PWM output (square wave). The FLT counter increments on each rising edge of the FLT input and resets to 0 on each Counter roll-over. The FLT event is generated when the FLT counter reaches the threshold value of 2. The PWM output is affected by the FLT event.

A given FLTx input counter can be reset by a single source. The Table 253 indicates which timer unit associated with a given fault. This does not prevent to have a fault line shared by multiple timer (e.g. FLT1 with event counter enabled, acting on timer A, timer B and timer C simultaneously).

Table 253. Fault 1..6 counter reset source
Fault InputFault counter reset source
Fault 1Timer A reset/roll-over
Fault 2Timer B reset/roll-over
Fault 3Timer C reset/roll-over
Fault 4Timer D reset/roll-over
Fault 5Timer E reset/roll-over
Fault 6Timer F reset/roll-over
System fault input (hrtim_sys_flt)

This input overrides the FAULT inputs and disables all outputs having FAULTy[1:0] = 01, 10, 11. Refer to Table 230 for the list of system faults connected to this input.

For each FAULT channel, a write-once FLTxLCK bit in the HRTIM_FLTxR register allows to lock FLTxE, FLTxP, FLTxSRC, FLTxF[3:0] bits (it renders them read-only), for functional safety purpose. If enabled, the fault conditioning set-up is frozen until the next HRTIM or system reset.

Once the fault signal is conditioned as explained above, it is routed to the timing units. For any of them, the 6 fault channels are enabled using bits FLT1EN to FLT6EN in the HRTIM_FLTxR register, and they can be selected simultaneously (the sysfault is automatically enabled as long as the output is protected by the fault mechanism). This allows to have, for instance:

A write-once FLTLOCK bit in the HRTIM_FLTxR register allows to lock FLTxEN bits (it renders them read-only) until the next reset, for functional safety purpose. If enabled, the timing unit fault-related set-up is frozen until the next HRTIM or system reset.

For each of the timers, the output state during a fault is defined with FAULT1[1:0] and FAULT2[1:0] bits in the HRTIM_OUTxR register (see Section 28.3.14 ).

28.3.18 Auxiliary outputs

Timer A to E have auxiliary outputs in parallel with the regular outputs going to the output stage. They provide the following internal status, events and signals:

The auxiliary outputs are taken either before or after the burst mode controller, depending on the HRTIM operating mode. An overview is given on Figure 274 .

Figure 274. Auxiliary outputs

Figure 274. Auxiliary outputs block diagram

The diagram shows the signal flow for auxiliary outputs. It starts with a block labeled 'Set / reset crossbar with events ORing' which has two outputs, 'Out 1' and 'Out 2'. These signals enter a 'Push-pull or deadtime insertion' block. The outputs from this block, along with the original 'Out 1' and 'Out 2' signals, are multiplexed. The resulting signals pass through a 'Burst mode controller' to become 'HRTIM_CHx1' and 'HRTIM_CHx2', which go 'To the output stage'. Additionally, there is an 'Auxiliary output circuitry' block that takes inputs from the signals before and after the burst mode controller and generates several signals: 'SETxy / RSTxy flags', 'Interrupts and DMA requests', 'Capture triggers', and 'External event filtering (Out 2 channel only)'.

Figure 274. Auxiliary outputs block diagram

By default, the auxiliary outputs are copies of outputs Tx1 and Tx2. The exceptions are:

Figure 275. Auxiliary and main outputs during burst mode (DIDLx = 0)

Timing diagram for Figure 275 showing auxiliary and main outputs during burst mode. The diagram shows four signals: Auxiliary output1, Auxiliary output2, HRTIM_CHx1, and HRTIM_CHx2. Burst mode entry and exit are marked with vertical dashed lines. During burst mode, HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 are at the IDLES level. After the burst mode exit, the IDLES level is continued up to the transition to the opposite level. The signal on the auxiliary output can be slightly distorted when exiting from the burst mode or when re-enabling the outputs after a delayed protection, if this happens during a deadtime. In this case, the deadtime applied to the auxiliary outputs is extended so that the deadtime on the main outputs is respected. Figure 276 gives some examples.
Timing diagram for Figure 275 showing auxiliary and main outputs during burst mode. The diagram shows four signals: Auxiliary output1, Auxiliary output2, HRTIM_CHx1, and HRTIM_CHx2. Burst mode entry and exit are marked with vertical dashed lines. During burst mode, HRTIM_CHx1 and HRTIM_CHx2 are at the IDLES level. After the burst mode exit, the IDLES level is continued up to the transition to the opposite level. The signal on the auxiliary output can be slightly distorted when exiting from the burst mode or when re-enabling the outputs after a delayed protection, if this happens during a deadtime. In this case, the deadtime applied to the auxiliary outputs is extended so that the deadtime on the main outputs is respected. Figure 276 gives some examples.

The signal on the auxiliary output can be slightly distorted when exiting from the burst mode or when re-enabling the outputs after a delayed protection, if this happens during a deadtime. In this case, the deadtime applied to the auxiliary outputs is extended so that the deadtime on the main outputs is respected. Figure 276 gives some examples.

Figure 276. Deadtime distortion on auxiliary output when exiting burst mode

Timing diagram for Figure 276 showing deadtime distortion on auxiliary output when exiting burst mode. The diagram is divided into two cases. Case 1: transition request to the same level as IDLES. Case 2: transition request to a level opposite to IDLES. In Case 1, the programmed deadtime is maintained. In Case 2, the deadtime on the auxiliary output is extended.

Out1 reset request

Burst exit

Auxiliary output1

Auxiliary output2

Programmed deadtime

HRTIM_CHx1 IDLES = 0

HRTIM_CHx2 IDLES = 0

Case 1: transition request to the same level as IDLES
Same deadtime for main and auxiliary outputs

Auxiliary output1

Auxiliary output2

Extended deadtime

HRTIM_CHx1 IDLES = 1

HRTIM_CHx2 IDLES = 0

Programmed deadtime

Case 2: transition request to a level opposite to IDLES
Deadtime on auxiliary output is extended

Timing diagram for Figure 276 showing deadtime distortion on auxiliary output when exiting burst mode. The diagram is divided into two cases. Case 1: transition request to the same level as IDLES. Case 2: transition request to a level opposite to IDLES. In Case 1, the programmed deadtime is maintained. In Case 2, the deadtime on the auxiliary output is extended.

28.3.19 Synchronizing the HRTIM with other timers or HRTIM instances

The HRTIM provides options for synchronizing multiple HRTIM instances, as a master unit (generating a synchronization signal) or as a slave (waiting for a trigger to be synchronized). This feature can also be used to synchronize the HRTIM with other timers, either external or on-chip. The synchronization circuitry is controlled inside the master timer.

Synchronization output

This section explains how the HRTIM must be configured to synchronize external resources and act as a master unit.

Four events can be selected as the source to be sent to the synchronization output. This is done using SYNCSRC[1:0] bits in the HRTIM_MCR register, as follows:

SYNCOUT[1:0] bits in the HRTIM_MCR register specify how the synchronization event is generated.

The synchronization pulses can be generated on the HRTIM_SCOUT output pin, with SYNCSRC[1:0] = 1x. SYNCSRC[0] bit specifies the polarity of the synchronization signal. If SYNCSRC[0] = 0, the HRTIM_SCOUT pin has a low idle level and issues a positive pulse of 16 \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock cycles length for the synchronization). If SYNCSRC[0] = 1, the idle level is high and a negative pulse is generated.

Note: The synchronization pulse is followed by an idle level of 16 \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock cycles during which any new synchronization request is discarded. Consequently, the maximum synchronization frequency is \( f_{HRTIM}/32 \) .

The idle level on the HRTIM_SCOUT pin is applied as soon as the SYNCSRC[1:0] bits are enabled (i.e. the bitfield value is different from 00).

The synchronization output initialization procedure must be done prior to the configuration of the MCU outputs and counter enable, in the following order:

  1. 1. SYNCSRC[1:0] and SYNCSRC[1:0] bitfield configuration in HRTIM_MCR
  2. 2. HRTIM_SCOUT pin configuration (see the General-purpose I/Os section)
  3. 3. Master or timer A counter enable (MCEN or TACEN bit set)

When the synchronization input mode is enabled and starts the counter (using SYNCSTRTM/SYNCSTRTx bits) simultaneously with the synchronization output mode (SYNCSRC[1:0] = 00 or 10), the output pulse is generated only when the counter is starting or is reset while running. Any reset request clearing the counter without causing it to start does not affect the synchronization output.

Synchronization input

The HRTIM can be synchronized by external sources, as per the programming of the SYNCIN[1:0] bits in the HRTIM_MCR register:

This bitfield cannot be changed once the destination timer (master timer or timing unit) is enabled (MCEN and/or TxCEN bit set).

The HRTIM_SCIN input is rising-edge sensitive. The timer behavior is defined with the following bits present in HRTIM_MCR and HRTIM_TIMxCR registers (see Table 254 for details):

The synchronization events are taken into account only once the related counters are enabled (MCEN or TxCEN bit set). A synchronization request triggers a SYNC interrupt.

Note: A synchronized start event resets the counter if the current counter value is above the active period value.

The effect of the synchronization event depends on the timer operating mode, as summarized in Table 254 .

Table 254. Effect of sync event versus timer operating modes

Operating modeSYNC RSTxSYNC STRTxBehavior following a SYNC reset or start event
Single-shot non-retriggerable01Start events are taken into account when the counter is stopped and:
– once the MCEN or TxCEN bits are set
– once the period has been reached.
A start occurring when the counter is stopped at the period value resets the counter. A reset request clears the counter but does not start it (the counter can solely be re-started with the synchronization). Any reset occurring during the counting is ignored (as during regular non-retriggerable mode).
1XReset events are starting the timer counting. They are taken into account only if the counter is stopped and:
– once the MCEN or TxCEN bits are set
– once the period has been reached.
When multiple reset requests are selected (from HRTIM_SCIN and from internal events), only the first arriving request is taken into account.

Table 254. Effect of sync event versus timer operating modes (continued)

Operating modeSYNC
RSTx
SYNC
STRTx
Behavior following a SYNC reset or start event
Single-shot
retriggerable
01The counter start is effective only if the counter is not started or period is elapsed. Any synchronization event occurring after counter start has no effect.
A start occurring when the counter is stopped at the period value resets the counter. A reset request clears the counter but does not start it (the counter can solely be started by the synchronization). A reset occurring during counting is taken into account (as during regular retriggerable mode).
1XThe reset from HRTIM_SCIN is taken into account as any HRTIM's timer counter reset from internal events and is starting or re-starting the timer counting.
When multiple reset requests are selected, the first arriving request is taken into account.
Continuous mode01The timer is enabled (MCEN or TxCEN bit set) and is waiting for the synchronization event to start the counter. Any synchronization event occurring after the counter start has no effect (the counter can solely be started by the synchronization). A reset request clears the counter but does not start it.
1XThe reset from HRTIM_SCIN is taken into account as any HRTIM's timer counter reset from internal events and is starting or re-starting the timer counting. When multiple reset requests are selected, the first arriving request is taken into account.

When a synchronization reset event occurs within the same \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock cycle as the period event, this reset is postponed to a programmed period event (since both events are causing a counter roll-over). This applies only when the high-resolution is active (CKPSC[2:0] < 5).

Figure 277 presents how the synchronized start is done in single-shot mode.

Figure 277. Counter behavior in synchronized start mode

Figure 277: Counter behavior in synchronized start mode. The figure contains two timing diagrams. The top diagram shows the 'non-retriggerable' mode where the counter starts on the first rising edge of the SCIN signal after being initialized by software. Subsequent SCIN edges do not restart the counter. The bottom diagram shows the 'retriggerable' mode where the counter restarts on every rising edge of the SCIN signal. Both diagrams show the PER (Period) signal, the Counter value, the SCIN (Synchronized Counter INput) signal, and Internal reset requests. The counter is initialized by software at the start of each sequence.

SYNCSTRT, Single-shot mode, non-retriggerable

SYNCSTRT, Single-shot mode, retriggerable

MS32337V1

Figure 277: Counter behavior in synchronized start mode. The figure contains two timing diagrams. The top diagram shows the 'non-retriggerable' mode where the counter starts on the first rising edge of the SCIN signal after being initialized by software. Subsequent SCIN edges do not restart the counter. The bottom diagram shows the 'retriggerable' mode where the counter restarts on every rising edge of the SCIN signal. Both diagrams show the PER (Period) signal, the Counter value, the SCIN (Synchronized Counter INput) signal, and Internal reset requests. The counter is initialized by software at the start of each sequence.

28.3.20 ADC triggers

The ADCs can be triggered by the master and the 6 timing units.

10 independent triggers are available for both the regular and the injected sequencers of the ADCs. The external events can be used as triggers. They are taken right after the conditioning defined in the HRTIM_EECRx registers, and are not depending on the EEFxR1 and EEFxR2 register settings.

Up to 32 events can be combined (ORed) for ADC triggers 1 to 4, in HRTIM_ADC1R to HRTIM_ADC4R registers, as shown on Figure 278. The ADC triggers 1/3 and 2/4 are using the same source set. A multiple triggering is possible within a single switching period by selecting several sources simultaneously. A typical use case is for a non-overlapping multiphase converter, where all phases can be sampled in a row using a single ADC trigger output.

Figure 278. ADC trigger selection overview

Figure 278. ADC trigger selection overview diagram showing connections between HRTIM timers and ADC triggers 1 through 4. It includes source lists for each trigger and configuration registers like AD1USRC, AD3USRC, AD2USRC, and AD4USRC.

The diagram illustrates the ADC trigger selection for the HRTIM. It is divided into two main sections for ADC 1 and ADC 2.

Common source lines for all triggers include Master update, Timer A update, Timer B update, Timer C update, Timer D update, Timer E update, and Timer F update. A note indicates that sources in bold are available only on Trigger 1, 3 or trigger 2, 4.

Figure 278. ADC trigger selection overview diagram showing connections between HRTIM timers and ADC triggers 1 through 4. It includes source lists for each trigger and configuration registers like AD1USRC, AD3USRC, AD2USRC, and AD4USRC.

The ADC triggers 5 to 10 are configured in the HRTIM_ADCER register, as shown on Figure 279. The ADC triggers 5/7/9 and 6/8/10 are using the same source set.

A single source can be selected at once for these triggers (1 out of 32 possible events).

Figure 279. ADC triggers

Figure 279. ADC triggers. A diagram showing the connection of various HRTIM events to ADC triggers 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10. The diagram is split into two main sections. The left section shows triggers 5, 7, and 9, with sources including Master Cmp1,2,3,4 + PER, External Events 1..5, TimerA Cmp3,4 + PER + RST, TimerB Cmp3,4 + PER + RST, TimerC Cmp3,4 + PER, TimerD Cmp3,4 + PER, TimerE Cmp3,4 + PER, and TimerF Cmp2,3,4 + PER + RST. The right section shows triggers 6, 8, and 10, with sources including Master Cmp1,2,3,4 + PER, External Events 6..10, TimerA Cmp2,4 + PER, TimerB Cmp2,4 + PER, TimerC Cmp2,4 + PER + RST, TimerD Cmp2,4 + PER + RST, TimerE Cmp2,3,4 + RST, and TimerF Cmp2,3,4 + PER. Below these, a grid shows the mapping of update sources (Master update, Timer A update, Timer B update, Timer C update, Timer D update, Timer E update, Timer F update) to ADxUSRC blocks (AD5USRC, AD7USRC, AD9USRC on the left; AD6USRC, AD8USRC, AD10USRC on the right). A note at the bottom states: 'Sources in bold are available only on Trigger 5,7,9 or trigger 6,8,10'. The diagram is labeled MSv48357V2.

Sources in bold are available only on Trigger 5,7,9 or trigger 6,8,10

MSv48357V2

Figure 279. ADC triggers. A diagram showing the connection of various HRTIM events to ADC triggers 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10. The diagram is split into two main sections. The left section shows triggers 5, 7, and 9, with sources including Master Cmp1,2,3,4 + PER, External Events 1..5, TimerA Cmp3,4 + PER + RST, TimerB Cmp3,4 + PER + RST, TimerC Cmp3,4 + PER, TimerD Cmp3,4 + PER, TimerE Cmp3,4 + PER, and TimerF Cmp2,3,4 + PER + RST. The right section shows triggers 6, 8, and 10, with sources including Master Cmp1,2,3,4 + PER, External Events 6..10, TimerA Cmp2,4 + PER, TimerB Cmp2,4 + PER, TimerC Cmp2,4 + PER + RST, TimerD Cmp2,4 + PER + RST, TimerE Cmp2,3,4 + RST, and TimerF Cmp2,3,4 + PER. Below these, a grid shows the mapping of update sources (Master update, Timer A update, Timer B update, Timer C update, Timer D update, Timer E update, Timer F update) to ADxUSRC blocks (AD5USRC, AD7USRC, AD9USRC on the left; AD6USRC, AD8USRC, AD10USRC on the right). A note at the bottom states: 'Sources in bold are available only on Trigger 5,7,9 or trigger 6,8,10'. The diagram is labeled MSv48357V2.

HRTIM_ADC1R to HRTIM_ADC4R and HRTIM_ADCER registers are preloaded and can be updated synchronously with the timer they are related to. The update sources are defined with ADxUSRC[2:0] bits in the HRTIM_CR1 and HRTIM_ADCUR registers.

For instance, if ADC trigger 1 outputs timer A CMP2 events (HRTIM_ADC1R = 0x0000 0400), HRTIM_ADC1R is typically updated simultaneously with timer A (AD1USRC[2:0] = 001).

When the preload is disabled (PREEN bit reset) in the source timer, the HRTIM_ADCxR registers are not preloaded either: a write access results in an immediate update of the trigger source.

ADC post-scaler

A post-scaling unit allows to reduce the ADC trigger rate with respect to the switching frequency.

Each ADC trigger rate can be individually adjusted using the ADCxPSC[4:0] bits in the HRTIM_ADCxPS1 and HRTIM_ADCxPS2 registers as shown in Figure 280 below for the up-counting mode.

In the center-aligned mode, the ADC post-scaling is done on events selected with the ADROM[1:0] bitfield, programmed in the source timer, as shown in Figure 281. The

ADROM[1:0] bitfield is coding for any event that can trigger the ADC: reset, roll-over (period) and compare event:

The ADC post-scaler programming register are preloaded and can be updated on-the-fly without stopping the timers.

Figure 280. ADC trigger post-scaling in up-counting mode

Timing diagram for Figure 280 showing ADC trigger post-scaling in up-counting mode.

This diagram shows a sawtooth counter waveform at the top. Below it are five rows of trigger pulses corresponding to different post-scaler settings:

MSv47427V1

Timing diagram for Figure 280 showing ADC trigger post-scaling in up-counting mode.

Figure 281. ADC trigger post-scaling in up/down counting mode

Timing diagram for Figure 281 showing ADC trigger post-scaling in up/down counting mode.

This diagram shows a triangular counter waveform (up/down counting). Below it are six rows of trigger pulses based on post-scaler (ADCxPSC) and direction selection (ADROM):

MSv47428V2

Timing diagram for Figure 281 showing ADC trigger post-scaling in up/down counting mode.

28.3.21 DAC triggers

The HRTIM allows to have the embedded DACs updated synchronously with the timer updates.

The update events from the master timer and the timer units can generate DAC update triggers on any of the 3 hrtim_dac_trgx outputs.

Note: Each timer has its own DAC-related control register.

DACSYNC[1:0] bits of the HRTIM_MCR and HRTIM_TIMxCR registers are programmed as follows:

An output pulse of 1 \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock periods is generated on the hrtim_dac_trgx output.

When DACSYNC[1:0] bits are enabled in multiple timers, the hrtim_dac_trgx output consists of an OR of all timers' update events. For instance, if DACSYNC = 1 in timer A and in timer B, the update event in timer A is ORed with the update event in timer B to generate a DAC update trigger on the corresponding hrtim_dac_trgx output, as shown on Figure 282.

Figure 282. Combining several updates on a single hrtim_dac_trgx output

Timing diagram showing the combination of Timer A and Timer B update events to generate a single DAC TrigOutx pulse. The diagram includes waveforms for Timer A counter, Timer B counter, Timer A Compare 2 register, Timer B Compare 4 register, and DAC TrigOutx. Timer A counter and Timer B counter show sawtooth waveforms. Timer A Compare 2 register shows values 0x0000 1000, 0x0000 1001, and 0x0000 1002. Timer B Compare 4 register shows values 0x0000 1500, 0x0000 1510, and 0x0000 1520. The DAC TrigOutx output shows pulses generated by the OR of TA update and TB update events.

The diagram illustrates the timing relationship between two timers, Timer A and Timer B, and their associated DAC trigger output. The top two waveforms represent the counters for Timer A and Timer B, both showing a sawtooth pattern. Below these, the 'Timer A Compare 2 register' shows a sequence of values: 0x0000 1000, 0x0000 1001, and 0x0000 1002. The 'Timer B Compare 4 register' shows a sequence of values: 0x0000 1500, 0x0000 1510, and 0x0000 1520. Vertical dashed lines indicate update events for both timers. The 'DAC TrigOutx' output at the bottom shows a series of pulses. Each pulse is generated when either a 'TA update' (from Timer A) or a 'TB update' (from Timer B) occurs, demonstrating that the output is the logical OR of both timer update events. The diagram is labeled with 'MS32339V1' in the bottom right corner.

Timing diagram showing the combination of Timer A and Timer B update events to generate a single DAC TrigOutx pulse. The diagram includes waveforms for Timer A counter, Timer B counter, Timer A Compare 2 register, Timer B Compare 4 register, and DAC TrigOutx. Timer A counter and Timer B counter show sawtooth waveforms. Timer A Compare 2 register shows values 0x0000 1000, 0x0000 1001, and 0x0000 1002. Timer B Compare 4 register shows values 0x0000 1500, 0x0000 1510, and 0x0000 1520. The DAC TrigOutx output shows pulses generated by the OR of TA update and TB update events.

Refer to Table 229: HRTIM DAC triggers connections for connections to the DACs.

Dual channel DAC trigger

Slope compensation techniques and hysteretic control to be easily implemented using HRTIM built-in features and the DAC sawtooth generator. The principle is to have a DAC generating a decreasing saw-tooth synchronized with the PWM period, or a square wave synchronized with PWM signal.

This mode is enabled with the DCDE bit in the TIMxCR2 register. This bit cannot be changed once the timer is operating (TxEN bit set).

It uses two trigger outputs, as shown on the Figure 283 below:

The DCDR bit in the TIMxCR2 register defines when the hrtim_dac_reset_trgx trigger is generated:

Note: The DCDR bit is not significant when the DCDE bit is reset (Dual channel DAC trigger disabled).

The DCDS bit in the TIMxCR2 register defines when the hrtim_dac_step_trgx trigger is generated:

The DCDR and DCDS bits allows the following use cases to be covered:

The compare 2 has a particular operating mode when the DCDE is set and the DCDS bit is reset. The active comparison value is automatically updated as soon as a compare match has occurred, so that the trigger can be repeated periodically with a period equal to the CMP2 value, as represented on Figure 283 .

The dual channel DAC trigger with DCDS bit reset (compare 2 event used) must not be used simultaneously with modes using CMP2 (triple / quad interleaved and triggered-half modes).

Note: The CMP2 value can be changed on-the-fly. The new value is taken into account on the next coming compare match.

Note: When the DCDS bit is reset, the CMP2 value must not be modified by other mechanisms: the interleaved, triggered half and balanced idle modes must be disabled.

Table 255 below gives an example, for generating 6 triggers within a PWM period. It shows that it is necessary to round up the division result to the upper value.

Let's consider a counter period TIMxPER = 8192. Dividing 8192 by 6 yields 1365.33.

Table 255. DAC dual channel trigger example

-CMP2 = 1365dac_trgdac_step_trgCMP2 = 1366dac_trgdac_step_trg
Counter value1365-11366-1
2730-22732-2
4095-34098-3
5460-45464-4
6825-56830-5
8190-681926-
81927-1366-1
1365-12732-2
...--...--

Note: In centered-pattern mode, it is mandatory to have an even number of triggers per switching period, so as to avoid unevenly spaced triggers around counter's peak value.

Figure 283. DAC triggers for slope compensation

Timing diagrams for DAC triggers in HRTIM. The top diagram shows triggers based on roll-over and Compare 2 (DCDR=0, DCDT=0). The bottom diagram shows triggers based on Output 1 set and Output 1 reset (DCDR=1, DCDT=1). Both diagrams show waveforms for CMP1, CMP2, Output 1, hrtim_dac_reset_trigx, hrtim_dac_step_trigx, and DAC output.

The figure consists of two timing diagrams illustrating the relationship between HRTIM signals and a DAC output for slope compensation.

Top Diagram: This diagram shows the timing when DCDR = 0 (reset on roll-over) and DCDT = 0 (step trigger on Compare 2). The waveforms are:

Bottom Diagram: This diagram shows the timing when DCDR = 1 (reset on output 1 set) and DCDT = 1 (step trigger on output 1 reset). The waveforms are:

Timing diagrams for DAC triggers in HRTIM. The top diagram shows triggers based on roll-over and Compare 2 (DCDR=0, DCDT=0). The bottom diagram shows triggers based on Output 1 set and Output 1 reset (DCDR=1, DCDT=1). Both diagrams show waveforms for CMP1, CMP2, Output 1, hrtim_dac_reset_trigx, hrtim_dac_step_trigx, and DAC output.

MSV47433V1

The Figure 284 below provides an overview of all the available DAC triggers.

Figure 284. DAC triggers overview

Figure 284. DAC triggers overview diagram showing the hierarchy of triggers for DACx from Master, TimA, TimB, TimC, TimD, TimE, and TimF timers.

The diagram illustrates the DAC trigger hierarchy. At the top, seven timer blocks are shown: Master, TimA, TimB, TimC, TimD, TimE, and TimF. Each timer has associated trigger signals:

Below each timer's trigger section is a multiplexer (MUX) labeled with its respective DACSYNC [1:0] input. The outputs of these MUXes are grouped into three 3-input OR gates at the bottom, labeled dac_trig_out1 , dac_trig_out2 , and dac_trig_out3 . Each output line connects to a DACx Trigger block.The diagram is labeled with the reference MSv47434V1 in the bottom right corner.

Figure 284. DAC triggers overview diagram showing the hierarchy of triggers for DACx from Master, TimA, TimB, TimC, TimD, TimE, and TimF timers.

28.3.22 Interrupts

7 interrupts can be generated by the master timer:

14 interrupts can be generated by each timing unit:

8 global interrupts are generated for the whole HRTIM:

The interrupt requests are grouped in 8 vectors as follows:

Table 256 is a summary of the interrupt requests, their mapping and associated control, and status bits.

Table 256. HRTIM interrupt summary

Interrupt vectorInterrupt eventEvent flagEnable control bitFlag clearing bit
hrtim_it1Burst mode period completedBMPERBMPERIEBMPERC
DLL calibration doneDLLRDYDLLRDYIEDLLRDYC
Master timer registers updateMUPDMUPDIEMUPDC
Synchronization event receivedSYNCSYNCIESYNCC
Master timer repetition eventMREPMREPIEMREPC
Master compare 1 to 4 eventMCMP1MCMP1IEMCP1C
MCMP2MCMP2IEMCP2C
MCMP3MCMP3IEMCP3C
MCMP4MCMP4IEMCP4C

Table 256. HRTIM interrupt summary (continued)

Interrupt vectorInterrupt eventEvent flagEnable control bitFlag clearing bit
hrtim_it2
hrtim_it3
hrtim_it4
hrtim_it5
hrtim_it6
hrtim_it7
Delayed protection triggeredDLYPRTDLYPRTIEDLYPRTC
Counter reset or roll-over eventRSTRSTIERSTC
Output 1 and output 2 reset (transition active to inactive)RSTx1RSTx1IERSTx1C
RSTx2RSTx2IERSTx2C
Output 1 and output 2 set (transition inactive to active)SETx1SETx1IESETx1C
SETx2SETx2IESETx2C
Capture 1 and 2 eventsCPT1CPT1IECPT1C
CPT2CPT2IECPT2C
Timing unit registers updateUPDUPDIEUPDC
Repetition eventREPREPIEREPC
hrtim_it8Compare 1 to 4 eventCMP1CMP1IECMP1C
CMP2CMP2IECMP2C
CMP3CMP3IECMP3C
CMP4CMP4IECMP4C
System faultSYSFLTSYSFLTIESYSFLTC
Fault 1 to 6FLT1FLT1IEFLT1C
FLT2FLT2IEFLT2C
FLT3FLT3IEFLT3C
FLT4FLT4IEFLT4C
FLT5FLT5IEFLT5C
FLT6FLT6IEFLT6C

28.3.23 DMA

Most of the events able to generate an interrupt can also generate a DMA request, even both simultaneously. Each timer (master, TIMA...F) has its own DMA enable register.

The individual DMA requests are ORed into 7 channels as follows:

Note: Before disabling a DMA channel (DMA enable bit reset in TIMxDIER), it is necessary to disable first the DMA controller.

Table 257 is a summary of the events with their associated DMA enable bits.

Table 257. HRTIM DMA request summary

DMA ChannelEventDMA capableDMA enable bit
hrtim_dma1
(master timer)
Burst mode period completedNoN/A
DLL calibration doneNoN/A
Master timer registers updateYesMUPDDE
Synchronization event receivedYesSYNCDE
Master timer repetition eventYesMREPDE
Master compare 1 to 4 eventYesMCMP1DE
YesMCMP2DE
YesMCMP3DE
YesMCMP4DE
hrtim_dma2 (timer A)
hrtim_dma3 (timer B)
hrtim_dma4 (timer C)
hrtim_dma5 (timer D)
hrtim_dma6 (timer E)
hrtim_dma7 (timer F)
Delayed protection triggeredYesDLYPRTDE
Counter reset or roll-over eventYesRSTDE
Output 1 and output 2 reset (transition active to inactive)YesRSTx1DE
YesRSTx2DE
Output 1 and output 2 set (transition inactive to active)YesSETx1DE
YesSETx2DE
Capture 1 and 2 eventsYesCPT1DE
YesCPT2DE
Timing unit registers updateYesUPDDE
Repetition eventYesREPDE
Compare 1 to 4 eventYesCMP1DE
YesCMP2DE
YesCMP3DE
YesCMP4DE
N/ASystem faultNoN/A
Fault 1 to 6NoN/A
Burst mode period completedNoN/A
DLL calibration doneNoN/A

Burst DMA transfers

In addition to the standard DMA requests, the HRTIM features a DMA burst controller to have multiple registers updated with a single DMA request. This allows to:

The burst DMA feature is only available for one DMA channel, but any of the 6 channels can be selected for burst DMA transfers.

The principle is to program which registers are to be written by DMA. The master timer and TIMA..E have the burst DMA update register, where most of their control and data registers are associated with a selection bit: HRTIM_BDMUPR, HRTIM_BDTAUPR to HRTIM_BDTEUPR (this is applicable only for registers with write accesses). A redirection mechanism allows to forward the DMA write accesses to the HRTIM registers automatically, as shown on Figure 285.

Figure 285. DMA burst overview

Figure 285. DMA burst overview diagram showing the interaction between the DMA controller, DMA burst controller, HRTIM update registers, and the HRTIM_BDMADR register.

The diagram illustrates the DMA burst overview. On the left, a 'DMA controller' block is connected to a 'DMA burst controller' block via 'DMA requests'. The 'DMA burst controller' block is connected to a 'Registers parsing' block, which in turn is connected to a group of 'DMA burst update registers (6 registers)'. These registers are HRTIM_BDTUPR, HRTIM_BDTBUPR, and HRTIM_BDTAUPR. The 'Registers parsing' block is also connected to a 'Re-direction demultiplexer' block. The 'Re-direction demultiplexer' block is connected to a group of HRTIM registers: HRTIM_PERBR, HRTIM_REPBR, HRTIM_CMP1BR, HRTIM_CMP1BCR, HRTIM_CMP2BR, HRTIM_CMP3BR, and HRTIM_CMP4BR. The 'DMA burst controller' block is also connected to the HRTIM_BDMADR register, which is labeled 'DMA unique destination'. The HRTIM_BDMADR register is connected to the 'Re-direction demultiplexer' block. The diagram is labeled MS32340V1.

Figure 285. DMA burst overview diagram showing the interaction between the DMA controller, DMA burst controller, HRTIM update registers, and the HRTIM_BDMADR register.

When the DMA trigger occurs, the HRTIM generates multiple 32-bit DMA requests and parses the update register. If the control bit is set, the write access is redirected to the associated register. If the bit is reset, the register update is skipped and the register parsing is resumed until a new bit set is detected, to trigger a new request. Once the 6 update registers (HRTIM_BDMUPR, 5x HRTIM_BDTxUPR) are parsed, the burst is completed and the system is ready for another DMA trigger (see the flowchart on Figure 286).

Note: Any trigger occurring while the burst is on-going is discarded, except if it occurs during the very last data transfer.

The burst DMA mode is permanently enabled (there is no enable bit). A burst DMA operation is started by the first write access into the HRTIM_BDMADR register.

It is only necessary to have the DMA controller pointing to the HRTIM_BDMADR register as the destination, in the memory, to the peripheral configuration with the peripheral increment mode disabled (the HRTIM handles internally the data re-routing to the final destination register).

To re-initialize the burst DMA mode if it was interrupted during a transaction, it is necessary to write at least to one of the 6 update registers.

Figure 286. Burst DMA operation flowchart

Figure 286. Burst DMA operation flowchart. The flowchart shows the sequence of operations for a burst DMA transfer. It starts with 'Write access to HRTIM_BDMADR', followed by 'Parse HRTIM_BDMUPR'. A loop checks for MCR, MCIR, and MCMP4 bits; if set, data is written to HRTIM_MCR, HRTIM_MICR, and HRTIM_MCOMP4 respectively. Next is 'Parse HRTIM_BDTAUPR', with a loop for TIMACR, TIMAICR, and TIMAFLTR bits, writing data to HRTIM_TIMACR, HRTIM_TIMAICR, and HRTIM_FLTAR. A dashed line separates this from the third section: 'Parse HRTIM_BDTFUPR', with a loop for TIMFCR, TIMFICR, and TIMFFLTR bits, writing data to HRTIM_TIMFCR, HRTIM_TIMFICR, and HRTIM_FLTFR. The process ends with 'End of DMA burst'. MS32341V2 is noted at the bottom right.
graph TD
    Start([Write access to HRTIM_BDMADR]) --> Parse1[Parse HRTIM_BDMUPR]
    Parse1 --> MCR{MCR bit set?}
    MCR -- Yes --> WriteMCR[Write data into HRTIM_MCR]
    WriteMCR --> MCIR{MCIR bit set?}
    MCIR -- Yes --> WriteMICR[Write data into HRTIM_MICR]
    WriteMICR --> MCMP4{MCMP4 bit set?}
    MCMP4 -- Yes --> WriteMCOMP4[Write data into HRTIM_MCOMP4]
    WriteMCOMP4 --> Parse2[Parse HRTIM_BDTAUPR]
    Parse2 --> TIMACR{TIMACR bit set?}
    TIMACR -- Yes --> WriteTIMACR[Write data into HRTIM_TIMACR]
    WriteTIMACR --> TIMAICR{TIMAICR bit set?}
    TIMAICR -- Yes --> WriteTIMAICR[Write data into HRTIM_TIMAICR]
    WriteTIMAICR --> TIMAFLTR{TIMAFLTR bit set?}
    TIMAFLTR -- Yes --> WriteFLTAR[Write data into HRTIM_FLTAR]
    WriteFLTAR --> Parse3[Parse HRTIM_BDTFUPR]
    Parse3 --> TIMFCR{TIMFCR bit set?}
    TIMFCR -- Yes --> WriteTIMFCR[Write data into HRTIM_TIMFCR]
    WriteTIMFCR --> TIMFICR{TIMFICR bit set?}
    TIMFICR -- Yes --> WriteTIMFICR[Write data into HRTIM_TIMFICR]
    WriteTIMFICR --> TIMFFLTR{TIMFFLTR bit set?}
    TIMFFLTR -- Yes --> WriteFLTFR[Write data into HRTIM_FLTFR]
    WriteFLTFR --> End([End of DMA burst])
  

MS32341V2

Figure 286. Burst DMA operation flowchart. The flowchart shows the sequence of operations for a burst DMA transfer. It starts with 'Write access to HRTIM_BDMADR', followed by 'Parse HRTIM_BDMUPR'. A loop checks for MCR, MCIR, and MCMP4 bits; if set, data is written to HRTIM_MCR, HRTIM_MICR, and HRTIM_MCOMP4 respectively. Next is 'Parse HRTIM_BDTAUPR', with a loop for TIMACR, TIMAICR, and TIMAFLTR bits, writing data to HRTIM_TIMACR, HRTIM_TIMAICR, and HRTIM_FLTAR. A dashed line separates this from the third section: 'Parse HRTIM_BDTFUPR', with a loop for TIMFCR, TIMFICR, and TIMFFLTR bits, writing data to HRTIM_TIMFCR, HRTIM_TIMFICR, and HRTIM_FLTFR. The process ends with 'End of DMA burst'. MS32341V2 is noted at the bottom right.

Several options are available once the DMA burst is completed, depending on the register update strategy.

If the PREEN bit is reset (preload disabled), the value written by the DMA is immediately transferred into the active register and the registers are updated sequentially, following the DMA transaction pace.

When the preload is enabled (PREEN bit set), there are 3 use cases:

  1. 1. The update is done independently from DMA burst transfers (UPDGAT[3:0] = 0000 in HRTIM_TIMxCR and BRSTDMA[1:0] = 00 in HRTIM_MCR). In this case, and if it is necessary to have all transferred data taken into account simultaneously, the user must check that the DMA burst is completed before the update event takes place. On the contrary, if the update event happens while the DMA transfer is on-going, only part of the registers is loaded and the complete register update requires 2 consecutive update events.
  2. 2. The update is done when the DMA burst transfer is completed (UPDGAT[3:0] = 0000 in HRTIM_TIMxCR and BRSTDMA[1:0] = 01 in HRTIM_MCR). This mode guarantees that all new register values are transferred simultaneously. This is done independently from the counter value and can be combined with regular update events, if necessary (for instance, an update on a counter reset when TxRSTU is set).
  3. 3. The update is done on the update event following the DMA burst transfer completion (UPDGAT[3:0] = 0010 in HRTIM_TIMxCR and BRSTDMA[1:0] = 10 in HRTIM_MCR). This mode guarantees both a coherent update of all transferred data and the synchronization with regular update events, with the timer counter. In this case, if a regular update request occurs while the transfer is on-going, it is discarded and the effective update happens on the next coming update request.

The chronogram on Figure 287 presents the active register content for 3 cases: PREEN=0, UPDGAT[3:0] = 0001 and UPDGAT[3:0] = 0001 (when PREEN = 1).

Figure 287. Registers update following DMA burst transfer

Figure 287: Registers update following DMA burst transfer. This timing diagram illustrates the sequence of events during a DMA burst transfer to update HRTIM registers. It shows the Timer A Counter, DMA requests, DMA controller write accesses to BDMADR, and the resulting register content updates for two cases: PREEN=0 and PREEN=1. The diagram highlights the update of PER, CMP1, and CMP3 registers, showing 'previous' and 'new' values. Option 1 shows an update at the end of the DMA burst (UPDGAT[3:0] = 0001). Option 2 shows an update at the end of the DMA burst (UPDGAT[3:0] = 0010 and TxREPU = 1).

The diagram shows the following signal levels and events over time:

MS32342V1

Figure 287: Registers update following DMA burst transfer. This timing diagram illustrates the sequence of events during a DMA burst transfer to update HRTIM registers. It shows the Timer A Counter, DMA requests, DMA controller write accesses to BDMADR, and the resulting register content updates for two cases: PREEN=0 and PREEN=1. The diagram highlights the update of PER, CMP1, and CMP3 registers, showing 'previous' and 'new' values. Option 1 shows an update at the end of the DMA burst (UPDGAT[3:0] = 0001). Option 2 shows an update at the end of the DMA burst (UPDGAT[3:0] = 0010 and TxREPU = 1).

28.3.24 HRTIM initialization

This section describes the recommended HRTIM initialization procedure, including other related MCU peripherals.

The HRTIM clock source must be enabled in the reset and clock control unit (RCC), while respecting the \( f_{HRTIM} \) range for the DLL lock.

The DLL calibration must be started by setting CAL bit in HRTIM_DLLCR register.

The HRTIM master and timing units can be started only once the high-resolution unit is ready. This is indicated by the DLLRDY flag set. The DLLRDY flag can be polled before resuming the initialization or the calibration can run in background while other registers of the HRTIM or other MCU peripherals are initialized. In this case, the DLLRDY flag must be checked before starting the counters (an end-of-calibration interrupt can be issued if necessary, enabled with DLLRDYIE flag in HRTIM_IER). Once the DLL calibration is done, CALEN bit must be set to have it done periodically and compensate for potential voltage and temperature drifts. The calibration periodicity is defined using the CALRTE[1:0] bitfield in the HRTIM_DLLCR register.

The HRTIM control registers can be initialized as per the power converter topology and the timing units use case. All inputs have to be configured (source, polarity, edge-sensitivity).

The HRTIM outputs must be set up eventually, with the following sequence:

The HRTIM outputs are ready to be connected to the MCU I/Os. In the GPIO controller, the selected HRTIM I/Os have to be configured as per the alternate function mapping table in the product datasheet.

From this point on, the HRTIM controls the outputs, which are in the IDLE state.

The outputs are configured in RUN mode by setting TxyOEN bits in the HRTIM_OENR register. The 2 outputs are in the inactive state until the first valid set/reset event in RUN mode. Any output set/reset event (except software requests using SST, SRT) are ignored as long as TxCEN bit is reset, as well as burst mode requests (IDLEM bit value is ignored). Similarly, any counter reset request coming from the burst mode controller is ignored (if TxBM bit is set).

Note: When the deadtime insertion is enabled (DTEN bit set), it is necessary to force the output state by software, using SST and RST bits, to have the outputs in a complementary state as soon as the RUN mode is entered.

The HRTIM operation can eventually be started by setting TxCEN or MCEN bits in HRTIM_MCR.

If the HRTIM peripheral is reset with the Reset and Clock Controller, the output control is released to the GPIO controller and the outputs are tri stated.

28.3.25 Debug

When a microcontroller enters the debug mode (Cortex ® -M4 with FPU core halted), the TIMx counter either continues to work normally or stops, depending on DBG_HRTIM_STOP configuration bit in DBG module:

Timer behavior during MCU halt when DBG_HRTIM_STOP = 1

The set/reset crossbar, the dead-time and push-pull unit, the idle/balanced fault detection and all the logic driving the normal output in RUN mode are not affected by debug. The output keeps on toggling internally, so as to retrieve regular signals of the outputs when TxyOEN is set again (during or after the MCU halt). Associated triggers and filters are also following internal waveforms when the outputs are disabled.

FAULT inputs and events (any source) are enabled during the MCU halt.

Fault status bits can be set and TxyOEN bits reset during the MCU halt if a fault occurs at that time (TxyOEN and TxyODS are not affected by DBG_HRTIM_STOP bit state).

Synchronization, counter reset, start and reset-start events are discarded in debug mode, as well as capture events. This is to keep all related registers stable as long as the MCU is halted.

The counter stops counting when a breakpoint is reached. However, the counter enable signal is not reset; consequently no start event is emitted when exiting from debug. All counter reset and capture triggers are disabled, as well as external events (ignored as long as the MCU is halted). The outputs SET and RST flags are frozen, except in case of forced software set/reset. A level-sensitive event is masked during the debug but is active again as soon as the debug is exited. For edge-sensitive events, if the signal is maintained active during the MCU halt, a new edge is not generated when exiting from debug.

The update events are discarded. This prevents any update trigger on hrtim_upd_en[3:1] inputs. DMA triggers are disabled. The burst mode circuit is frozen: the triggers are ignored and the burst mode counter stopped.

DLL calibration is not blocked while the MCU is halted (the DLLRDY flag can be set).

28.4 Application use cases

28.4.1 Buck converter

Buck converters are of common use as step-down converters. The HRTIM can control up to 12 buck converters with 7 independent switching frequencies.

The converter usually operates at a fixed frequency and the \( V_{in}/V_{out} \) ratio depends on the duty cycle \( D \) applied to the power switch:

\[ V_{out} = D \times V_{in} \]

The topology is given on Figure 288 with the connection to the ADC for voltage reading.

Circuit diagram of a buck converter topology. It shows an input voltage VIN connected to a switching node. This node is connected to a power switch (MOSFET) controlled by HRTIM_CHA1, a freewheeling diode, and an inductor. The inductor is connected to an output node VOUT, which is also connected to a capacitor and a resistive load. A tap from the load is connected to an ADC. The diagram is labeled MS32343V3 in the bottom right corner.

Figure 288. Buck converter topology

Circuit diagram of a buck converter topology. It shows an input voltage VIN connected to a switching node. This node is connected to a power switch (MOSFET) controlled by HRTIM_CHA1, a freewheeling diode, and an inductor. The inductor is connected to an output node VOUT, which is also connected to a capacitor and a resistive load. A tap from the load is connected to an ADC. The diagram is labeled MS32343V3 in the bottom right corner.

Figure 289 presents the management of two converters with identical frequency PWM signals. The outputs are defined as follows:

The ADC is triggered twice per period, precisely in the middle of the ON time, using CMP2 and CMP4 events.

Figure 289. Dual Buck converter management

Timing diagram for Dual Buck converter management. The top section shows the TIMA counter with a sawtooth waveform. The bottom section shows the TIMA outputs HRTIM_CHA1 (BUCK 1) and HRTIM_CHA2 (BUCK 2) as square waves. The diagram illustrates the relationship between the counter, comparators (CMP1, CMP2, CMP3, CMP4), and ADC conversions. The HRTIM_CHA1 output is high when the counter is between CMP1 and CMP2, and low otherwise. The HRTIM_CHA2 output is high when the counter is between CMP3 and CMP4, and low otherwise. ADC conversions are triggered at the rising and falling edges of the HRTIM_CHA1 and HRTIM_CHA2 outputs.
Timing diagram for Dual Buck converter management. The top section shows the TIMA counter with a sawtooth waveform. The bottom section shows the TIMA outputs HRTIM_CHA1 (BUCK 1) and HRTIM_CHA2 (BUCK 2) as square waves. The diagram illustrates the relationship between the counter, comparators (CMP1, CMP2, CMP3, CMP4), and ADC conversions. The HRTIM_CHA1 output is high when the counter is between CMP1 and CMP2, and low otherwise. The HRTIM_CHA2 output is high when the counter is between CMP3 and CMP4, and low otherwise. ADC conversions are triggered at the rising and falling edges of the HRTIM_CHA1 and HRTIM_CHA2 outputs.

Timers A..E provide either 12 buck converters coupled by pairs (both with identical switching frequencies) or 7 completely independent converters (each of them having a different switching frequency), using the master timer as the 7 th time base.

28.4.2 Buck converter with synchronous rectification

Synchronous rectification allows to minimize losses in buck converters, by means of a FET replacing the freewheeling diode. Synchronous rectification can be turned on or off on the fly depending on the output current level, as shown on Figure 290 .

Figure 290. Synchronous rectification depending on output current

Circuit diagram of a buck converter with synchronous rectification. It features an input voltage VIN, a high-side MOSFET controlled by HRTIM_CHA1, a low-side MOSFET controlled by HRTIM_CHA2, an inductor, a capacitor, and a load resistor. The output voltage is VOUT. An ADC is connected to the output current sense resistor. The diagram shows the synchronous rectification configuration where the low-side MOSFET replaces the freewheeling diode.
Circuit diagram of a buck converter with synchronous rectification. It features an input voltage VIN, a high-side MOSFET controlled by HRTIM_CHA1, a low-side MOSFET controlled by HRTIM_CHA2, an inductor, a capacitor, and a load resistor. The output voltage is VOUT. An ADC is connected to the output current sense resistor. The diagram shows the synchronous rectification configuration where the low-side MOSFET replaces the freewheeling diode.

The main difference versus a single-switch buck converter is the addition of a deadtime for an almost complementary waveform generation on HRTIM_CHA2, based on the reference waveform on HRTIM_CHA1 (see Figure 291 ).

Figure 291. Buck with synchronous rectification

Timing diagram for a buck converter with synchronous rectification. The top section shows the TIMA counter (PER) as a sawtooth wave, with ADC triggers at the start of each period. Below are two TIMA outputs, HRTIM_CHA1 and HRTIM_CHA2, which are PWM signals. The diagram is divided into two regions: 'Synchronous Rectification (SR) active' and 'SR disabled'. In the 'SR active' region, HRTIM_CHA1 is high during the switch-on time and HRTIM_CHA2 is high during the switch-off time. In the 'SR disabled' region, HRTIM_CHA2 is low during the switch-off time. The diagram is labeled MS32346V2.
Timing diagram for a buck converter with synchronous rectification. The top section shows the TIMA counter (PER) as a sawtooth wave, with ADC triggers at the start of each period. Below are two TIMA outputs, HRTIM_CHA1 and HRTIM_CHA2, which are PWM signals. The diagram is divided into two regions: 'Synchronous Rectification (SR) active' and 'SR disabled'. In the 'SR active' region, HRTIM_CHA1 is high during the switch-on time and HRTIM_CHA2 is high during the switch-off time. In the 'SR disabled' region, HRTIM_CHA2 is low during the switch-off time. The diagram is labeled MS32346V2.

28.4.3 Multiphase converters

Multiphase techniques can be applied to multiple power conversion topologies (buck, flyback). Their main benefits are:

The HRTIM manages multiple converters. The number of converters that can be controlled depends on the topologies and resources used (including the ADC triggers):

Figure 292 presents the topology of a 3-phase interleaved buck converter.

Figure 292. 3-phase interleaved buck converter

Circuit diagram of a 3-phase interleaved buck converter. It consists of three parallel buck converter phases. Each phase has a high-side MOSFET (labeled HRTIM_CHA1, HRTIM_CHB1, HRTIM_CHC1), a low-side MOSFET, an inductor, and a diode. The input voltage VIN is applied to the high-side MOSFETs. The output of each phase is connected to a common output capacitor, which produces the output voltage VOUT. The diagram is labeled MS32347V3.
Circuit diagram of a 3-phase interleaved buck converter. It consists of three parallel buck converter phases. Each phase has a high-side MOSFET (labeled HRTIM_CHA1, HRTIM_CHB1, HRTIM_CHC1), a low-side MOSFET, an inductor, and a diode. The input voltage VIN is applied to the high-side MOSFETs. The output of each phase is connected to a common output capacitor, which produces the output voltage VOUT. The diagram is labeled MS32347V3.

The master timer is responsible for the phase management: it defines the phase relationship between the converters by resetting the timers periodically. The phase-shift is \( 360^\circ \) divided by the number of phases, \( 120^\circ \) in the given example.

The duty cycle is then programmed into each of the timers. The outputs are defined as follows:

The ADC trigger can be generated on TxCMP2 compare event. Since all ADC trigger sources are phase-shifted because of the converter topology, it is possible to have all of them combined into a single ADC trigger to save ADC resources (for instance 1 ADC regular channel for the full multi-phase converter).

Figure 293. 3-phase interleaved buck converter control

Timing diagram for a 3-phase interleaved buck converter control. The diagram shows the relationship between a Master counter, three phase counters (TIMA, TIMB, TIMC), and three output signals (HRTIM_CHA1, HRTIM_CHB1, HRTIM_CHC1). The Master counter has two compare levels, CMP1 and CMP2. The phase counters (TIMA, TIMB, TIMC) each have a CMP1 compare level. The outputs HRTIM_CHA1, HRTIM_CHB1, and HRTIM_CHC1 are shown as square waves. The Master counter is reset by the CMP2 compare event. The phase counters are reset by the Master counter's CMP1 compare event. The outputs are set by the Master counter's CMP2 compare event and reset by their respective phase counter's CMP1 compare event. The phase shift between the outputs is 120 degrees.

The figure is a timing diagram illustrating the control of a 3-phase interleaved buck converter. It shows the following signals and their relationships:

The phase shift between the outputs is \( 120^\circ \) , as indicated by the arrows at the bottom of the diagram. The diagram is labeled MS32348V2.

Timing diagram for a 3-phase interleaved buck converter control. The diagram shows the relationship between a Master counter, three phase counters (TIMA, TIMB, TIMC), and three output signals (HRTIM_CHA1, HRTIM_CHB1, HRTIM_CHC1). The Master counter has two compare levels, CMP1 and CMP2. The phase counters (TIMA, TIMB, TIMC) each have a CMP1 compare level. The outputs HRTIM_CHA1, HRTIM_CHB1, and HRTIM_CHC1 are shown as square waves. The Master counter is reset by the CMP2 compare event. The phase counters are reset by the Master counter's CMP1 compare event. The outputs are set by the Master counter's CMP2 compare event and reset by their respective phase counter's CMP1 compare event. The phase shift between the outputs is 120 degrees.

28.4.4 Transition mode power factor correction

The basic operating principle is to build up current into an inductor during a fixed \( T_{on} \) time. This current then decays during the \( T_{off} \) time, and the period is re-started when it becomes null. This is detected using a Zero Crossing Detection circuitry (ZCD), as shown on Figure 294 . With a constant \( T_{on} \) time, the peak current value in the inductor is proportional to the rectified AC input voltage, which provides the power factor correction.

Figure 294. Transition mode PFC

Circuit diagram of a transition mode PFC converter. It shows an AC input VIN connected to a boost inductor. The inductor's current is monitored for zero-crossing detection (ZCD). The inductor is connected to a MOSFET switch. The MOSFET's gate is driven by HRTIM_CHA2 and an over-current (OC) feedback signal. The MOSFET's drain is connected to a diode, which is followed by an output capacitor and a load resistor. The output voltage VOUT is monitored by an ADC. The diagram is labeled MS32349V3 in the bottom right corner.
Circuit diagram of a transition mode PFC converter. It shows an AC input VIN connected to a boost inductor. The inductor's current is monitored for zero-crossing detection (ZCD). The inductor is connected to a MOSFET switch. The MOSFET's gate is driven by HRTIM_CHA2 and an over-current (OC) feedback signal. The MOSFET's drain is connected to a diode, which is followed by an output capacitor and a load resistor. The output voltage VOUT is monitored by an ADC. The diagram is labeled MS32349V3 in the bottom right corner.

This converter operates with a constant \( T_{on} \) time and a variable frequency due to the \( T_{off} \) time variation (depending on the input voltage). It must also include some features to operate when no zero-crossing is detected, or to limit the \( T_{on} \) time in case of over-current (OC). The OC feedback is usually conditioned with the built-in comparator and routed onto an external event input.

Figure 295 presents the waveform during the various operating modes, with the following defined parameters:

Both \( T_{off} \) values are auto-delayed since the value must be relative to the output falling edge.

Figure 295. Transition mode PFC waveforms

Timing diagram showing waveforms for CMP4, CMP1, Zero Current Detection (ZCD), ZCD blanking, OverCurrent (OC), OC blanking, and HRTIM_CHA1 across different operation modes: Normal operation, Over Current, Toff Min, and Toff Max. Capture events are marked with 'C'.

The figure displays seven timing waveforms over time, categorized into five operational periods: Normal operation, Over Current, Toff Min, Toff Max, and Normal operation. The waveforms are:

Operation periods and their characteristics:

A legend at the bottom left shows a 'C' with a curved arrow pointing to a rising edge, labeled 'Capture event'.

Timing diagram showing waveforms for CMP4, CMP1, Zero Current Detection (ZCD), ZCD blanking, OverCurrent (OC), OC blanking, and HRTIM_CHA1 across different operation modes: Normal operation, Over Current, Toff Min, and Toff Max. Capture events are marked with 'C'.

MS32350V2

28.5 HRTIM registers

28.5.1 HRTIM master timer control register (HRTIM_MCR)

Address offset: 0x000

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
BRSTDMA[1:0]MREPURes.PREENDACSYNC[1:0]Res.Res.TFCENTECENTDCENTCCENTBCENTACENMCEN
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
SYNCSRC[1:0]SYNCOUT[1:0]SYNCS
TRTM
SYNCR
STM
SYNCIN[1:0]INTLVD[1:0]HALFRE
TRIG
CONTCKPSC[2:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:30 BRSTDMA[1:0]: Burst DMA update

These bits define how the update occurs relatively to a burst DMA transaction.

Bit 29 MREPU: Master timer repetition update

This bit defines whether an update occurs when the master timer repetition period is completed (either due to roll-over or reset events). MREPU can be set only if BRSTDMA[1:0] = 00 or 01.

Bit 28 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 27 PREEN: Preload enable

This bit enables the registers preload mechanism and defines whether the write accesses to the memory mapped registers are done into HRTIM’s active or preload registers.

Bits 26:25 DACSYNC[1:0]: DAC synchronization

A DAC synchronization event can be enabled and generated when the master timer update occurs.

These bits are defining on which output the DAC synchronization is sent (refer to Section 28.3.21: DAC triggers for connections details).

Bits 24:23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 22 TFCEN: Timer F counter enable

This bit starts the timer F counter.

Note: This bit must not be changed within a minimum of 8 cycles of f HRTIM clock.

Bit 21 TECEN : Timer E counter enable

This bit starts the timer E counter.

0: Timer E counter disabled

1: Timer E counter enabled

Note: This bit must not be changed within a minimum of 8 cycles of \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock.

Bit 20 TDCEN : Timer D counter enable

This bit starts the timer D counter.

0: Timer D counter disabled

1: Timer D counter enabled

Note: This bit must not be changed within a minimum of 8 cycles of \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock.

Bit 19 TCCEN : Timer C counter enable

This bit starts the timer C counter.

0: Timer C counter disabled

1: Timer C counter enabled

Note: This bit must not be changed within a minimum of 8 cycles of \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock.

Bit 18 TBCEN : Timer B counter enable

This bit starts the timer B counter.

0: Timer B counter disabled

1: Timer B counter enabled

Note: This bit must not be changed within a minimum of 8 cycles of \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock.

Bit 17 TACEN : Timer A counter enable

This bit starts the timer A counter.

0: Timer A counter disabled

1: Timer A counter enabled

Note: This bit must not be changed within a minimum of 8 cycles of \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock.

Bit 16 MCEN : Master timer counter enable

This bit starts the master timer counter.

0: Master counter disabled

1: Master counter enabled

Note: This bit must not be changed within a minimum of 8 cycles of \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock.

Bits 15:14 SYNCSRC[1:0] : Synchronization source

These bits define the source and event to be sent on the synchronization outputs SYNCOUT[2:1]

00: Master timer start

01: Master timer compare 1 event

10: Timer A start/reset

11: Timer A compare 1 event

Bits 13:12 SYNCOUT[1:0] : Synchronization output

These bits define the routing and conditioning of the synchronization output event.

00: Disabled

01: Reserved

10: Positive pulse on HRTIM_SCOUT output (16x \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock cycles)

11: Negative pulse on HRTIM_SCOUT output (16x \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock cycles)

Note: This bitfield must not be modified once the counter is enabled (TxCEN bit set)

Bit 11 SYNCSTRM : Synchronization starts master

This bit enables the master timer start when receiving a synchronization input event:

0: No effect on the master timer

1: A synchronization input event starts the master timer

Bit 10 SYNCRSTM: Synchronization resets master

This bit enables the master timer reset when receiving a synchronization input event:
0: No effect on the master timer
1: A synchronization input event resets the master timer

Bits 9:8 SYNCIN[1:0]: Synchronization input

These bits are defining the synchronization input source.
00: Disabled. HRTIM is not synchronized and runs in standalone mode.
01: Reserved
10: Internal event on hrtim_in_sync[2]: the HRTIM is synchronized with the on-chip timer (see Section : Synchronization input ).
11: External event on hrtim_in_sync[3]: a positive pulse on HRTIM_SCIN input triggers the HRTIM.
Note: This parameter cannot be changed once the impacted timers are enabled.

Bits 7:6 INTLVD[1:0]: Interleaved mode

This bitfield is significant only when the HALF bit is reset. It enables the interleaved mode.
00: Interleaved mode disabled
01: Triple interleaved mode: when HRTIM_MPER register is written, the HRTIM_MCMP1R active register is automatically updated with HRTIM_MPER/3 value, and the HRTIM_MCMP2R active register is automatically updated with 2x (HRTIM_MPER/3) value.
10: Quad interleaved mode: when HRTIM_MPER register is written, the HRTIM_MCMP1R active register is automatically updated with HRTIM_MPER/4 value, the HRTIM_MCMP2R active register is automatically updated with HRTIM_MPER/2 value and the HRTIM_MCMP3R active register is automatically updated with 3x (HRTIM_MPER/4) value.
11: Interleaved mode disabled

Bit 5 HALF: Half mode

This bit enables the half duty-cycle mode: the HRTIM_MCMP1R active register is automatically updated with HRTIM_MPER/2 value when HRTIM_MPER register is written.
0: Half mode disabled
1: Half mode enabled

Bit 4 RETRIG: Re-triggerable mode

This bit defines the behavior of the master timer counter in single-shot mode.
0: The timer is not re-triggerable: a counter reset can be done only if the counter is stopped (period elapsed)
1: The timer is re-triggerable: a counter reset is done whatever the counter state (running or stopped)

Bit 3 CONT: Continuous mode

0: The timer operates in single-shot mode and stops when it reaches the MPER value
1: The timer operates in continuous (free-running) mode and rolls over to zero when it reaches the MPER value

Bits 2:0 CKPSC[2:0]: Clock prescaler

These bits define the master timer high-resolution clock prescaler ratio.
The counter clock equivalent frequency ( \( f_{COUNTER} \) ) is equal to \( f_{HRCK} / 2^{CKPSC[2:0]} \) .
The prescaling ratio cannot be modified once the timer is enabled.

28.5.2 HRTIM master timer interrupt status register (HRTIM_MISR)

Address offset: 0x004

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.MUPDSYNCMREPMCMP 4MCMP 3MCMP 2MCMP 1
rrrrrrr

Bits 31:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 6 MUPD : Master update interrupt flag

This bit is set by hardware when the master timer registers are updated.

0: No master update interrupt occurred

1: Master update interrupt occurred

Bit 5 SYNC : Sync input interrupt flag

This bit is set by hardware when a synchronization input event is received.

0: No sync input interrupt occurred

1: Sync input interrupt occurred

Bit 4 MREP : Master repetition interrupt flag

This bit is set by hardware when the master timer repetition period has elapsed.

0: No master repetition interrupt occurred

1: Master repetition interrupt occurred

Bit 3 MCMP4 : Master compare 4 interrupt flag

Refer to MCMP1 description

Bit 2 MCMP3 : Master compare 3 interrupt flag

Refer to MCMP1 description

Bit 1 MCMP2 : Master compare 2 interrupt flag

Refer to MCMP1 description

Bit 0 MCMP1 : Master compare 1 interrupt flag

This bit is set by hardware when the master timer counter matches the value programmed in the master compare 1 register.

0: No master compare 1 interrupt occurred

1: Master compare 1 interrupt occurred

28.5.3 HRTIM master timer interrupt clear register (HRTIM_MICR)

Address offset: 0x008

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.MUPDC
C
SYNCCMREPC
C
MCMP4CMCMP3CMCMP2CMCMP1C
wwwwwww

Bits 31:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 6 MUPDC : Master update interrupt flag clear

Writing 1 to this bit clears the MUPDC flag in HRTIM_MISR register.

Bit 5 SYNCC : Sync input interrupt flag clear

Writing 1 to this bit clears the SYNC flag in HRTIM_MISR register.

Bit 4 MREPC : Repetition interrupt flag clear

Writing 1 to this bit clears the MREP flag in HRTIM_MISR register.

Bit 3 MCMP4C : Master compare 4 interrupt flag clear

Writing 1 to this bit clears the MCMP4 flag in HRTIM_MISR register.

Bit 2 MCMP3C : Master compare 3 interrupt flag clear

Writing 1 to this bit clears the MCMP3 flag in HRTIM_MISR register.

Bit 1 MCMP2C : Master compare 2 interrupt flag clear

Writing 1 to this bit clears the MCMP2 flag in HRTIM_MISR register.

Bit 0 MCMP1C : Master compare 1 interrupt flag clear

Writing 1 to this bit clears the MCMP1 flag in HRTIM_MISR register.

28.5.4 HRTIM master timer DMA interrupt enable register (HRTIM_MDIER)

Address offset: 0x00C

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.MUPD
DE
SYNCD
E
MREP
DE
MCMP
4DE
MCMP
3DE
MCMP
2DE
MCMP
1DE
rwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.MUPDI
E
SYNCI
E
MREPI
E
MCMP
4IE
MCMP
3IE
MCMP
2IE
MCMP
1IE
rwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 22 MUPDDE : Master update DMA request enable

This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the master update DMA requests.

0: Master update DMA request disabled

1: Master update DMA request enabled

Bit 21 SYNCDE : Sync input DMA request enable

This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the sync input DMA requests.

0: Sync input DMA request disabled

1: Sync input DMA request enabled

Bit 20 MREPDE : Master repetition DMA request enable

This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the master timer repetition DMA requests.

0: Repetition DMA request disabled

1: Repetition DMA request enabled

Bit 19 MCMP4DE : Master compare 4 DMA request enable

Refer to MCMP1DE description

Bit 18 MCMP3DE : Master compare 3 DMA request enable

Refer to MCMP1DE description

Bit 17 MCMP2DE : Master compare 2 DMA request enable

Refer to MCMP1DE description

Bit 16 MCMP1DE : Master compare 1 DMA request enable

This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the master timer compare 1 DMA requests.

0: Compare 1 DMA request disabled

1: Compare 1 DMA request enabled

Bits 15:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 6 MUPDIE : Master update interrupt enable

This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the master timer registers update interrupts

0: Master update interrupts disabled

1: Master update interrupts enabled

Bit 5 SYNCIE : Sync input interrupt enable

This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the sync input interrupts

0: Sync input interrupts disabled

1: Sync input interrupts enabled

Bit 4 MREPIE : Master repetition interrupt enable

This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the master timer repetition interrupts

0: Master repetition interrupt disabled

1: Master repetition interrupt enabled

Bit 3 MCMP4IE : Master compare 4 interrupt enable

Refer to MCMP1IE description

Bit 2 MCMP3IE : Master compare 3 interrupt enable

Refer to MCMP1IE description

Bit 1 MCMP2IE : Master compare 2 interrupt enable

Refer to MCMP1IE description

Bit 0 MCMP1IE : Master compare 1 interrupt enable

This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the master timer compare 1 interrupt

0: Compare 1 interrupt disabled

1: Compare 1 interrupt enabled

28.5.5 HRTIM master timer counter register (HRTIM_MCNTR)

Address offset: 0x010

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
MCNT[15:0]

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 15:0 MCNT[15:0] : Counter value

Holds the master timer counter value. This register can only be written when the master timer is stopped (MCEN = 0 in HRTIM_MCR).

Note: For HR clock prescaling ratio below 32 (CKPSC[2:0] < 5), the least significant bits of the counter are not significant. They cannot be written and return 0 when read.

Note: The timer behavior is not guaranteed if the counter value is set above the HRTIM_MPER register value.

28.5.6 HRTIM master timer period register (HRTIM_MPER)

Address offset: 0x014

Reset value: 0x0000 FFDF

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
MPER[15:0]

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 15:0 MPER[15:0] : Master timer period value

This register defines the counter overflow value.

The period value must be above or equal to 3 periods of the \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock, that is 0x60 if CKPSC[2:0] = 0, 0x30 if CKPSC[2:0] = 1, 0x18 if CKPSC[2:0] = 2, ...

The maximum value is 0x0000 FFDF.

28.5.7 HRTIM master timer repetition register (HRTIM_MREP)

Address offset: 0x018

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.MREP[7:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 7:0 MREP[7:0] : Master timer repetition period value

This register holds the repetition period value for the master counter. It is either the preload register or the active register if preload is disabled.

28.5.8 HRTIM master timer compare 1 register (HRTIM_MCMP1R)

Address offset: 0x01C

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
MCMP1[15:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 15:0 MCMP1[15:0] : Master timer compare 1 value

This register holds the master timer compare 1 value. It is either the preload register or the active register if preload is disabled.

The compare value must be above or equal to 3 periods of the \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock, that is 0x60 if CKPSC[2:0] = 0, 0x30 if CKPSC[2:0] = 1, 0x18 if CKPSC[2:0] = 2,...

28.5.9 HRTIM master timer compare 2 register (HRTIM_MCMP2R)

Address offset: 0x024

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
MCMP2[15:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 15:0 MCMP2[15:0] : Master timer compare 2 value

This register holds the master timer compare 2 value. It is either the preload register or the active register if preload is disabled.

The compare value must be above or equal to 3 periods of the \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock, that is 0x60 if CKPSC[2:0] = 0, 0x30 if CKPSC[2:0] = 1, 0x18 if CKPSC[2:0] = 2,...

28.5.10 HRTIM master timer compare 3 register (HRTIM_MCMP3R)

Address offset: 0x028

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
MCMP3[15:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 15:0 MCMP3[15:0] : Master timer compare 3 value

This register holds the master timer compare 3 value. It is either the preload register or the active register if preload is disabled.

The compare value must be above or equal to 3 periods of the \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock, that is 0x60 if CKPSC[2:0] = 0, 0x30 if CKPSC[2:0] = 1, 0x18 if CKPSC[2:0] = 2,...

28.5.11 HRTIM master timer compare 4 register (HRTIM_MCMP4R)

Address offset: 0x02C

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
MCMP4[15:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 15:0 MCMP4[15:0] : Master timer compare 4 value

This register holds the master timer compare 4 value. It is either the preload register or the active register if preload is disabled.

The compare value must be above or equal to 3 periods of the \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock, that is 0x60 if CKPSC[2:0] = 0, 0x30 if CKPSC[2:0] = 1, 0x18 if CKPSC[2:0] = 2,...

28.5.12 HRTIM timer x control register (HRTIM_TIMxCR) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x080

Address offset: Block B: 0x100

Address offset: Block C: 0x180

Address offset: Block D: 0x200

Address offset: Block E: 0x280

Address offset: Block F: 0x300

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
UPDGAT[3:0]PREENDACSYNC[1:0]MSTUTEUTDUTCUTBUTAUTxRST
U
TxREP
U
TFU
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
DELCMP4[1:0]DELCMP2[1:0]SYNCS
TRTx
SYNCR
STx
RSYNC
U
INTLVD[1:0]PSHPL
L
HALFRETRI
G
CONTCKPSCx[2:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:28 UPDGAT[3:0]: Update gating

These bits define how the update occurs relatively to the burst DMA transaction and the external update request on update enable inputs hrtim_upd_en[3:1] (see Table 224 ).

The update events, as mentioned below, can be: MSTU, TFU, TEU, TDU, TCU, TBU, TAU, TxRSTU, TxREPU.

0000: The update occurs independently from the DMA burst transfer

0001: The update occurs when the DMA burst transfer is completed

0010: The update occurs on the update event following the DMA burst transfer completion

0011: The update occurs on a rising edge on hrtim_upd_en1

0100: The update occurs on a rising edge on hrtim_upd_en2

0101: The update occurs on a rising edge on hrtim_upd_en3

0110: The update occurs on the update event following a rising edge on hrtim_upd_en1

0111: The update occurs on the update event following a rising edge on hrtim_upd_en2

1000: The update occurs on the update event following a rising edge on hrtim_upd_en3

Others: Reserved

Note: This bitfield must be reset before programming a new value.

For UPDGAT[3:0] values equal to 0001, 0011, 0100, 0101, it is possible to have multiple concurrent update source (for instance RSTU and DMA burst).

Bit 27 PREEN: Preload enable

This bit enables the registers preload mechanism and defines whether a write access into a preloadable register is done into the active or the preload register.

0: Preload disabled: the write access is directly done into the active register

1: Preload enabled: the write access is done into the preload register

Bits 26:25 DACSYNC[1:0] : DAC synchronization

A DAC synchronization event is generated when the timer update occurs. These bits are defining on which output the DAC synchronization is sent (refer to Section 28.3.21: DAC triggers for connections details).

Bit 24 MSTU : Master timer update

Register update is triggered by the master timer update.

Bit 23 TEU : Timer E update

Register update is triggered by the timer E update

Note: This bit is reserved for HRTIM_TIMECR. It is only available for HRTIM_TIMACR, HRTIM_TIMBCR, HRTIM_TIMCCR, HRTIM_TIMDCR, HRTIM_TIMFCR.

Bit 22 TDU : Timer D update

Register update is triggered by the timer D update

Note: This bit is reserved for HRTIM_TIMDCR. It is only available for HRTIM_TIMACR, HRTIM_TIMBCR, HRTIM_TIMCCR, HRTIM_TIMECR, HRTIM_TIMFCR.

Bit 21 TCU : Timer C update

Register update is triggered by the timer C update

Note: This bit is reserved for HRTIM_TIMCCR. It is only available for HRTIM_TIMACR, HRTIM_TIMBCR, HRTIM_TIMDCR, HRTIM_TIMECR, HRTIM_TIMFCR.

Bit 20 TBU : Timer B update

Register update is triggered by the timer B update

Note: This bit is reserved for HRTIM_TIMBCR. It is only available for HRTIM_TIMACR, HRTIM_TIMCCR, HRTIM_TIMDCR, HRTIM_TIMECR, HRTIM_TIMFCR.

Bit 19 TAU : Timer A update

Register update is triggered by the timer A update

Note: This bit is reserved for HRTIM_TIMBCR. It is only available for HRTIM_TIMBCR, HRTIM_TIMCCR, HRTIM_TIMDCR, HRTIM_TIMECR, HRTIM_TIMFCR.

Bit 18 TxRSTU : Timer x reset update

Register update is triggered by timer x counter reset or roll-over to 0 after reaching the period value in continuous mode.

Bit 17 TxREPU : Timer x repetition update

Register update is triggered when the counter rolls over and HRTIM_REPx = 0

0: Update on repetition disabled

1: Update on repetition enabled

Bit 16 TFU : Timer F update

Register update is triggered by the timer F update

0: Update by timer F disabled

1: Update by timer F enabled

Note: This bit is reserved for HRTIM_TIMFCR. It is only available for HRTIM_TIMACR, HRTIM_TIMBCR, HRTIM_TIMCCR, HRTIM_TIMDCR, HRTIM_TIMECR.

Bits 15:14 DEL CMP4[1:0] : CMP4 auto-delayed mode

This bitfield defines whether the compare register is behaving in standard mode (compare match issued as soon as counter equal compare), or in auto-delayed mode (see Section : Auto-delayed mode ).

00: CMP4 register is always active (standard compare mode)

01: CMP4 value is recomputed and is active following a capture 2 event

10: CMP4 value is recomputed and is active following a capture 2 event, or is recomputed and active after Compare 1 match (timeout function if capture 2 event is missing)

11: CMP4 value is recomputed and is active following a capture 2 event, or is recomputed and active after Compare 3 match (timeout function if capture event is missing)

Note: This bitfield must not be modified once the counter is enabled (TxCEN bit set).

Bits 13:12 DEL CMP2[1:0] : CMP2 auto-delayed mode

This bitfield defines whether the compare register is behaving in standard mode (compare match issued as soon as counter equal compare), or in auto-delayed mode (see Section : Auto-delayed mode ).

00: CMP2 register is always active (standard compare mode)

01: CMP2 value is recomputed and is active following a capture 1 event

10: CMP2 value is recomputed and is active following a capture 1 event, or is recomputed and active after compare 1 match (timeout function if capture event is missing)

11: CMP2 value is recomputed and is active following a capture 1 event, or is recomputed and active after compare 3 match (timeout function if capture event is missing)

Note: This bitfield must not be modified once the counter is enabled (TxCEN bit set).

Bit 11 SYNC STRTx : Synchronization starts timer x

This bit defines the timer x behavior following the synchronization event:

0: No effect on timer x

1: A synchronization input event starts the timer x

Bit 10 SYNCRSTx : Synchronization resets timer x

This bit defines the timer x behavior following the synchronization event:

0: No effect on timer x

1: A synchronization input event resets the timer x

Bit 9 RSYNCU : Re-synchronized update

This bit specifies whether update source coming outside from the timing unit must be synchronized:

0: The update coming from adjacent timers (when MSTU, TAU, TBU, TCU, TDU, TEU, TFU bit is set) or from a software update (TxSWU bit) is taken into account immediately

1: The update coming from adjacent timers (when MSTU, TAU, TBU, TCU, TDU, TEU, TFU bit is set) or from a software update (TxSWU bit) is taken into account on the following reset/roll-over event.

Note: This bit is significant only when UPDGAT[3:0] = 0000, it is ignored otherwise.

Bits 8:7 INTLVD[1:0] : Interleaved mode

This bitfield is significant only when the HALF bit is reset. It enables the interleaved mode.

00: Interleaved mode disabled

01: Triple interleaved mode: when HRTIM_PERxR register is written, the HRTIM_CMP1xR active register is automatically updated with HRTIM_PERxR/3 value, and the HRTIM_CMP2xR active register is automatically updated with 2x (HRTIM_PERxR/3) value.

10: Quad interleaved mode: when HRTIM_PERxR register is written, the HRTIM_CMP1xR active register is automatically updated with HRTIM_PERxR/4 value, the HRTIM_CMP2xR active register is automatically updated with HRTIM_PERxR/2 value and the HRTIM_CMP3xR active register is automatically updated with 3x (HRTIM_PERxR/4) value.

11: Interleaved mode disabled

Bit 6 PSHPLL : Push-pull mode enable

This bit enables the push-pull mode.

0: Push-pull mode disabled

1: Push-pull mode enabled

Note: This bitfield must not be modified once the counter is enabled (TxCEN bit set).

Bit 5 HALF : Half mode enable

This bit enables the half duty-cycle mode: the HRTIM_CMP1xR active register is automatically updated with HRTIM_PERxR/2 value when HRTIM_PERxR register is written.

0: Half mode disabled

1: Half mode enabled

Bit 4 RETRIG : Re-triggerable mode

This bit defines the counter behavior in single shot mode.

0: The timer is not re-triggerable: a counter reset is done if the counter is stopped (period elapsed in single-shot mode or counter stopped in continuous mode)

1: The timer is re-triggerable: a counter reset is done whatever the counter state.

Bit 3 CONT : Continuous mode

This bit defines the timer operating mode.

0: The timer operates in single-shot mode and stops when it reaches TIMxPER value

1: The timer operates in continuous mode and rolls over to zero when it reaches TIMxPER value

Bits 2:0 CKPSCx[2:0] : HRTIM timer x clock prescaler

These bits define the master timer high-resolution clock prescaler ratio.

The counter clock equivalent frequency ( \( f_{COUNTER} \) ) is equal to \( f_{HRCK} / 2^{CKPSC[2:0]} \) .

The prescaling ratio cannot be modified once the timer is enabled.

28.5.13 HRTIM timer x interrupt status register (HRTIM_TIMxISR) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x084

Address offset: Block B: 0x104

Address offset: Block C: 0x184

Address offset: Block D: 0x204

Address offset: Block E: 0x284

Address offset: Block F: 0x304

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.O2CPYO1CPYO2
STAT
O1
STAT
IPP
STAT
CPP
STAT
rrrrrr
1514131211109876543210
Res.DLYPR
T
RSTRSTx2SETx2RSTx1SETx1CPT2CPT1UPDRes.REPCMP4CMP3CMP2CMP1
rrrrrrrrrrrrrr

Bits 31:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 21 O2CPY : Output 2 copy

This status bit is a raw copy of the output 2 state, before the output stage (chopper, polarity). It allows to check the current output state before re-enabling the output after a delayed protection.

0: Output 2 is inactive

1: Output 2 is active

Bit 20 O1CPY : Output 1 copy

This status bit is a raw copy of the output 1 state, before the output stage (chopper, polarity). It allows to check the current output state before re-enabling the output after a delayed protection.

0: Output 1 is inactive

1: Output 1 is active

Bit 19 O2STAT : Output 2 status

This status bit indicates the output 2 state when the delayed idle protection was triggered. This bit is updated upon any new delayed protection entry. This bit is not updated in balanced idle.

0: Output 2 was inactive

1: Output 2 was active

Bit 18 O1STAT : Output 1 status

This status bit indicates the output 1 state when the delayed idle protection was triggered. This bit is updated upon any new delayed protection entry. This bit is not updated in balanced idle.

0: Output 1 was inactive

1: Output 1 was active

Bit 17 IPPSTAT : Idle push-pull Status

This status bit indicates on which output the signal was applied, in push-pull mode balanced fault mode or delayed idle mode, when the protection was triggered (whatever the output state, active or inactive).

0: Protection occurred when the output 1 was active and output 2 forced inactive

1: Protection occurred when the output 2 was active and output 1 forced inactive

Bit 16 CPPSTAT : Current push-pull status

This status bit indicates on which output the signal is currently applied, in push-pull mode. It is only significant in this configuration.

0: Signal applied on output 1 and output 2 forced inactive

1: Signal applied on output 2 and output 1 forced inactive

Bit 15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 14 DLYPRT : Delayed protection flag

0: No delayed protection interrupt occurred

1: Delayed Idle or balanced Idle mode entry occurred

Bit 13 RST : Reset and/or roll-over interrupt flag

This bit is set by hardware when the timer x counter is reset or rolls over in continuous mode.

0: No TIMx counter reset/roll-over interrupt occurred

1: TIMx counter reset/roll-over interrupt occurred

Bit 12 RSTx2 : Output 2 reset interrupt flag timer x

Refer to RSTx1 description

Bit 11 SETx2 : Output 2 set interrupt flag timer x

Refer to SETx1 description

Bit 10 RSTx1 : Output 1 reset interrupt flag timer x

This bit is set by hardware when the Tx1 output is reset (goes from active to inactive mode).

0: No Tx1 output reset interrupt occurred

1: Tx1 output reset interrupt occurred

Bit 9 SETx1 : Output 1 set interrupt flag timer x

This bit is set by hardware when the Tx1 output is set (goes from inactive to active mode).

0: No Tx1 output set interrupt occurred

1: Tx1 output set interrupt occurred

Bit 8 CPT2 : Capture 2 interrupt flag

Refer to CPT1 description

Bit 7 CPT1 : Capture 1 interrupt flag

This bit is set by hardware when the timer x capture 1 event occurs.

0: No timer x capture 1 interrupt occurred

1: Timer x capture 1 interrupt occurred

Bit 6 UPD : Update interrupt flag

This bit is set by hardware when the timer x update event occurs.

0: No timer x update interrupt occurred

1: Timer x update interrupt occurred

Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 4 REP : Repetition interrupt flag

This bit is set by hardware when the timer x repetition period has elapsed.

0: No timer x repetition interrupt occurred

1: Timer x repetition interrupt occurred

Bit 3 CMP4 : Compare 4 interrupt flag

Refer to CMP1 description

28.5.14 HRTIM timer x interrupt clear register (HRTIM_TIMxICR) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x088

Address offset: Block B: 0x108

Address offset: Block C: 0x188

Address offset: Block D: 0x208

Address offset: Block E: 0x288

Address offset: Block F: 0x308

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
Res.DLYPRTCRSTCRSTx2CSETx2CRSTx1CSETx1CCPT2CCPT1CUPDCRes.REPCCMP4CCMP3CCMP2CCMP1C
wwwwwwwwwwwwww

Bits 31:15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

  1. Bit 8 CPT2C : Capture 2 interrupt flag clear
    Writing 1 to this bit clears the CPT2 flag in HRTIM_TIMxISR register
  2. Bit 7 CPT1C : Capture 1 interrupt flag clear
    Writing 1 to this bit clears the CPT1 flag in HRTIM_TIMxISR register
  3. Bit 6 UPDC : Update interrupt flag clear
    Writing 1 to this bit clears the UPD flag in HRTIM_TIMxISR register
  4. Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
  5. Bit 4 REPC : Repetition interrupt flag clear
    Writing 1 to this bit clears the REP flag in HRTIM_TIMxISR register
  6. Bit 3 CMP4C : Compare 4 interrupt flag clear
    Writing 1 to this bit clears the CMP4 flag in HRTIM_TIMxISR register
  7. Bit 2 CMP3C : Compare 3 interrupt flag clear
    Writing 1 to this bit clears the CMP3 flag in HRTIM_TIMxISR register
  8. Bit 1 CMP2C : Compare 2 interrupt flag clear
    Writing 1 to this bit clears the CMP2 flag in HRTIM_TIMxISR register
  9. Bit 0 CMP1C : Compare 1 interrupt flag clear
    Writing 1 to this bit clears the CMP1 flag in HRTIM_TIMxISR register

28.5.15 HRTIM timer x DMA interrupt enable register (HRTIM_TIMxDIER) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x08C

Address offset: Block B: 0x10C

Address offset: Block C: 0x18C

Address offset: Block D: 0x20C

Address offset: Block E: 0x28C

Address offset: Block F: 0x30C

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.DLYPR
TDE
RSTDERSTx2
DE
SETx2
DE
RSTx1
DE
SETx1
DE
CPT2D
E
CPT1D
E
UPDDERes.REPDECMP4D
E
CMP3D
E
CMP2D
E
CMP1D
E
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
Res.DLYPR
TIE
RSTIERSTx2I
E
SETx2I
E
RSTx1I
E
SETx1I
E
CPT2IECPT1IEUPDIERes.REPIECMP4I
E
CMP3I
E
CMP2I
E
CMP1I
E
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
  1. Bit 31 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
  2. Bit 30 DLYPRTDE : Delayed protection DMA request enable
    This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable DMA requests on delayed protection.
    0: Delayed protection DMA request disabled
    1: Delayed protection DMA request enabled
  3. Bit 29 RSTDE : Reset/roll-over DMA request enable
    This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable DMA requests on timer x counter reset or roll-over in continuous mode.
    0: Timer x counter reset/roll-over DMA request disabled
    1: Timer x counter reset/roll-over DMA request enabled
  4. Bit 28 RSTx2DE : Output 2 reset DMA request enable timer x
    Refer to RSTx1DE description
  5. Bit 27 SETx2DE : Output 2 set DMA request enable timer x
    Refer to SETx1DE description
  6. Bit 26 RSTx1DE : Output 1 reset DMA request enable timer x
    This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable Tx1 output reset DMA requests.
    0: Tx1 output reset DMA request disabled
    1: Tx1 output reset DMA request enabled
  7. Bit 25 SETx1DE : Output 1 set DMA request enable timer x
    This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable Tx1 output set DMA requests.
    0: Tx1 output set DMA request disabled
    1: Tx1 output set DMA request enabled
  8. Bit 24 CPT2DE : Capture 2 DMA request enable
    Refer to CPT1DE description
  9. Bit 23 CPT1DE : Capture 1 DMA request enable
    This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable capture 1 DMA requests.
    0: Capture 1 DMA request disabled
    1: Capture 1 DMA request enabled
  10. Bit 22 UPDDE : Update DMA request enable
    This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable DMA requests on update event.
    0: Update DMA request disabled
    1: Update DMA request enabled
  11. Bit 21 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
  12. Bit 20 REPDE : Repetition DMA request enable
    This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable DMA requests on repetition event.
    0: Repetition DMA request disabled
    1: Repetition DMA request enabled
  13. Bit 19 CMP4DE : Compare 4 DMA request enable
    Refer to CMP1DE description
  14. Bit 18 CMP3DE : Compare 3 DMA request enable
    Refer to CMP1DE description
  15. Bit 17 CMP2DE : Compare 2 DMA request enable
    Refer to CMP1DE description
  1. Bit 16 CMP1DE : Compare 1 DMA request enable
    This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the compare 1 DMA requests.
    0: Compare 1 DMA request disabled
    1: Compare 1 DMA request enabled
  2. Bit 15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
  3. Bit 14 DLYPRTIE : Delayed protection interrupt enable
    This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupts on delayed protection.
    0: Delayed protection interrupts disabled
    1: Delayed protection interrupts enabled
  4. Bit 13 RSTIE : Reset/roll-over interrupt enable
    This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable interrupts on timer x counter reset or roll-over in continuous mode.
    0: Timer x counter reset/roll-over interrupt disabled
    1: Timer x counter reset/roll-over interrupt enabled
  5. Bit 12 RSTx2IE : Output 2 reset interrupt enable timer x
    Refer to RSTx1IE description
  6. Bit 11 SETx2IE : Output 2 set interrupt enable timer x
    Refer to SETx1IE description
  7. Bit 10 RSTx1IE : Output 1 reset interrupt enable timer x
    This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable Tx1 output reset interrupts.
    0: Tx1 output reset interrupts disabled
    1: Tx1 output reset interrupts enabled
  8. Bit 9 SETx1IE : Output 1 set interrupt enable timer x
    This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable Tx1 output set interrupts.
    0: Tx1 output set interrupts disabled
    1: Tx1 output set interrupts enabled
  9. Bit 8 CPT2IE : Capture interrupt enable
    Refer to CPT1IE description
  10. Bit 7 CPT1IE : Capture interrupt enable
    This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable capture 1 interrupts.
    0: Capture 1 interrupts disabled
    1: Capture 1 interrupts enabled
  11. Bit 6 UPDIE : Update interrupt enable
    This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable update event interrupts.
    0: Update interrupts disabled
    1: Update interrupts enabled
  12. Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.
  13. Bit 4 REPIE : Repetition interrupt enable
    This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable repetition event interrupts.
    0: Repetition interrupts disabled
    1: Repetition interrupts enabled
  14. Bit 3 CMP4IE : Compare 4 interrupt enable
    Refer to CMP1IE description

Bit 2 CMP3IE : Compare 3 interrupt enable
Refer to CMP1IE description

Bit 1 CMP2IE : Compare 2 interrupt enable
Refer to CMP1IE description

Bit 0 CMP1IE : Compare 1 interrupt enable
This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the compare 1 interrupts.
0: Compare 1 interrupt disabled
1: Compare 1 interrupt enabled

28.5.16 HRTIM timer x counter register (HRTIM_CNTxR) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x090

Address offset: Block B: 0x110

Address offset: Block C: 0x190

Address offset: Block D: 0x210

Address offset: Block E: 0x290

Address offset: Block F: 0x310

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
CNTx[15:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 15:0 CNTx[15:0] : Timer x counter value

This register holds the timer x counter value. It can only be written when the timer is stopped (TxCEN = 0 in HRTIM_TIMxCR).

Note: For HR clock prescaling ratio below 32 (CKPSC[2:0] < 5), the least significant bits of the counter are not significant. They cannot be written and return 0 when read.

Note: The timer behavior is not guaranteed if the counter value is above the HRTIM_PERxR register value.

28.5.17 HRTIM timer x period register (HRTIM_PERxR) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x094

Address offset: Block B: 0x114

Address offset: Block C: 0x194

Address offset: Block D: 0x214

Address offset: Block E: 0x294

Address offset: Block F: 0x314

Reset value: 0x0000 FFDF

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
PERx[15:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 15:0 PERx[15:0] : Timer x period value

This register holds timer x period value.

This register holds either the content of the preload register or the content of the active register if preload is disabled.

The period value must be above or equal to 3 periods of the \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock, that is 0x60 if CKPSC[2:0] = 0, 0x30 if CKPSC[2:0] = 1, 0x18 if CKPSC[2:0] = 2,...

The maximum value is 0x0000 FFDF.

28.5.18 HRTIM timer x repetition register (HRTIM_REPxR) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x098

Address offset: Block B: 0x118

Address offset: Block C: 0x198

Address offset: Block D: 0x218

Address offset: Block E: 0x298

Address offset: Block F: 0x318

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.REPx[7:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:8 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 7:0 REPx[7:0] : Timer x repetition period value

This register holds the repetition period value.

This register holds either the content of the preload register or the content of the active register if preload is disabled.

28.5.19 HRTIM timer x compare 1 register (HRTIM_CMP1xR) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x09C

Address offset: Block B: 0x11C

Address offset: Block C: 0x19C

Address offset: Block D: 0x21C

Address offset: Block E: 0x29C

Address offset: Block F: 0x31C

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
CMP1x[15:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 15:0 CMP1x[15:0] : Timer x compare 1 value

This register holds the compare 1 value.

This register holds either the content of the preload register or the content of the active register if preload is disabled.

The compare value must be either null or above or equal to 3 periods of the \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) clock, that is 0x60 if CKPSC[2:0] = 0, 0x30 if CKPSC[2:0] = 1, 0x18 if CKPSC[2:0] = 2,...

The null value is programmed following the use case described in Section : Null duty cycle exception case .

28.5.20 HRTIM timer x compare 1 compound register (HRTIM_CMP1CxR) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x0A0
Address offset: Block B: 0x120
Address offset: Block C: 0x1A0
Address offset: Block D: 0x220
Address offset: Block E: 0x2A0
Address offset: Block F: 0x320

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.REPx[7:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
CMP1x[15:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 23:16 REPx[7:0] : Timer x repetition value aliased from HRTIM_REPx register
This bitfield is an alias from the REPx[7:0] bitfield in the HRTIMx_REPxR register.

Bits 15:0 CMP1x[15:0] : Timer x compare 1 value
This bitfield is an alias from the CMP1x[15:0] bitfield in the HRTIMx_CMP1xR register.

28.5.21 HRTIM timer x compare 2 register (HRTIM_CMP2xR) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x0A4
Address offset: Block B: 0x124
Address offset: Block C: 0x1A4
Address offset: Block D: 0x224
Address offset: Block E: 0x2A4
Address offset: Block F: 0x324

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
CMP2x[15:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 15:0 CMP2x[15:0] : Timer x compare 2 value

This register holds the compare 2 value.

This register holds either the content of the preload register or the content of the active register if preload is disabled.

The compare value must be above or equal to 3 periods of the \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock, that is 0x60 if CKPSC[2:0] = 0, 0x30 if CKPSC[2:0] = 1, 0x18 if CKPSC[2:0] = 2,...

This register behaves as an auto-delayed compare register, if enabled with DELCMP2[1:0] bits in HRTIM_TIMxCR.

28.5.22 HRTIM timer x compare 3 register (HRTIM_CMP3xR) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x0A8

Address offset: Block B: 0x128

Address offset: Block C: 0x1A8

Address offset: Block D: 0x228

Address offset: Block E: 0x2A8

Address offset: Block F: 0x328

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
CMP3x[15:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 15:0 CMP3x[15:0] : Timer x compare 3 value

This register holds the compare 3 value.

This register holds either the content of the preload register or the content of the active register if preload is disabled.

The compare value must be either null or above or equal to 3 periods of the \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock (0x60 if CKPSC[2:0] = 0, 0x30 if CKPSC[2:0] = 1, 0x18 if CKPSC[2:0] = 2,...).

The null value is programmed following the use case described in Section : Null duty cycle exception case .

28.5.23 HRTIM timer x compare 4 register (HRTIM_CMP4xR) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x0AC

Address offset: Block B: 0x12C

Address offset: Block C: 0x1AC

Address offset: Block D: 0x22C

Address offset: Block E: 0x2AC

Address offset: Block F: 0x32C

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
CMP4x[15:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 15:0 CMP4x[15:0] : Timer x compare 4 value

This register holds the compare 4 value.

This register holds either the content of the preload register or the content of the active register if preload is disabled.

The compare value must be above or equal to 3 periods of the f HRTIM clock, that is 0x60 if CKPSC[2:0] = 0, 0x30 if CKPSC[2:0] = 1, 0x18 if CKPSC[2:0] = 2,...

This register can behave as an auto-delayed compare register, if enabled with DELCMP4[1:0] bits in HRTIM_TIMxCR.

28.5.24 HRTIM timer x capture 1 register (HRTIM_CPT1xR) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x0B0

Address offset: Block B: 0x130

Address offset: Block C: 0x1B0

Address offset: Block D: 0x230

Address offset: Block E: 0x2B0

Address offset: Block F: 0x330

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.DIR
r
1514131211109876543210
CPT1x[15:0]
rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

Bits 31:17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 16 DIR : Timer x capture 1 direction status

This register holds the counting direction value when the capture 1 event occurred:

0: timer is up-counting

1: timer is down-counting

In up-counting mode (UDM bit reset), the DIR bit is always read as 0.

Bits 15:0 CPT1x[15:0] : Timer x capture 1 value

This register holds the counter value when the capture 1 event occurred.

Note: In up/down mode (UDM bit set to 1), the capture value is referred to:

The DIR bit allows to discriminate the up-down phases when reading the captured value.

Note: This is a regular resolution register: for HR clock prescaling ratio below 32 (CKPSC[2:0] < 5), the least significant bits of the counter are not significant. They cannot be written and return 0 when read.

28.5.25 HRTIM timer x capture 2 register (HRTIM_CPT2xR)
(x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x0B4

Address offset: Block B: 0x134

Address offset: Block C: 0x1B4

Address offset: Block D: 0x234

Address offset: Block E: 0x2B4

Address offset: Block F: 0x334

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.DIR
r
1514131211109876543210
CPT2x[15:0]
rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

Bits 31:17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 16 DIR : Timer x capture 1 direction status

This register holds the counting direction value when the capture 1 event occurred:

0: timer is up-counting

1: timer is down-counting

In up-counting mode (UDM bit reset), the DIR bit is always read as 0.

Bits 15:0 CPT2x[15:0] : Timer x capture 2 value

This register holds the counter value when the capture 2 event occurred.

Note: In up/down mode (UDM bit set to 1), the capture value is referred to:

The DIR bit allows to discriminate the up-down phases when reading the captured value.

Note: This is a regular resolution register: for HR clock prescaling ratio below 32 (CKPSC[2:0] < 5), the least significant bits of the counter are not significant. They cannot be written and return 0 when read.

28.5.26 HRTIM timer x deadtime register (HRTIM_DTxR) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x0B8

Address offset: Block B: 0x138

Address offset: Block C: 0x1B8

Address offset: Block D: 0x238

Address offset: Block E: 0x2B8

Address offset: Block F: 0x338

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
DTFLK
x
DTFSL
Kx
Res.Res.Res.Res.SDTFxDTFx[8:0]
rworworwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
DTRLK
x
DTRSL
Kx
Res.DTPRSC[2:0]SDTRxDTRx[8:0]
rworworwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bit 31 DTFLKx : Deadtime falling lock timer x

This write-once bit prevents the deadtime (sign and value) to be modified, if enabled.

0: Deadtime falling value and sign is writable

1: Deadtime falling value and sign is read-only

Note: This bit is not preloaded

Bit 30 DTFSLKx : Deadtime falling sign lock timer x

This write-once bit prevents the sign of falling deadtime to be modified, if enabled.

0: Deadtime falling sign is writable

1: Deadtime falling sign is read-only

Note: This bit is not preloaded

Bits 29:26 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 25 SDTFx : Sign deadtime falling value timer x

This register determines whether the deadtime is positive (signals not overlapping) or negative (signals overlapping).

0: Positive deadtime on falling edge

1: Negative deadtime on falling edge

Bits 24:16 DTFx[8:0] : Deadtime falling value timer x

This register holds the value of the deadtime following a falling edge of reference PWM signal.

\[ t_{DTF} = DTFx[8:0] \times t_{DTG} \]

Bit 15 DTRLKx : Deadtime rising lock timer x

This write-once bit prevents the deadtime (sign and value) to be modified, if enabled.

0: Deadtime rising value and sign is writable

1: Deadtime rising value and sign is read-only

Note: This bit is not preloaded

Bit 14 DTRSLKx : Deadtime rising sign lock timer x

This write-once bit prevents the sign of deadtime to be modified, if enabled.

0: Deadtime rising sign is writable

1: Deadtime rising sign is read-only

Note: This bit is not preloaded.

Bit 13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 12:10 DTPRSC[2:0] : Deadtime prescaler

This register holds the value of the deadtime clock prescaler determined by the following formula:

\[ t_{DTG} = (2^{(DTPRSC[2:0])}) \times (t_{HRTIM} / 8) \]

(see Table 237: Deadtime resolution and max absolute values )

This bitfield is read-only as soon as any of the lock bit is enabled (DTFLKs, DTFSLKx, DTRLKx, DTRSLKx).

Bit 9 SDTRx : Sign deadtime rising value timer x

This register determines whether the deadtime is positive or negative (overlapping signals).

0: Positive deadtime on rising edge

1: Negative deadtime on rising edge

Bits 8:0 DTRx[8:0] : Deadtime rising value timer x

This register holds the value of the deadtime following a rising edge of reference PWM signal.

\[ t_{DTR} = DTRx[8:0] \times t_{DTG} \]

28.5.27 HRTIM timer x output 1 set register (HRTIM_SETx1R) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x0BC

Address offset: Block B: 0x13C

Address offset: Block C: 0x1BC

Address offset: Block D: 0x23C

Address offset: Block E: 0x2BC

Address offset: Block F: 0x33C

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
UPDATEEXT EVNT10EXT EVNT9EXT EVNT8EXT EVNT7EXT EVNT6EXT EVNT5EXT EVNT4EXT EVNT3EXT EVNT2EXT EVNT1TIM EVNT9TIM EVNT8TIM EVNT7TIM EVNT6TIM EVNT5
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
TIM EVNT4TIM EVNT3TIM EVNT2TIM EVNT1MST CMP4MST CMP3MST CMP2MST CMP1MST PERCMP4CMP3CMP2CMP1PERRESYNCSST
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bit 31 UPDATE : Registers update (transfer preload to active)

Register update event forces the output to its active state.

Bit 30 EXTEVNT10 : External event 10

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 29 EXTEVNT9 : External event 9

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 28 EXTEVNT8 : External event 8

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 27 EXTEVNT7 : External event 7

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 26 EXTEVNT6 : External event 6

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 25 EXTEVNT5 : External event 5

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 24 EXTEVNT4 : External event 4

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 23 EXTEVNT3 : External event 3

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 22 EXTEVNT2 : External event 2

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 21 EXTEVNT1 : External event 1

External event 1 forces the output to its active state.

Bit 20 TIMEVNT9 : Timer event 9

Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.

  1. Bit 19 TIMEVNT8 : Timer event 8
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  2. Bit 18 TIMEVNT7 : Timer event 7
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  3. Bit 17 TIMEVNT6 : Timer event 6
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  4. Bit 16 TIMEVNT5 : Timer event 5
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  5. Bit 15 TIMEVNT4 : Timer event 4
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  6. Bit 14 TIMEVNT3 : Timer event 3
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  7. Bit 13 TIMEVNT2 : Timer event 2
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  8. Bit 12 TIMEVNT1 : Timer event 1
    Timers event 1 forces the output to its active state (refer to Table 234 for timer events assignments).
  9. Bit 11 MSTCMP4 : Master compare 4
    Master timer compare 4 event forces the output to its active state.
  10. Bit 10 MSTCMP3 : Master compare 3
    Master timer compare 3 event forces the output to its active state.
  11. Bit 9 MSTCMP2 : Master compare 2
    Master timer compare 2 event forces the output to its active state.
  12. Bit 8 MSTCMP1 : Master compare 1
    Master timer compare 1 event forces the output to its active state.
  13. Bit 7 MSTPER : Master period
    The master timer counter roll-over in continuous mode, or to the master timer reset in single-shot mode forces the output to its active state.
  14. Bit 6 CMP4 : Timer x compare 4
    Timer A compare 4 event forces the output to its active state.
  15. Bit 5 CMP3 : Timer x compare 3
    Timer A compare 3 event forces the output to its active state.
  16. Bit 4 CMP2 : Timer x compare 2
    Timer A compare 2 event forces the output to its active state.
  17. Bit 3 CMP1 : Timer x compare 1
    Timer A compare 1 event forces the output to its active state.
Bit 2 PER : Timer x period

Timer A period event forces the output to its active state.

Note: In up/down mode (UDM bit set to 1), the counter period event is defined as per the OUTROM[1:0] bit setting.

Bit 1 RESYNC : Timer A resynchronization

Timer A reset event coming solely from software or SYNC input forces the output to its active state.

Note: Other timer reset are not affecting the output when RESYNC=1.

Bit 0 SST : Software set trigger

This bit forces the output to its active state. This bit can only be set by software and is reset by hardware.

Note: This bit is not preloaded.

28.5.28 HRTIM timer x output 1 reset register (HRTIM_RSTx1R) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x0C0

Address offset: Block B: 0x140

Address offset: Block C: 0x1C0

Address offset: Block D: 0x240

Address offset: Block E: 0x2C0

Address offset: Block F: 0x340

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
UPDATEEXT EVNT10EXT EVNT9EXT EVNT8EXT EVNT7EXT EVNT6EXT EVNT5EXT EVNT4EXT EVNT3EXT EVNT2EXT EVNT1TIM EVNT9TIM EVNT8TIM EVNT7TIM EVNT6TIM EVNT5
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
TIM EVNT4TIM EVNT3TIM EVNT2TIM EVNT1MST CMP4MST CMP3MST CMP2MST CMP1MST PERCMP4CMP3CMP2CMP1PERRESYNCSST
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bit 31 UPDATE : Registers update (transfer preload to active)

Register update event forces the output to its active state.

Bit 30 EXTEVNT10 : External event 10

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 29 EXTEVNT9 : External event 9

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 28 EXTEVNT8 : External event 8

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 27 EXTEVNT7 : External event 7

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 26 EXTEVNT6 : External event 6

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 25 EXTEVNT5 : External event 5

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 24 EXTEVNT4 : External event 4

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 23 EXTEVNT3 : External event 3

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 22 EXTEVNT2 : External event 2

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 21 EXTEVNT1 : External event 1

External event 1 forces the output to its active state.

Bit 20 TIMEVNT9 : Timer event 9

Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.

  1. Bit 19 TIMEVNT8 : Timer event 8
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  2. Bit 18 TIMEVNT7 : Timer event 7
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  3. Bit 17 TIMEVNT6 : Timer event 6
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  4. Bit 16 TIMEVNT5 : Timer event 5
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  5. Bit 15 TIMEVNT4 : Timer event 4
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  6. Bit 14 TIMEVNT3 : Timer event 3
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  7. Bit 13 TIMEVNT2 : Timer event 2
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  8. Bit 12 TIMEVNT1 : Timer event 1
    Timers event 1 forces the output to its active state (refer to Table 234 for timer events assignments).
  9. Bit 11 MSTCMP4 : Master compare 4
    Master timer compare 4 event forces the output to its active state.
  10. Bit 10 MSTCMP3 : Master compare 3
    Master timer compare 3 event forces the output to its active state.
  11. Bit 9 MSTCMP2 : Master compare 2
    Master timer compare 2 event forces the output to its active state.
  12. Bit 8 MSTCMP1 : Master compare 1
    Master timer compare 1 event forces the output to its active state.
  13. Bit 7 MSTPER : Master period
    The master timer counter roll-over in continuous mode, or to the master timer reset in single-shot mode forces the output to its active state.
  14. Bit 6 CMP4 : Timer x compare 4
    Timer A compare 4 event forces the output to its active state.
  15. Bit 5 CMP3 : Timer x compare 3
    Timer A compare 3 event forces the output to its active state.
  16. Bit 4 CMP2 : Timer x compare 2
    Timer A compare 2 event forces the output to its active state.
  17. Bit 3 CMP1 : Timer x compare 1
    Timer A compare 1 event forces the output to its active state.

Bit 2 PER : Timer x period

Timer A period event forces the output to its active state.

Note: In up/down mode (UDM bit set to 1), the counter period event is defined as per the OUTROM[1:0] bit setting.

Bit 1 RESYNC : Timer A resynchronization

Timer A reset event coming solely from software or SYNC input forces the output to its active state.

Note: Other timer reset are not affecting the output when RESYNC=1.

Bit 0 SST : Software set trigger

This bit forces the output to its active state. This bit can only be set by software and is reset by hardware.

Note: This bit is not preloaded.

28.5.29 HRTIM timer x output 2 set register (HRTIM_SETx2R) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x0C4

Address offset: Block B: 0x144

Address offset: Block C: 0x1C4

Address offset: Block D: 0x244

Address offset: Block E: 0x2C4

Address offset: Block F: 0x344

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
UPDATEEXT EVNT10EXT EVNT9EXT EVNT8EXT EVNT7EXT EVNT6EXT EVNT5EXT EVNT4EXT EVNT3EXT EVNT2EXT EVNT1TIM EVNT9TIM EVNT8TIM EVNT7TIM EVNT6TIM EVNT5
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
TIM EVNT4TIM EVNT3TIM EVNT2TIM EVNT1MST CMP4MST CMP3MST CMP2MST CMP1MST PERCMP4CMP3CMP2CMP1PERRESYNCSST
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bit 31 UPDATE : Registers update (transfer preload to active)

Register update event forces the output to its active state.

Bit 30 EXT EVNT10 : External event 10

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 29 EXT EVNT9 : External event 9

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 28 EXT EVNT8 : External event 8

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 27 EXT EVNT7 : External event 7

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 26 EXT EVNT6 : External event 6

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

  1. Bit 25 EXTEVNT5 : External event 5
    Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.
  2. Bit 24 EXTEVNT4 : External event 4
    Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.
  3. Bit 23 EXTEVNT3 : External event 3
    Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.
  4. Bit 22 EXTEVNT2 : External event 2
    Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.
  5. Bit 21 EXTEVNT1 : External event 1
    External event 1 forces the output to its active state.
  6. Bit 20 TIMEVNT9 : Timer event 9
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  7. Bit 19 TIMEVNT8 : Timer event 8
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  8. Bit 18 TIMEVNT7 : Timer event 7
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  9. Bit 17 TIMEVNT6 : Timer event 6
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  10. Bit 16 TIMEVNT5 : Timer event 5
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  11. Bit 15 TIMEVNT4 : Timer event 4
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  12. Bit 14 TIMEVNT3 : Timer event 3
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  13. Bit 13 TIMEVNT2 : Timer event 2
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  14. Bit 12 TIMEVNT1 : Timer event 1
    Timers event 1 forces the output to its active state (refer to Table 234 for timer events assignments).
  15. Bit 11 MSTCMP4 : Master compare 4
    Master timer compare 4 event forces the output to its active state.
  16. Bit 10 MSTCMP3 : Master compare 3
    Master timer compare 3 event forces the output to its active state.
  17. Bit 9 MSTCMP2 : Master compare 2
    Master timer compare 2 event forces the output to its active state.
  18. Bit 8 MSTCMP1 : Master compare 1
    Master timer compare 1 event forces the output to its active state.
  19. Bit 7 MSTPER : Master period
    The master timer counter roll-over in continuous mode, or to the master timer reset in single-shot mode forces the output to its active state.
  20. Bit 6 CMP4 : Timer x compare 4
    Timer A compare 4 event forces the output to its active state.

Bit 5 CMP3 : Timer x compare 3

Timer A compare 3 event forces the output to its active state.

Bit 4 CMP2 : Timer x compare 2

Timer A compare 2 event forces the output to its active state.

Bit 3 CMP1 : Timer x compare 1

Timer A compare 1 event forces the output to its active state.

Bit 2 PER : Timer x period

Timer A period event forces the output to its active state.

Note: In up/down mode (UDM bit set to 1), the counter period event is defined as per the OUTROM[1:0] bit setting.

Bit 1 RESYNC : Timer A resynchronization

Timer A reset event coming solely from software or SYNC input forces the output to its active state.

Note: Other timer reset are not affecting the output when RESYNC=1.

Bit 0 SST : Software set trigger

This bit forces the output to its active state. This bit can only be set by software and is reset by hardware.

Note: This bit is not preloaded.

28.5.30 HRTIM timer x output 2 reset register (HRTIM_RSTx2R) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x0C8

Address offset: Block B: 0x148

Address offset: Block C: 0x1C8

Address offset: Block D: 0x248

Address offset: Block E: 0x2C8

Address offset: Block F: 0x348

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
UPDATEEXT EVNT10EXT EVNT9EXT EVNT8EXT EVNT7EXT EVNT6EXT EVNT5EXT EVNT4EXT EVNT3EXT EVNT2EXT EVNT1TIM EVNT9TIM EVNT8TIM EVNT7TIM EVNT6TIM EVNT5
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
TIM EVNT4TIM EVNT3TIM EVNT2TIM EVNT1MST CMP4MST CMP3MST CMP2MST CMP1MST PERCMP4CMP3CMP2CMP1PERRESYNCSST
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bit 31 UPDATE : Registers update (transfer preload to active)

Register update event forces the output to its active state.

Bit 30 EXTEVNT10 : External event 10

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 29 EXTEVNT9 : External event 9

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 28 EXTEVNT8 : External event 8

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 27 EXTEVNT7 : External event 7

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 26 EXTEVNT6 : External event 6

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 25 EXTEVNT5 : External event 5

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 24 EXTEVNT4 : External event 4

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 23 EXTEVNT3 : External event 3

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 22 EXTEVNT2 : External event 2

Refer to EXTEVNT1 description.

Bit 21 EXTEVNT1 : External event 1

External event 1 forces the output to its active state.

Bit 20 TIMEVNT9 : Timer event 9

Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.

  1. Bit 19 TIMEVNT8 : Timer event 8
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  2. Bit 18 TIMEVNT7 : Timer event 7
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  3. Bit 17 TIMEVNT6 : Timer event 6
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  4. Bit 16 TIMEVNT5 : Timer event 5
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  5. Bit 15 TIMEVNT4 : Timer event 4
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  6. Bit 14 TIMEVNT3 : Timer event 3
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  7. Bit 13 TIMEVNT2 : Timer event 2
    Refer to TIMEVNT1 description.
  8. Bit 12 TIMEVNT1 : Timer event 1
    Timers event 1 forces the output to its active state (refer to Table 234 for timer events assignments).
  9. Bit 11 MSTCMP4 : Master compare 4
    Master timer compare 4 event forces the output to its active state.
  10. Bit 10 MSTCMP3 : Master compare 3
    Master timer compare 3 event forces the output to its active state.
  11. Bit 9 MSTCMP2 : Master compare 2
    Master timer compare 2 event forces the output to its active state.
  12. Bit 8 MSTCMP1 : Master compare 1
    Master timer compare 1 event forces the output to its active state.
  13. Bit 7 MSTPER : Master period
    The master timer counter roll-over in continuous mode, or to the master timer reset in single-shot mode forces the output to its active state.
  14. Bit 6 CMP4 : Timer x compare 4
    Timer A compare 4 event forces the output to its active state.
  15. Bit 5 CMP3 : Timer x compare 3
    Timer A compare 3 event forces the output to its active state.
  16. Bit 4 CMP2 : Timer x compare 2
    Timer A compare 2 event forces the output to its active state.
  17. Bit 3 CMP1 : Timer x compare 1
    Timer A compare 1 event forces the output to its active state.

Bit 2 PER : Timer x period

Timer A period event forces the output to its active state.

Note: In up/down mode (UDM bit set to 1), the counter period event is defined as per the OUTROM[1:0] bit setting.

Bit 1 RESYNC : Timer A resynchronization

Timer A reset event coming solely from software or SYNC input forces the output to its active state.

Note: Other timer reset are not affecting the output when RESYNC=1.

Bit 0 SST : Software set trigger

This bit forces the output to its active state. This bit can only be set by software and is reset by hardware.

Note: This bit is not preloaded.

28.5.31 HRTIM timer x external event filtering register 1 (HRTIM_EEFxR1) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x0CC

Address offset: Block B: 0x14C

Address offset: Block C: 0x1CC

Address offset: Block D: 0x24C

Address offset: Block E: 0x2CC

Address offset: Block F: 0x34C

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.EE5FLTR[3:0]EE5LTCHRes.EE4FLTR[3:0]EE4LTCHRes.EE3FLTR[3]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
EE3FLTR[2:0]EE3LTCHRes.EE2FLTR[3:0]EE2LTCHRes.EE1FLTR[3:0]EE1LTCH
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:29 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 28:25 EE5FLTR[3:0] : External event 5 filter
Refer to EE1FLTR[3:0] description.

Bit 24 EE5LTCH : External event 5 latch
Refer to EE1LTCH description

Bit 23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 22:19 EE4FLTR[3:0] : External event 4 filter
Refer to EE1FLTR[3:0] description.

Bit 18 EE4LTCH : External event 4 latch
Refer to EE1LTCH description

Bit 17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 16:13 EE3FLTR[3:0] : External event 3 filter
Refer to EE1FLTR[3:0] description.

Bit 12 EE3LTCH : External event 3 latch
Refer to EE1LTCH description

Bit 11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 10:7 EE2FLTR[3:0] : External event 2 filter
Refer to EE1FLTR[3:0] description.

Bit 6 EE2LTCH : External event 2 latch
Refer to EE1LTCH description.

Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 4:1 EE1FLTR[3:0] : External event 1 filter

Note: Whenever a compare register is used for filtering, the value must be strictly above 0.
This bitfield must not be modified once the counter is enabled (TxCEN bit set)

Bit 0 EE1LTCH : External event 1 latch

Note: A timeout event is generated in window mode (EE1FLTR[3:0]=1101, 1110, 1111) if EE1LTCH = 0, except if the external event is programmed in fast mode (EEFAST = 1).
This bitfield must not be modified once the counter is enabled (TxCEN bit set).

28.5.32 HRTIM timer x external event filtering register 2 (HRTIM_EEFxR2) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x0D0

Address offset: Block B: 0x150

Address offset: Block C: 0x1D0

Address offset: Block D: 0x250

Address offset: Block E: 0x2D0

Address offset: Block F: 0x350

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.EE10FLTR[3:0]EE10LTCHRes.EE9FLTR[3:0]EE9LTCHRes.EE8FLTR[3:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
EE8FLTR[2:0]EE8LTCHRes.EE7FLTR[3:0]EE7LTCHRes.EE6FLTR[3:0]EE6LTCH
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:29 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 28:25 EE10FLTR[3:0] : External event 10 filter

Refer to EE1FLTR[3:0] description.

Bit 24 EE10LTCH : External event 10 latch

Refer to EE1LTCH description.

Bit 23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 22:19 EE9FLTR[3:0] : External event 9 filter

Refer to EE1FLTR[3:0] description.

Bit 18 EE9LTCH : External event 9 latch

Refer to EE1LTCH description.

Bit 17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 16:13 EE8FLTR[3:0] : External event 8 filter

Refer to EE1FLTR[3:0] description.

Bit 12 EE8LTCH : External event 8 latch

Refer to EE1LTCH description.

Bit 11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 10:7 EE7FLTR[3:0] : External event 7 filter

Refer to EE1FLTR[3:0] description.

Bit 6 EE7LTCH : External event 7 latch

Refer to EE1LTCH description.

Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 4:1 EE6FLTR[3:0] : External event 6 filter
Refer to EE1FLTR[3:0] description.

Bit 0 EE6LTCH : External event 6 latch
Refer to EE1LTCH description.

28.5.33 HRTIM timer A reset register (HRTIM_RSTAR)

Address offset: 0x0D4

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
TIMF
CMP2
TIME
CMP4
TIME
CMP2
TIME
CMP1
TIMD
CMP4
TIMD
CMP2
TIMD
CMP1
TIMC
CMP4
TIMC
CMP2
TIMC
CMP1
TIMB
CMP4
TIMB
CMP2
TIMB
CMP1
EXT
EVNT
10
EXT
EVNT9
EXT
EVNT8
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
EXT
EVNT7
EXT
EVNT6
EXT
EVNT5
EXT
EVNT4
EXT
EVNT3
EXT
EVNT2
EXT
EVNT1
MST
CMP4
MST
CMP3
MST
CMP2
MST
CMP1
MST
PER
CMP4CMP2UPDTTIMF
CMP1
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bit 31 TIMFCMP2 : Timer F compare 2

The timer A counter is reset upon timer F Compare 2 event.

Bit 30 TIMECMP4 : Timer E compare 4

The timer A counter is reset upon timer E compare 4 event.

Bit 29 TIMECMP2 : Timer E compare 2

The timer A counter is reset upon timer E compare 2 event.

Bit 28 TIMECMP1 : Timer E compare 1

The timer A counter is reset upon timer E compare 1 event.

Bit 27 TIMDCMP4 : Timer D compare 4

The timer A counter is reset upon timer D compare 4 event.

Bit 26 TIMDCMP2 : Timer D compare 2

The timer A counter is reset upon timer D compare 2 event.

Bit 25 TIMDCMP1 : Timer D compare 1

The timer A counter is reset upon timer D compare 1 event.

Bit 24 TIMCCMP4 : Timer C compare 4

The timer A counter is reset upon timer C compare 4 event.

Bit 23 TIMCCMP2 : Timer C compare 2

The timer A counter is reset upon timer C compare 2 event.

Bit 22 TIMCCMP1 : Timer C compare 1

The timer A counter is reset upon timer C compare 1 event.

Bit 21 TIMBCMP4 : Timer B compare 4

The timer A counter is reset upon timer B compare 4 event.

Bit 20 TIMBCMP2 : Timer B compare 2

The timer A counter is reset upon timer B compare 2 event.

  1. Bit 19 TIMBCMP1 : Timer B compare 1
    The timer A counter is reset upon timer B compare 1 event.
  2. Bit 18 EXTEVNT10 : External event
    The timer A counter is reset upon external event 10.
  3. Bit 17 EXTEVNT9 : External event 9
    The timer A counter is reset upon external event 9.
  4. Bit 16 EXTEVNT8 : External event 8
    The timer A counter is reset upon external event 8.
  5. Bit 15 EXTEVNT7 : External event 7
    The timer A counter is reset upon external event 7.
  6. Bit 14 EXTEVNT6 : External event 6
    The timer A counter is reset upon external event 6.
  7. Bit 13 EXTEVNT5 : External event 5
    The timer A counter is reset upon external event 5.
  8. Bit 12 EXTEVNT4 : External event 4
    The timer A counter is reset upon external event 4.
  9. Bit 11 EXTEVNT3 : External event 3
    The timer A counter is reset upon external event 3.
  10. Bit 10 EXTEVNT2 : External event 2
    The timer A counter is reset upon external event 2.
  11. Bit 9 EXTEVNT1 : External event 1
    The timer A counter is reset upon external event 1.
  12. Bit 8 MSTCMP4 : Master compare 4
    The timer A counter is reset upon master timer compare 4 event.
  13. Bit 7 MSTCMP3 : Master compare 3
    The timer A counter is reset upon master timer compare 3 event.
  14. Bit 6 MSTCMP2 : Master compare 2
    The timer A counter is reset upon master timer compare 2 event.
  15. Bit 5 MSTCMP1 : Master compare 1
    The timer A counter is reset upon master timer compare 1 event.
  16. Bit 4 MSTPER : Master timer period
    The timer A counter is reset upon master timer period event.
  17. Bit 3 CMP4 : Timer A compare 4 reset
    The timer A counter is reset upon timer A compare 4 event.
  18. Bit 2 CMP2 : Timer A compare 2 reset
    The timer A counter is reset upon timer A compare 2 event.
  19. Bit 1 UPDT : Timer A update reset
    The timer A counter is reset upon update event.
  20. Bit 0 TIMFCMP1 : Timer F compare 1
    The timer A counter is reset upon timer F compare 1 event.

28.5.34 HRTIM timer B reset register (HRTIM_RSTBR)

Address offset: 0x154

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
TIMF
CMP2
TIME
CMP4
TIME
CMP2
TIME
CMP1
TIMD
CMP4
TIMD
CMP2
TIMD
CMP1
TIMC
CMP4
TIMC
CMP2
TIMC
CMP1
TIMA
CMP4
TIMA
CMP2
TIMA
CMP1
EXT
EVNT
10
EXT
EVNT9
EXT
EVNT8
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
EXT
EVNT7
EXT
EVNT6
EXT
EVNT5
EXT
EVNT4
EXT
EVNT3
EXT
EVNT2
EXT
EVNT1
MST
CMP4
MST
CMP3
MST
CMP2
MST
CMP1
MST
PER
CMP4CMP2UPDTTIMF
CMP1
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
  1. Bit 31 TIMFCMP2 : Timer F compare 2
    The timer B counter is reset upon timer F Compare 2 event.
  2. Bit 30 TIMECMP4 : Timer E compare 4
    The timer B counter is reset upon timer E compare 4 event.
  3. Bit 29 TIMECMP2 : Timer E compare 2
    The timer B counter is reset upon timer E compare 2 event.
  4. Bit 28 TIMECMP1 : Timer E compare 1
    The timer B counter is reset upon timer E compare 1 event.
  5. Bit 27 TIMDCMP4 : Timer D compare 4
    The timer B counter is reset upon timer D compare 4 event.
  6. Bit 26 TIMDCMP2 : Timer D compare 2
    The timer B counter is reset upon timer D compare 2 event.
  7. Bit 25 TIMDCMP1 : Timer D compare 1
    The timer B counter is reset upon timer D compare 1 event.
  8. Bit 24 TIMCCMP4 : Timer C compare 4
    The timer B counter is reset upon timer C compare 4 event.
  9. Bit 23 TIMCCMP2 : Timer C compare 2
    The timer B counter is reset upon timer C compare 2 event.
  10. Bit 22 TIMCCMP1 : Timer C compare 1
    The timer B counter is reset upon timer C compare 1 event.
  11. Bit 21 TIMACMP4 : Timer A compare 4
    The timer B counter is reset upon timer A compare 4 event.
  12. Bit 20 TIMACMP2 : Timer A compare 2
    The timer B counter is reset upon timer A compare 2 event.
  13. Bit 19 TIMACMP1 : Timer A compare 1
    The timer B counter is reset upon timer A compare 1 event.
  14. Bit 18 EXTEVNT10 : External event
    The timer B counter is reset upon external event 10.
  15. Bit 17 EXTEVNT9 : External event 9
    The timer B counter is reset upon external event 9.
  1. Bit 16 EXTEVNT8 : External event 8
    The timer B counter is reset upon external event 8.
  2. Bit 15 EXTEVNT7 : External event 7
    The timer B counter is reset upon external event 7.
  3. Bit 14 EXTEVNT6 : External event 6
    The timer B counter is reset upon external event 6.
  4. Bit 13 EXTEVNT5 : External event 5
    The timer B counter is reset upon external event 5.
  5. Bit 12 EXTEVNT4 : External event 4
    The timer B counter is reset upon external event 4.
  6. Bit 11 EXTEVNT3 : External event 3
    The timer B counter is reset upon external event 3.
  7. Bit 10 EXTEVNT2 : External event 2
    The timer B counter is reset upon external event 2.
  8. Bit 9 EXTEVNT1 : External event 1
    The timer B counter is reset upon external event 1.
  9. Bit 8 MSTCMP4 : Master compare 4
    The timer B counter is reset upon master timer compare 4 event.
  10. Bit 7 MSTCMP3 : Master compare 3
    The timer B counter is reset upon master timer compare 3 event.
  11. Bit 6 MSTCMP2 : Master compare 2
    The timer B counter is reset upon master timer compare 2 event.
  12. Bit 5 MSTCMP1 : Master compare 1
    The timer B counter is reset upon master timer compare 1 event.
  13. Bit 4 MSTPER : Master timer period
    The timer B counter is reset upon master timer period event.
  14. Bit 3 CMP4 : Timer B compare 4 reset
    The timer B counter is reset upon timer B compare 4 event.
  15. Bit 2 CMP2 : Timer B compare 2 reset
    The timer B counter is reset upon timer B compare 2 event.
  16. Bit 1 UPDT : Timer B update reset
    The timer B counter is reset upon update event.
  17. Bit 0 TIMFCMP1 : Timer F compare 1
    The timer B counter is reset upon timer F compare 1 event.

28.5.35 HRTIM timer C reset register (HRTIM_RSTCR)

Address offset: 0x1D4

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
TIMF
CMP2
TIME
CMP4
TIME
CMP2
TIME
CMP1
TIMD
CMP4
TIMD
CMP2
TIMD
CMP1
TIMB
CMP4
TIMB
CMP2
TIMB
CMP1
TIMA
CMP4
TIMA
CMP2
TIMA
CMP1
EXT
EVNT
10
EXT
EVNT9
EXT
EVNT8
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
EXT
EVNT7
EXT
EVNT6
EXT
EVNT5
EXT
EVNT4
EXT
EVNT3
EXT
EVNT2
EXT
EVNT1
MST
CMP4
MST
CMP3
MST
CMP2
MST
CMP1
MST
PER
CMP4CMP2UPDTTIMF
CMP1
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
  1. Bit 31 TIMFCMP2 : Timer F compare 2
    The timer C counter is reset upon timer F Compare 2 event.
  2. Bit 30 TIMECMP4 : Timer E compare 4
    The timer C counter is reset upon timer E compare 4 event.
  3. Bit 29 TIMECMP2 : Timer E compare 2
    The timer C counter is reset upon timer E compare 2 event.
  4. Bit 28 TIMECMP1 : Timer E compare 1
    The timer C counter is reset upon timer E compare 1 event.
  5. Bit 27 TIMDCMP4 : Timer D compare 4
    The timer C counter is reset upon timer D compare 4 event.
  6. Bit 26 TIMDCMP2 : Timer D compare 2
    The timer C counter is reset upon timer D compare 2 event.
  7. Bit 25 TIMDCMP1 : Timer D compare 1
    The timer C counter is reset upon timer D compare 1 event.
  8. Bit 24 TIMBCMP4 : Timer B compare 4
    The timer C counter is reset upon timer B compare 4 event.
  9. Bit 23 TIMBCMP2 : Timer B compare 2
    The timer C counter is reset upon timer B compare 2 event.
  10. Bit 22 TIMBCMP1 : Timer B compare 1
    The timer C counter is reset upon timer B compare 1 event.
  11. Bit 21 TIMACMP4 : Timer A compare 4
    The timer C counter is reset upon timer A compare 4 event.
  12. Bit 20 TIMACMP2 : Timer A compare 2
    The timer C counter is reset upon timer A compare 2 event.
  13. Bit 19 TIMACMP1 : Timer A compare 1
    The timer C counter is reset upon timer A compare 1 event.
  14. Bit 18 EXTEVNT10 : External event
    The timer C counter is reset upon external event 10.
  15. Bit 17 EXTEVNT9 : External event 9
    The timer C counter is reset upon external event 9.
  1. Bit 16 EXTEVNT8 : External event 8
    The timer C counter is reset upon external event 8.
  2. Bit 15 EXTEVNT7 : External event 7
    The timer C counter is reset upon external event 7.
  3. Bit 14 EXTEVNT6 : External event 6
    The timer C counter is reset upon external event 6.
  4. Bit 13 EXTEVNT5 : External event 5
    The timer C counter is reset upon external event 5.
  5. Bit 12 EXTEVNT4 : External event 4
    The timer C counter is reset upon external event 4.
  6. Bit 11 EXTEVNT3 : External event 3
    The timer C counter is reset upon external event 3.
  7. Bit 10 EXTEVNT2 : External event 2
    The timer C counter is reset upon external event 2.
  8. Bit 9 EXTEVNT1 : External event 1
    The timer C counter is reset upon external event 1.
  9. Bit 8 MSTCMP4 : Master compare 4
    The timer C counter is reset upon master timer compare 4 event.
  10. Bit 7 MSTCMP3 : Master compare 3
    The timer C counter is reset upon master timer compare 3 event.
  11. Bit 6 MSTCMP2 : Master compare 2
    The timer C counter is reset upon master timer compare 2 event.
  12. Bit 5 MSTCMP1 : Master compare 1
    The timer C counter is reset upon master timer compare 1 event.
  13. Bit 4 MSTPER : Master timer period
    The timer C counter is reset upon master timer period event.
  14. Bit 3 CMP4 : Timer C compare 4 reset
    The timer C counter is reset upon timer C compare 4 event.
  15. Bit 2 CMP2 : Timer C compare 2 reset
    The timer C counter is reset upon timer C compare 2 event.
  16. Bit 1 UPDT : Timer C update reset
    The timer C counter is reset upon update event.
  17. Bit 0 TIMFCMP1 : Timer F compare 1
    The timer C counter is reset upon timer F compare 1 event.

28.5.36 HRTIM timer D reset register (HRTIM_RSTDR)

Address offset: 0x254

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
TIMF
CMP2
TIME
CMP4
TIME
CMP2
TIME
CMP1
TIMC
CMP4
TIMC
CMP2
TIMC
CMP1
TIMB
CMP4
TIMB
CMP2
TIMB
CMP1
TIMA
CMP4
TIMA
CMP2
TIMA
CMP1
EXT
EVNT
10
EXT
EVNT9
EXT
EVNT8
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
EXT
EVNT7
EXT
EVNT6
EXT
EVNT5
EXT
EVNT4
EXT
EVNT3
EXT
EVNT2
EXT
EVNT1
MST
CMP4
MST
CMP3
MST
CMP2
MST
CMP1
MST
PER
CMP4CMP2UPDTTIMF
CMP1
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
  1. Bit 31 TIMFCMP2 : Timer F compare 2
    The timer D counter is reset upon timer F Compare 2 event.
  2. Bit 30 TIMECMP4 : Timer E compare 4
    The timer D counter is reset upon timer E compare 4 event.
  3. Bit 29 TIMECMP2 : Timer E compare 2
    The timer D counter is reset upon timer E compare 2 event.
  4. Bit 28 TIMECMP1 : Timer E compare 1
    The timer D counter is reset upon timer E compare 1 event.
  5. Bit 27 TIMCCMP4 : Timer C compare 4
    The timer D counter is reset upon timer C compare 4 event.
  6. Bit 26 TIMCCMP2 : Timer C compare 2
    The timer D counter is reset upon timer C compare 2 event.
  7. Bit 25 TIMCCMP1 : Timer C compare 1
    The timer D counter is reset upon timer C compare 1 event.
  8. Bit 24 TIMBCMP4 : Timer B compare 4
    The timer D counter is reset upon timer B compare 4 event.
  9. Bit 23 TIMBCMP2 : Timer B compare 2
    The timer D counter is reset upon timer B compare 2 event.
  10. Bit 22 TIMBCMP1 : Timer B compare 1
    The timer D counter is reset upon timer B compare 1 event.
  11. Bit 21 TIMACMP4 : Timer A compare 4
    The timer D counter is reset upon timer A compare 4 event.
  12. Bit 20 TIMACMP2 : Timer A compare 2
    The timer D counter is reset upon timer A compare 2 event.
  13. Bit 19 TIMACMP1 : Timer A compare 1
    The timer D counter is reset upon timer A compare 1 event.
  14. Bit 18 EXTEVNT10 : External event
    The timer D counter is reset upon external event 10.
  15. Bit 17 EXTEVNT9 : External event 9
    The timer D counter is reset upon external event 9.
  1. Bit 16 EXTEVNT8 : External event 8
    The timer D counter is reset upon external event 8.
  2. Bit 15 EXTEVNT7 : External event 7
    The timer D counter is reset upon external event 7.
  3. Bit 14 EXTEVNT6 : External event 6
    The timer D counter is reset upon external event 6.
  4. Bit 13 EXTEVNT5 : External event 5
    The timer D counter is reset upon external event 5.
  5. Bit 12 EXTEVNT4 : External event 4
    The timer D counter is reset upon external event 4.
  6. Bit 11 EXTEVNT3 : External event 3
    The timer D counter is reset upon external event 3.
  7. Bit 10 EXTEVNT2 : External event 2
    The timer D counter is reset upon external event 2.
  8. Bit 9 EXTEVNT1 : External event 1
    The timer D counter is reset upon external event 1.
  9. Bit 8 MSTCMP4 : Master compare 4
    The timer D counter is reset upon master timer compare 4 event.
  10. Bit 7 MSTCMP3 : Master compare 3
    The timer D counter is reset upon master timer compare 3 event.
  11. Bit 6 MSTCMP2 : Master compare 2
    The timer D counter is reset upon master timer compare 2 event.
  12. Bit 5 MSTCMP1 : Master compare 1
    The timer D counter is reset upon master timer compare 1 event.
  13. Bit 4 MSTPER : Master timer period
    The timer D counter is reset upon master timer period event.
  14. Bit 3 CMP4 : Timer D compare 4 reset
    The timer D counter is reset upon timer D compare 4 event.
  15. Bit 2 CMP2 : Timer D compare 2 reset
    The timer D counter is reset upon timer D compare 2 event.
  16. Bit 1 UPDT : Timer D update reset
    The timer D counter is reset upon update event.
  17. Bit 0 TIMFCMP1 : Timer F compare 1
    The timer D counter is reset upon timer F compare 1 event.

28.5.37 HRTIM timer E reset register (HRTIM_RSTER)

Address offset: 0x2D4

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
TIMF
CMP2
TIMD
CMP4
TIMD
CMP2
TIMD
CMP1
TIMC
CMP4
TIMC
CMP2
TIMC
CMP1
TIMB
CMP4
TIMB
CMP2
TIMB
CMP1
TIMA
CMP4
TIMA
CMP2
TIMA
CMP1
EXT
EVNT
10
EXT
EVNT9
EXT
EVNT8
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
EXT
EVNT7
EXT
EVNT6
EXT
EVNT5
EXT
EVNT4
EXT
EVNT3
EXT
EVNT2
EXT
EVNT1
MST
CMP4
MST
CMP3
MST
CMP2
MST
CMP1
MST
PER
CMP4CMP2UPDTTIMF
CMP1
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
  1. Bit 31 TIMFCMP2 : Timer F compare 2
    The timer E counter is reset upon timer F Compare 2 event.
  2. Bit 30 TIMDCMP4 : Timer D compare 4
    The timer E counter is reset upon timer D compare 4 event.
  3. Bit 29 TIMDCMP2 : Timer D compare 2
    The timer E counter is reset upon timer D compare 2 event.
  4. Bit 28 TIMDCMP1 : Timer D compare 1
    The timer E counter is reset upon timer D compare 1 event.
  5. Bit 27 TIMCCMP4 : Timer C compare 4
    The timer E counter is reset upon timer C compare 4 event.
  6. Bit 26 TIMCCMP2 : Timer C compare 2
    The timer E counter is reset upon timer C compare 2 event.
  7. Bit 25 TIMCCMP1 : Timer C compare 1
    The timer E counter is reset upon timer C compare 1 event.
  8. Bit 24 TIMBCMP4 : Timer B compare 4
    The timer E counter is reset upon timer B compare 4 event.
  9. Bit 23 TIMBCMP2 : Timer B compare 2
    The timer E counter is reset upon timer B compare 2 event.
  10. Bit 22 TIMBCMP1 : Timer B compare 1
    The timer E counter is reset upon timer B compare 1 event.
  11. Bit 21 TIMACMP4 : Timer A compare 4
    The timer E counter is reset upon timer A compare 4 event.
  12. Bit 20 TIMACMP2 : Timer A compare 2
    The timer E counter is reset upon timer A compare 2 event.
  13. Bit 19 TIMACMP1 : Timer A compare 1
    The timer E counter is reset upon timer A compare 1 event.
  14. Bit 18 EXTEVNT10 : External event
    The timer E counter is reset upon external event 10.
  15. Bit 17 EXTEVNT9 : External event 9
    The timer E counter is reset upon external event 9.
  1. Bit 16 EXTEVNT8 : External event 8
    The timer E counter is reset upon external event 8.
  2. Bit 15 EXTEVNT7 : External event 7
    The timer E counter is reset upon external event 7.
  3. Bit 14 EXTEVNT6 : External event 6
    The timer E counter is reset upon external event 6.
  4. Bit 13 EXTEVNT5 : External event 5
    The timer E counter is reset upon external event 5.
  5. Bit 12 EXTEVNT4 : External event 4
    The timer E counter is reset upon external event 4.
  6. Bit 11 EXTEVNT3 : External event 3
    The timer E counter is reset upon external event 3.
  7. Bit 10 EXTEVNT2 : External event 2
    The timer E counter is reset upon external event 2.
  8. Bit 9 EXTEVNT1 : External event 1
    The timer E counter is reset upon external event 1.
  9. Bit 8 MSTCMP4 : Master compare 4
    The timer E counter is reset upon master timer compare 4 event.
  10. Bit 7 MSTCMP3 : Master compare 3
    The timer E counter is reset upon master timer compare 3 event.
  11. Bit 6 MSTCMP2 : Master compare 2
    The timer E counter is reset upon master timer compare 2 event.
  12. Bit 5 MSTCMP1 : Master compare 1
    The timer E counter is reset upon master timer compare 1 event.
  13. Bit 4 MSTPER : Master timer period
    The timer E counter is reset upon master timer period event.
  14. Bit 3 CMP4 : Timer E compare 4 reset
    The timer E counter is reset upon timer E compare 4 event.
  15. Bit 2 CMP2 : Timer E compare 2 reset
    The timer E counter is reset upon timer E compare 2 event.
  16. Bit 1 UPDT : Timer E update reset
    The timer E counter is reset upon update event.
  17. Bit 0 TIMFCMP1 : Timer F compare 1
    The timer E counter is reset upon timer F compare 1 event.

28.5.38 HRTIM timer F reset register (HRTIM_RSTFR)

Address offset: 0x354

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
TIME
CMP2
TIMD
CMP4
TIMD
CMP2
TIMD
CMP1
TIMC
CMP4
TIMC
CMP2
TIMC
CMP1
TIMB
CMP4
TIMB
CMP2
TIMB
CMP1
TIMA
CMP4
TIMA
CMP2
TIMA
CMP1
EXT
EVNT
10
EXT
EVNT9
EXT
EVNT8
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
EXT
EVNT7
EXT
EVNT6
EXT
EVNT5
EXT
EVNT4
EXT
EVNT3
EXT
EVNT2
EXT
EVNT1
MST
CMP4
MST
CMP3
MST
CMP2
MST
CMP1
MST
PER
CMP4CMP2UPDTTIME
CMP1
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
  1. Bit 31 TIMECMP2 : Timer E compare 2
    The timer F counter is reset upon timer E Compare 2 event.
  2. Bit 30 TIMDCMP4 : Timer D compare 4
    The timer F counter is reset upon timer D compare 4 event.
  3. Bit 29 TIMDCMP2 : Timer D compare 2
    The timer F counter is reset upon timer D compare 2 event.
  4. Bit 28 TIMDCMP1 : Timer D compare 1
    The timer F counter is reset upon timer D compare 1 event.
  5. Bit 27 TIMCCMP4 : Timer C compare 4
    The timer F counter is reset upon timer C compare 4 event.
  6. Bit 26 TIMCCMP2 : Timer C compare 2
    The timer F counter is reset upon timer C compare 2 event.
  7. Bit 25 TIMCCMP1 : Timer C compare 1
    The timer F counter is reset upon timer C compare 1 event.
  8. Bit 24 TIMBCMP4 : Timer B compare 4
    The timer F counter is reset upon timer B compare 4 event.
  9. Bit 23 TIMBCMP2 : Timer B compare 2
    The timer F counter is reset upon timer B compare 2 event.
  10. Bit 22 TIMBCMP1 : Timer B compare 1
    The timer F counter is reset upon timer B compare 1 event.
  11. Bit 21 TIMACMP4 : Timer A compare 4
    The timer F counter is reset upon timer A compare 4 event.
  12. Bit 20 TIMACMP2 : Timer A compare 2
    The timer F counter is reset upon timer A compare 2 event.
  13. Bit 19 TIMACMP1 : Timer A compare 1
    The timer F counter is reset upon timer A compare 1 event.
  14. Bit 18 EXTEVNT10 : External event
    The timer F counter is reset upon external event 10.
  15. Bit 17 EXTEVNT9 : External event 9
    The timer F counter is reset upon external event 9.
  1. Bit 16 EXTEVNT8 : External event 8
    The timer F counter is reset upon external event 8.
  2. Bit 15 EXTEVNT7 : External event 7
    The timer F counter is reset upon external event 7.
  3. Bit 14 EXTEVNT6 : External event 6
    The timer F counter is reset upon external event 6.
  4. Bit 13 EXTEVNT5 : External event 5
    The timer F counter is reset upon external event 5.
  5. Bit 12 EXTEVNT4 : External event 4
    The timer F counter is reset upon external event 4.
  6. Bit 11 EXTEVNT3 : External event 3
    The timer F counter is reset upon external event 3.
  7. Bit 10 EXTEVNT2 : External event 2
    The timer F counter is reset upon external event 2.
  8. Bit 9 EXTEVNT1 : External event 1
    The timer F counter is reset upon external event 1.
  9. Bit 8 MSTCMP4 : Master compare 4
    The timer F counter is reset upon master timer compare 4 event.
  10. Bit 7 MSTCMP3 : Master compare 3
    The timer F counter is reset upon master timer compare 3 event.
  11. Bit 6 MSTCMP2 : Master compare 2
    The timer F counter is reset upon master timer compare 2 event.
  12. Bit 5 MSTCMP1 : Master compare 1
    The timer F counter is reset upon master timer compare 1 event.
  13. Bit 4 MSTPER : Master timer period
    The timer F counter is reset upon master timer period event.
  14. Bit 3 CMP4 : Timer F compare 4 reset
    The timer F counter is reset upon timer F compare 4 event.
  15. Bit 2 CMP2 : Timer F compare 2 reset
    The timer F counter is reset upon timer F compare 2 event.
  16. Bit 1 UPDT : Timer F update reset
    The timer F counter is reset upon update event.
  17. Bit 0 TIMECMP1 : Timer E compare 1
    The timer F counter is reset upon timer E compare 1 event.

28.5.39 HRTIM timer x chopper register (HRTIM_CHPxR) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x0D8

Address offset: Block B: 0x158

Address offset: Block C: 0x1D8

Address offset: Block D: 0x258

Address offset: Block E: 0x2D8

Address offset: Block F: 0x358

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.STRTPW[3:0]CARDTY[2:0]CARFRQ[3:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 10:7 STRTPW[3:0] : Timer x start pulsewidth

This register defines the initial pulsewidth following a rising edge on output signal.

This bitfield cannot be modified when one of the CHPx bits is set.

\( t_{1\text{STPW}} = (\text{STRPW}[3:0]+1) \times 16 \times t_{\text{HRTIM}} \)

0000: 94.1 ns (1/10.625 MHz)

...

1111: 1.51 µs (16/10.625 MHz)

Bits 6:4 CARDTY[2:0] : Timer x chopper duty cycle value

This register defines the duty cycle of the carrier signal. This bitfield cannot be modified when one of the CHPx bits is set.

000: 0/8 (i.e. only 1st pulse is present)

...

111: 7/8

Bits 3:0 CARFRQ[3:0] : Timer x carrier frequency value

This register defines the carrier frequency \( F_{\text{CHPFRQ}} = f_{\text{HRTIM}} / (16 \times (\text{CARFRQ}[3:0]+1)) \) .

This bitfield cannot be modified when one of the CHPx bits is set.

0000: 10.625 MHz ( \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 16 \) )

...

1111: 664 kHz ( \( f_{\text{HRTIM}} / 256 \) )

28.5.40 HRTIM timer A capture 1 control register (HRTIM_CPT1ACR)

Address offset: 0x0DC

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
TE
CMP2
TE
CMP1
TE1
RST
TE1
SET
TD
CMP2
TD
CMP1
TD1
RST
TD1
SET
TC
CMP2
TC
CMP1
TC1
RST
TC1
SET
TB
CMP2
TB
CMP1
TB1
RST
TB1
SET
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
TF
CMP2
TF
CMP1
TF1
RST
TF1
SET
EXEV1
0CPT
EXEV9
CPT
EXEV8
CPT
EXEV7
CPT
EXEV6
CPT
EXEV5
CPT
EXEV4
CPT
EXEV3
CPT
EXEV2
CPT
EXEV1
CPT
UPD
CPT
SW
CPT
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
  1. Bit 31 TECMP2 : Timer E compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  2. Bit 30 TECMP1 : Timer E compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  3. Bit 29 TE1RST : Timer E output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  4. Bit 28 TE1SET : Timer E output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  5. Bit 27 TDCMP2 : Timer D compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  6. Bit 26 TDCMP1 : Timer D compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  7. Bit 25 TD1RST : Timer D output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  8. Bit 24 TD1SET : Timer D output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  9. Bit 23 TCCMP2 : Timer C compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  10. Bit 22 TCCMP1 : Timer C compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  11. Bit 21 TC1RST : Timer C output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  12. Bit 20 TC1SET : Timer C output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  13. Bit 19 TBCMP2 : Timer B compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  14. Bit 18 TBCMP1 : Timer B compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  15. Bit 17 TB1RST : Timer B output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  1. Bit 16 TB1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  2. Bit 15 TFCMP2 : Timer E compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  3. Bit 14 TFCMP1 : Timer F compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  4. Bit 13 TF1RST : Timer F output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  5. Bit 12 TF1SET : Timer F output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  6. Bit 11 EXEV10CPT : External event 10 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description
  7. Bit 10 EXEV9CPT : External event 9 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  8. Bit 9 EXEV8CPT : External event 8 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  9. Bit 8 EXEV7CPT : External event 7 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  10. Bit 7 EXEV6CPT : External event 6 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  11. Bit 6 EXEV5CPT : External event 5 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  12. Bit 5 EXEV4CPT : External event 4 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  13. Bit 4 EXEV3CPT : External event 3 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  14. Bit 3 EXEV2CPT : External event 2 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  15. Bit 2 EXEV1CPT : External event 1 capture
    0: No action
    1: The external event 1 triggers the capture 2
  16. Bit 1 UPDCPT : Update capture
    0: No action
    1: The update event triggers the capture 2
  17. Bit 0 SWCPT : Software capture
    0: No action
    1: This bit forces the capture 2 by software. This bit is set only, reset by hardware.

28.5.41 HRTIM timer B capture 1 control register (HRTIM_CPT1BCR)

Address offset: 0x15C

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
TE
CMP2
TE
CMP1
TE1
RST
TE1
SET
TD
CMP2
TD
CMP1
TD1
RST
TD1
SET
TC
CMP2
TC
CMP1
TC1
RST
TC1
SET
TF
CMP2
TF
CMP1
TF1
RST
TF1
SET
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
TA
CMP2
TA
CMP1
TA1
RST
TA1
SET
EXEV1
0CPT
EXEV9
CPT
EXEV8
CPT
EXEV7
CPT
EXEV6
CPT
EXEV5
CPT
EXEV4
CPT
EXEV3
CPT
EXEV2
CPT
EXEV1
CPT
UPD
CPT
SW
CPT
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
  1. Bit 16 TF1SET : Timer F output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  2. Bit 15 TACMP2 : Timer A compare 2
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 2 triggers capture 2
  3. Bit 14 TACMP1 : Timer A compare 1
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 1 triggers capture 2
  4. Bit 13 TA1RST : Timer B output 1 reset
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output active to inactive transition
  5. Bit 12 TA1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output inactive to active transition
  6. Bit 11 EXEV10CPT : External event 10 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  7. Bit 10 EXEV9CPT : External event 9 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  8. Bit 9 EXEV8CPT : External event 8 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  9. Bit 8 EXEV7CPT : External event 7 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  10. Bit 7 EXEV6CPT : External event 6 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  11. Bit 6 EXEV5CPT : External event 5 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  12. Bit 5 EXEV4CPT : External event 4 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  13. Bit 4 EXEV3CPT : External event 3 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  14. Bit 3 EXEV2CPT : External event 2 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  15. Bit 2 EXEV1CPT : External event 1 capture
    0: No action
    1: The external event 1 triggers the capture 2
  16. Bit 1 UPDCPT : Update capture
    0: No action
    1: The update event triggers the capture 2
  17. Bit 0 SWCPT : Software capture
    0: No action
    1: This bit forces the capture 2 by software. This bit is set only, reset by hardware.

28.5.42 HRTIM timer C capture 1 control register (HRTIM_CPT1CCR)

Address offset: 0x1DC

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
TE
CMP2
TE
CMP1
TE1
RST
TE1
SET
TD
CMP2
TD
CMP1
TD1
RST
TD1
SET
TF
CMP2
TF
CMP1
TF1
RST
TF1
SET
TB
CMP2
TB
CMP1
TB1
RST
TB1
SET
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
TA
CMP2
TA
CMP1
TA1
RST
TA1
SET
EXEV1
0CPT
EXEV9
CPT
EXEV8
CPT
EXEV7
CPT
EXEV6
CPT
EXEV5
CPT
EXEV4
CPT
EXEV3
CPT
EXEV2
CPT
EXEV1
CPT
UPD
CPT
SW
CPT
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
  1. Bit 16 TB1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  2. Bit 15 TACMP2 : Timer A compare 2
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 2 triggers capture 2
  3. Bit 14 TACMP1 : Timer A compare 1
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 1 triggers capture 2
  4. Bit 13 TA1RST : Timer B output 1 reset
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output active to inactive transition
  5. Bit 12 TA1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output inactive to active transition
  6. Bit 11 EXEV10CPT : External event 10 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  7. Bit 10 EXEV9CPT : External event 9 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  8. Bit 9 EXEV8CPT : External event 8 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  9. Bit 8 EXEV7CPT : External event 7 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  10. Bit 7 EXEV6CPT : External event 6 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  11. Bit 6 EXEV5CPT : External event 5 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  12. Bit 5 EXEV4CPT : External event 4 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  13. Bit 4 EXEV3CPT : External event 3 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  14. Bit 3 EXEV2CPT : External event 2 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  15. Bit 2 EXEV1CPT : External event 1 capture
    0: No action
    1: The external event 1 triggers the capture 2
  16. Bit 1 UPDCPT : Update capture
    0: No action
    1: The update event triggers the capture 2
  17. Bit 0 SWCPT : Software capture
    0: No action
    1: This bit forces the capture 2 by software. This bit is set only, reset by hardware.

28.5.43 HRTIM timer D capture 1 control register (HRTIM_CPT1DCR)

Address offset: 0x25C

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
TE
CMP2
TE
CMP1
TE1
RST
TE1
SET
TF
CMP2
TF
CMP1
TF1
RST
TF1
SET
TC
CMP2
TC
CMP1
TC1
RST
TC1
SET
TB
CMP2
TB
CMP1
TB1
RST
TB1
SET
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
TA
CMP2
TA
CMP1
TA1
RST
TA1
SET
EXEV1
0CPT
EXEV9
CPT
EXEV8
CPT
EXEV7
CPT
EXEV6
CPT
EXEV5
CPT
EXEV4
CPT
EXEV3
CPT
EXEV2
CPT
EXEV1
CPT
UPD
CPT
SW
CPT
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
  1. Bit 16 TB1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  2. Bit 15 TACMP2 : Timer A compare 2
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 2 triggers capture 2
  3. Bit 14 TACMP1 : Timer A compare 1
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 1 triggers capture 2
  4. Bit 13 TA1RST : Timer B output 1 reset
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output active to inactive transition
  5. Bit 12 TA1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output inactive to active transition
  6. Bit 11 EXEV10CPT : External event 10 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  7. Bit 10 EXEV9CPT : External event 9 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  8. Bit 9 EXEV8CPT : External event 8 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  9. Bit 8 EXEV7CPT : External event 7 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  10. Bit 7 EXEV6CPT : External event 6 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  11. Bit 6 EXEV5CPT : External event 5 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  12. Bit 5 EXEV4CPT : External event 4 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  13. Bit 4 EXEV3CPT : External event 3 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  14. Bit 3 EXEV2CPT : External event 2 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  15. Bit 2 EXEV1CPT : External event 1 capture
    0: No action
    1: The external event 1 triggers the capture 2
  16. Bit 1 UPDCPT : Update capture
    0: No action
    1: The update event triggers the capture 2
  17. Bit 0 SWCPT : Software capture
    0: No action
    1: This bit forces the capture 2 by software. This bit is set only, reset by hardware.

28.5.44 HRTIM timer E capture 1 control register (HRTIM_CPT1ECR)

Address offset: 0x2DC

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
TF
CMP2
TF
CMP1
TF1
RST
TF1
SET
TD
CMP2
TD
CMP1
TD1
RST
TD1
SET
TC
CMP2
TC
CMP1
TC1
RST
TC1
SET
TB
CMP2
TB
CMP1
TB1
RST
TB1
SET
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
TA
CMP2
TA
CMP1
TA1
RST
TA1
SET
EXEV1
0CPT
EXEV9
CPT
EXEV8
CPT
EXEV7
CPT
EXEV6
CPT
EXEV5
CPT
EXEV4
CPT
EXEV3
CPT
EXEV2
CPT
EXEV1
CPT
UPD
CPT
SW
CPT
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
  1. Bit 31 TF CMP2 : Timer F compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  2. Bit 30 TF CMP1 : Timer F compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  3. Bit 29 TF1 RST : Timer F output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  4. Bit 28 TF1 SET : Timer F output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  5. Bit 27 TD CMP2 : Timer D compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  6. Bit 26 TD CMP1 : Timer D compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  7. Bit 25 TD1 RST : Timer D output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  8. Bit 24 TD1 SET : Timer D output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  9. Bit 23 TC CMP2 : Timer C compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  10. Bit 22 TC CMP1 : Timer C compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  11. Bit 21 TC1 RST : Timer C output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  12. Bit 20 TC1 SET : Timer C output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  13. Bit 19 TB CMP2 : Timer B compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  14. Bit 18 TB CMP1 : Timer B compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  15. Bit 17 TB1 RST : Timer B output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  1. Bit 16 TB1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  2. Bit 15 TACMP2 : Timer A compare 2
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 2 triggers capture 2
  3. Bit 14 TACMP1 : Timer A compare 1
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 1 triggers capture 2
  4. Bit 13 TA1RST : Timer B output 1 reset
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output active to inactive transition
  5. Bit 12 TA1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output inactive to active transition
  6. Bit 11 EXEV10CPT : External event 10 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  7. Bit 10 EXEV9CPT : External event 9 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  8. Bit 9 EXEV8CPT : External event 8 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  9. Bit 8 EXEV7CPT : External event 7 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  10. Bit 7 EXEV6CPT : External event 6 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  11. Bit 6 EXEV5CPT : External event 5 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  12. Bit 5 EXEV4CPT : External event 4 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  13. Bit 4 EXEV3CPT : External event 3 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  14. Bit 3 EXEV2CPT : External event 2 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  15. Bit 2 EXEV1CPT : External event 1 capture
    0: No action
    1: The external event 1 triggers the capture 2
  16. Bit 1 UPDCPT : Update capture
    0: No action
    1: The update event triggers the capture 2
  17. Bit 0 SWCPT : Software capture
    0: No action
    1: This bit forces the capture 2 by software. This bit is set only, reset by hardware.

28.5.45 HRTIM timer F capture 1 control register (HRTIM_CPT1FCR)

Address offset: 0x35C

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
TE
CMP2
TE
CMP1
TE1
RST
TE1
SET
TD
CMP2
TD
CMP1
TD1
RST
TD1
SET
TC
CMP2
TC
CMP1
TC1
RST
TC1
SET
TB
CMP2
TB
CMP1
TB1
RST
TB1
SET
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
TA
CMP2
TA
CMP1
TA1
RST
TA1
SET
EXEV1
0CPT
EXEV9
CPT
EXEV8
CPT
EXEV7
CPT
EXEV6
CPT
EXEV5
CPT
EXEV4
CPT
EXEV3
CPT
EXEV2
CPT
EXEV1
CPT
UPD
CPT
SW
CPT
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
  1. Bit 31 TECMP2 : Timer E compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  2. Bit 30 TECMP1 : Timer E compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  3. Bit 29 TE1RST : Timer E output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  4. Bit 28 TE1SET : Timer E output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  5. Bit 27 TDCMP2 : Timer D compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  6. Bit 26 TDCMP1 : Timer D compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  7. Bit 25 TD1RST : Timer D output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  8. Bit 24 TD1SET : Timer D output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  9. Bit 23 TCCMP2 : Timer C compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  10. Bit 22 TCCMP1 : Timer C compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  11. Bit 21 TC1RST : Timer C output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  12. Bit 20 TC1SET : Timer C output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  13. Bit 19 TBCMP2 : Timer B compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  14. Bit 18 TBCMP1 : Timer B compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  15. Bit 17 TB1RST : Timer B output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  1. Bit 16 TB1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  2. Bit 15 TACMP2 : Timer A compare 2
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 2 triggers capture 2
  3. Bit 14 TACMP1 : Timer A compare 1
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 1 triggers capture 2
  4. Bit 13 TA1RST : Timer B output 1 reset
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output active to inactive transition
  5. Bit 12 TA1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output inactive to active transition
  6. Bit 11 EXEV10CPT : External event 10 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  7. Bit 10 EXEV9CPT : External event 9 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  8. Bit 9 EXEV8CPT : External event 8 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  9. Bit 8 EXEV7CPT : External event 7 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  10. Bit 7 EXEV6CPT : External event 6 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  11. Bit 6 EXEV5CPT : External event 5 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  12. Bit 5 EXEV4CPT : External event 4 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  13. Bit 4 EXEV3CPT : External event 3 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  14. Bit 3 EXEV2CPT : External event 2 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  15. Bit 2 EXEV1CPT : External event 1 capture
    0: No action
    1: The external event 1 triggers the capture 2
  16. Bit 1 UPDCPT : Update capture
    0: No action
    1: The update event triggers the capture 2
  17. Bit 0 SWCPT : Software capture
    0: No action
    1: This bit forces the capture 2 by software. This bit is set only, reset by hardware.

28.5.46 HRTIM timer A capture 2 control register (HRTIM_CPT2ACR)

Address offset: 0x0E0

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
TE
CMP2
TE
CMP1
TE1
RST
TE1
SET
TD
CMP2
TD
CMP1
TD1
RST
TD1
SET
TC
CMP2
TC
CMP1
TC1
RST
TC1
SET
TB
CMP2
TB
CMP1
TB1
RST
TB1
SET
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
TF
CMP2
TF
CMP1
TF1
RST
TF1
SET
EXEV1
0CPT
EXEV9
CPT
EXEV8
CPT
EXEV7
CPT
EXEV6
CPT
EXEV5
CPT
EXEV4
CPT
EXEV3
CPT
EXEV2
CPT
EXEV1
CPT
UPD
CPT
SW
CPT
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
  1. Bit 31 TECMP2 : Timer E compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  2. Bit 30 TECMP1 : Timer E compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  3. Bit 29 TE1RST : Timer E output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  4. Bit 28 TE1SET : Timer E output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  5. Bit 27 TDCMP2 : Timer D compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  6. Bit 26 TDCMP1 : Timer D compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  7. Bit 25 TD1RST : Timer D output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  8. Bit 24 TD1SET : Timer D output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  9. Bit 23 TCCMP2 : Timer C compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  10. Bit 22 TCCMP1 : Timer C compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  11. Bit 21 TC1RST : Timer C output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  12. Bit 20 TC1SET : Timer C output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  13. Bit 19 TBCMP2 : Timer B compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  14. Bit 18 TBCMP1 : Timer B compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  15. Bit 17 TB1RST : Timer B output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  1. Bit 16 TB1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  2. Bit 15 TFCMP2 : Timer E compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  3. Bit 14 TFCMP1 : Timer F compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  4. Bit 13 TF1RST : Timer F output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  5. Bit 12 TF1SET : Timer F output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  6. Bit 11 EXEV10CPT : External event 10 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  7. Bit 10 EXEV9CPT : External event 9 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  8. Bit 9 EXEV8CPT : External event 8 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  9. Bit 8 EXEV7CPT : External event 7 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  10. Bit 7 EXEV6CPT : External event 6 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  11. Bit 6 EXEV5CPT : External event 5 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  12. Bit 5 EXEV4CPT : External event 4 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  13. Bit 4 EXEV3CPT : External event 3 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  14. Bit 3 EXEV2CPT : External event 2 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  15. Bit 2 EXEV1CPT : External event 1 capture
    0: No action
    1: The external event 1 triggers the capture 2
  16. Bit 1 UPDCPT : Update capture
    0: No action
    1: The update event triggers the capture 2
  17. Bit 0 SWCPT : Software capture
    0: No action
    1: This bit forces the capture 2 by software. This bit is set only, reset by hardware.

28.5.47 HRTIM timer B capture 2 control register (HRTIM_CPT2BCR)

Address offset: 0x160

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
TE
CMP2
TE
CMP1
TE1
RST
TE1
SET
TD
CMP2
TD
CMP1
TD1
RST
TD1
SET
TC
CMP2
TC
CMP1
TC1
RST
TC1
SET
TF
CMP2
TF
CMP1
TF1
RST
TF1
SET
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
TA
CMP2
TA
CMP1
TA1
RST
TA1
SET
EXEV1
0CPT
EXEV9
CPT
EXEV8
CPT
EXEV7
CPT
EXEV6
CPT
EXEV5
CPT
EXEV4
CPT
EXEV3
CPT
EXEV2
CPT
EXEV1
CPT
UPD
CPT
SW
CPT
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
  1. Bit 31 TECMP2 : Timer E compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  2. Bit 30 TECMP1 : Timer E compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  3. Bit 29 TE1RST : Timer E output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  4. Bit 28 TE1SET : Timer E output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  5. Bit 27 TDCMP2 : Timer D compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  6. Bit 26 TDCMP1 : Timer D compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  7. Bit 25 TD1RST : Timer D output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  8. Bit 24 TD1SET : Timer D output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  9. Bit 23 TCCMP2 : Timer C compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  10. Bit 22 TCCMP1 : Timer C compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  11. Bit 21 TC1RST : Timer C output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  12. Bit 20 TC1SET : Timer C output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  13. Bit 19 TFCMP2 : Timer F compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  14. Bit 18 TFCMP1 : Timer F compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  15. Bit 17 TF1RST : Timer F output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  1. Bit 16 TF1SET : Timer F output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  2. Bit 15 TACMP2 : Timer A compare 2
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 2 triggers capture 2
  3. Bit 14 TACMP1 : Timer A compare 1
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 1 triggers capture 2
  4. Bit 13 TA1RST : Timer B output 1 reset
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output active to inactive transition
  5. Bit 12 TA1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output inactive to active transition
  6. Bit 11 EXEV10CPT : External event 10 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description
  7. Bit 10 EXEV9CPT : External event 9 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  8. Bit 9 EXEV8CPT : External event 8 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  9. Bit 8 EXEV7CPT : External event 7 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  10. Bit 7 EXEV6CPT : External event 6 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  11. Bit 6 EXEV5CPT : External event 5 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  12. Bit 5 EXEV4CPT : External event 4 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  13. Bit 4 EXEV3CPT : External event 3 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  14. Bit 3 EXEV2CPT : External event 2 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  15. Bit 2 EXEV1CPT : External event 1 capture
    0: No action
    1: The external event 1 triggers the capture 2
  16. Bit 1 UPDCPT : Update capture
    0: No action
    1: The update event triggers the capture 2
  17. Bit 0 SWCPT : Software capture
    0: No action
    1: This bit forces the capture 2 by software. This bit is set only, reset by hardware.

28.5.48 HRTIM timer C capture 2 control register (HRTIM_CPT2CCR)

Address offset: 0x1E0

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
TE
CMP2
TE
CMP1
TE1
RST
TE1
SET
TD
CMP2
TD
CMP1
TD1
RST
TD1
SET
TF
CMP2
TF
CMP1
TF1
RST
TF1
SET
TB
CMP2
TB
CMP1
TB1
RST
TB1
SET
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
TA
CMP2
TA
CMP1
TA1
RST
TA1
SET
EXEV1
0CPT
EXEV9
CPT
EXEV8
CPT
EXEV7
CPT
EXEV6
CPT
EXEV5
CPT
EXEV4
CPT
EXEV3
CPT
EXEV2
CPT
EXEV1
CPT
UPD
CPT
SW
CPT
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
  1. Bit 16 TB1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  2. Bit 15 TACMP2 : Timer A compare 2
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 2 triggers capture 2
  3. Bit 14 TACMP1 : Timer A compare 1
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 1 triggers capture 2
  4. Bit 13 TA1RST : Timer B output 1 reset
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output active to inactive transition
  5. Bit 12 TA1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output inactive to active transition
  6. Bit 11 EXEV10CPT : External event 10 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  7. Bit 10 EXEV9CPT : External event 9 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  8. Bit 9 EXEV8CPT : External event 8 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  9. Bit 8 EXEV7CPT : External event 7 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  10. Bit 7 EXEV6CPT : External event 6 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  11. Bit 6 EXEV5CPT : External event 5 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  12. Bit 5 EXEV4CPT : External event 4 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  13. Bit 4 EXEV3CPT : External event 3 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  14. Bit 3 EXEV2CPT : External event 2 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  15. Bit 2 EXEV1CPT : External event 1 capture
    0: No action
    1: The external event 1 triggers the capture 2
  16. Bit 1 UPDCPT : Update capture
    0: No action
    1: The update event triggers the capture 2
  17. Bit 0 SWCPT : Software capture
    0: No action
    1: This bit forces the capture 2 by software. This bit is set only, reset by hardware.

28.5.49 HRTIM timer D capture 2 control register (HRTIM_CPT2DCR)

Address offset: 0x260

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
TE
CMP2
TE
CMP1
TE1
RST
TE1
SET
TF
CMP2
TF
CMP1
TF1
RST
TF1
SET
TC
CMP2
TC
CMP1
TC1
RST
TC1
SET
TB
CMP2
TB
CMP1
TB1
RST
TB1
SET
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
TA
CMP2
TA
CMP1
TA1
RST
TA1
SET
EXEV1
0CPT
EXEV9
CPT
EXEV8
CPT
EXEV7
CPT
EXEV6
CPT
EXEV5
CPT
EXEV4
CPT
EXEV3
CPT
EXEV2
CPT
EXEV1
CPT
UPD
CPT
SW
CPT
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bit 31 TECMP2 : Timer E compare 2

Refer to TACMP2 description.

Bit 30 TECMP1 : Timer E compare 1

Refer to TACMP1 description.

Bit 29 TE1RST : Timer E output 1 reset

Refer to TA1RST description.

Bit 28 TE1SET : Timer E output 1 set

Refer to TA1SET description.

Bit 27 TFCMP2 : Timer F compare 2

Refer to TACMP2 description.

Bit 26 TFCMP1 : Timer F compare 1

Refer to TACMP1 description.

Bit 25 TF1RST : Timer F output 1 reset

Refer to TA1RST description.

Bit 24 TF1SET : Timer F output 1 set

Refer to TA1SET description.

Bit 23 TCCMP2 : Timer C compare 2

Refer to TACMP2 description.

Bit 22 TCCMP1 : Timer C compare 1

Refer to TACMP1 description.

Bit 21 TC1RST : Timer C output 1 reset

Refer to TA1RST description.

Bit 20 TC1SET : Timer C output 1 set

Refer to TA1SET description.

Bit 19 TBCMP2 : Timer B compare 2

Refer to TACMP2 description.

Bit 18 TBCMP1 : Timer B compare 1

Refer to TACMP1 description.

Bit 17 TB1RST : Timer B output 1 reset

Refer to TA1RST description.

  1. Bit 16 TB1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  2. Bit 15 TACMP2 : Timer A compare 2
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 2 triggers capture 2
  3. Bit 14 TACMP1 : Timer A compare 1
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 1 triggers capture 2
  4. Bit 13 TA1RST : Timer B output 1 reset
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output active to inactive transition
  5. Bit 12 TA1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output inactive to active transition
  6. Bit 11 EXEV10CPT : External event 10 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  7. Bit 10 EXEV9CPT : External event 9 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  8. Bit 9 EXEV8CPT : External event 8 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  9. Bit 8 EXEV7CPT : External event 7 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  10. Bit 7 EXEV6CPT : External event 6 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  11. Bit 6 EXEV5CPT : External event 5 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  12. Bit 5 EXEV4CPT : External event 4 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  13. Bit 4 EXEV3CPT : External event 3 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  14. Bit 3 EXEV2CPT : External event 2 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  15. Bit 2 EXEV1CPT : External event 1 capture
    0: No action
    1: The external event 1 triggers the capture 2
  16. Bit 1 UPDCPT : Update capture
    0: No action
    1: The update event triggers the capture 2
  17. Bit 0 SWCPT : Software capture
    0: No action
    1: This bit forces the capture 2 by software. This bit is set only, reset by hardware.

28.5.50 HRTIM timer E capture 2 control register (HRTIM_CPT2ECR)

Address offset: 0x2E0

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
TF
CMP2
TF
CMP1
TF1
RST
TF1
SET
TD
CMP2
TD
CMP1
TD1
RST
TD1
SET
TC
CMP2
TC
CMP1
TC1
RST
TC1
SET
TB
CMP2
TB
CMP1
TB1
RST
TB1
SET
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
TA
CMP2
TA
CMP1
TA1
RST
TA1
SET
EXEV1
0CPT
EXEV9
CPT
EXEV8
CPT
EXEV7
CPT
EXEV6
CPT
EXEV5
CPT
EXEV4
CPT
EXEV3
CPT
EXEV2
CPT
EXEV1
CPT
UPD
CPT
SW
CPT
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
  1. Bit 31 TFCMP2 : Timer F compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  2. Bit 30 TFCMP1 : Timer F compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  3. Bit 29 TF1RST : Timer F output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  4. Bit 28 TF1SET : Timer F output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  5. Bit 27 TDCMP2 : Timer D compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  6. Bit 26 TDCMP1 : Timer D compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  7. Bit 25 TD1RST : Timer D output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  8. Bit 24 TD1SET : Timer D output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  9. Bit 23 TCCMP2 : Timer C compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  10. Bit 22 TCCMP1 : Timer C compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  11. Bit 21 TC1RST : Timer C output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  12. Bit 20 TC1SET : Timer C output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  13. Bit 19 TBCMP2 : Timer B compare 2
    Refer to TACMP2 description.
  14. Bit 18 TBCMP1 : Timer B compare 1
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  15. Bit 17 TB1RST : Timer B output 1 reset
    Refer to TA1RST description.
  1. Bit 16 TB1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  2. Bit 15 TACMP2 : Timer A compare 2
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 2 triggers capture 2
  3. Bit 14 TACMP1 : Timer A compare 1
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 1 triggers capture 2
  4. Bit 13 TA1RST : Timer B output 1 reset
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output active to inactive transition
  5. Bit 12 TA1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output inactive to active transition
  6. Bit 11 EXEV10CPT : External event 10 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description
  7. Bit 10 EXEV9CPT : External event 9 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  8. Bit 9 EXEV8CPT : External event 8 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  9. Bit 8 EXEV7CPT : External event 7 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  10. Bit 7 EXEV6CPT : External event 6 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  11. Bit 6 EXEV5CPT : External event 5 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  12. Bit 5 EXEV4CPT : External event 4 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  13. Bit 4 EXEV3CPT : External event 3 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  14. Bit 3 EXEV2CPT : External event 2 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  15. Bit 2 EXEV1CPT : External event 1 capture
    0: No action
    1: The external event 1 triggers the capture 2
  16. Bit 1 UPDCPT : Update capture
    0: No action
    1: The update event triggers the capture 2
  17. Bit 0 SWCPT : Software capture
    0: No action
    1: This bit forces the capture 2 by software. This bit is set only, reset by hardware.

28.5.51 HRTIM timer F capture 2 control register (HRTIM_CPT2FCR)

Address offset: 0x360

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
TE
CMP2
TE
CMP1
TE1
RST
TE1
SET
TD
CMP2
TD
CMP1
TD1
RST
TD1
SET
TC
CMP2
TC
CMP1
TC1
RST
TC1
SET
TB
CMP2
TB
CMP1
TB1
RST
TB1
SET
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
TA
CMP2
TA
CMP1
TA1
RST
TA1
SET
EXEV1
0CPT
EXEV9
CPT
EXEV8
CPT
EXEV7
CPT
EXEV6
CPT
EXEV5
CPT
EXEV4
CPT
EXEV3
CPT
EXEV2
CPT
EXEV1
CPT
UPD
CPT
SW
CPT
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
  1. Bit 16 TB1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    Refer to TA1SET description.
  2. Bit 15 TACMP2 : Timer A compare 2
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 2 triggers capture 2
  3. Bit 14 TACMP1 : Timer A compare 1
    0: No action
    1: Timer A compare 1 triggers capture 2
  4. Bit 13 TA1RST : Timer B output 1 reset
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output active to inactive transition
  5. Bit 12 TA1SET : Timer B output 1 set
    0: No action
    1: Capture 2 is triggered by TA1 output inactive to active transition
  6. Bit 11 EXEV10CPT : External event 10 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  7. Bit 10 EXEV9CPT : External event 9 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  8. Bit 9 EXEV8CPT : External event 8 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  9. Bit 8 EXEV7CPT : External event 7 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  10. Bit 7 EXEV6CPT : External event 6 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  11. Bit 6 EXEV5CPT : External event 5 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  12. Bit 5 EXEV4CPT : External event 4 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  13. Bit 4 EXEV3CPT : External event 3 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  14. Bit 3 EXEV2CPT : External event 2 capture
    Refer to EXEV1CPT description.
  15. Bit 2 EXEV1CPT : External event 1 capture
    0: No action
    1: The external event 1 triggers the capture 2
  16. Bit 1 UPDCPT : Update capture
    0: No action
    1: The update event triggers the capture 2
  17. Bit 0 SWCPT : Software capture
    0: No action
    1: This bit forces the capture 2 by software. This bit is set only, reset by hardware.

28.5.52 HRTIM timer x output register (HRTIM_OUTxR) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x0E4

Address offset: Block B: 0x164

Address offset: Block C: 0x1E4

Address offset: Block D: 0x264

Address offset: Block E: 0x2E4

Address offset: Block F: 0x364

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.DIDL2CHP2FAULT2[1:0]IDLES2IDLEM2POL2Res.
rwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
Res.BIARRes.DLYPRT[2:0]DLYPR
TEN
DTENDIDL1CHP1FAULT1[1:0]IDLES1IDLEM1POL1Res.
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:24 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 23 DIDL2 : Output 2 deadtime upon burst mode Idle entry

This bit delays the idle mode entry by forcing a deadtime insertion before switching the outputs to their idle state. This setting only applies when entering in idle state during a burst mode operation.

0: The programmed Idle state is applied immediately to the output 2

1: Deadtime (inactive level) is inserted on output 2 before entering the idle mode. The deadtime value is set by DTFx[8:0].

Note: This parameter cannot be changed once the timer x is enabled.

DIDL=1 is set only if one of the outputs is active during the burst mode (IDLES=1), and with positive deadtimes (SDTR/SDTF set to 0).

Bit 22 CHP2 : Output 2 chopper enable

This bit enables the chopper on output 2.

0: Output signal is not altered

1: Output signal is chopped by a carrier signal

Note: This parameter cannot be changed once the timer x is enabled.

Bits 21:20 FAULT2[1:0] : Output 2 fault state

These bits select the output 2 state after a fault event.

00: No action: the output is not affected by the fault input and stays in run mode.

01: Active

10: Inactive

11: High-Z

Note: This parameter cannot be changed once the timer x is enabled (TxCEN bit set), if FLTENx bit is set or if the output is in FAULT state.

Bit 19 IDLES2 : Output 2 idle state

This bit selects the output 2 idle state.

0: Inactive

1: Active

Note: This parameter must be set prior to have the HRTIM controlling the outputs.

Bit 18 IDLEM2 : Output 2 idle mode

This bit selects the output 2 idle mode.

0: No action: the output is not affected by the burst mode operation.

1: The output is in idle state when requested by the burst mode controller.

Note: This bit is preloaded and is changed during run-time, but must not be changed while the burst mode is active.

Bit 17 POL2 : Output 2 polarity

This bit selects the output 2 polarity.

0: Positive polarity (output active high)

1: Negative polarity (output active low)

Note: This parameter cannot be changed once the timer x is enabled.

Bits 16:15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 14 BIAR : Balanced Idle Automatic Resume

This bit selects if the outputs are automatically re-enabled after a balanced idle event.

This bit is only significant if DLYPRT[2:0] = 011 or 111, it is ignored otherwise.

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Note: This parameter cannot be changed once the timer x is enabled.

Bit 13 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 12:10 DLYPRT[2:0] : Delayed protection

These bits define the source and outputs on which the delayed protection schemes are applied.

In HRTIM_OUTAR, HRTIM_OUTBR, HRTIM_OUTCR:

000: Output 1 delayed idle on external event 6

001: Output 2 delayed idle on external event 6

010: Output 1 and output 2 delayed idle on external event 6

011: Balanced idle on external event 6

100: Output 1 delayed idle on external event 7

101: Output 2 delayed idle on external event 7

110: Output 1 and output 2 delayed idle on external event 7

111: Balanced idle on external event 7

In HRTIM_OUTDR, HRTIM_OUTER, HRTIM_OUTFR:

000: Output 1 delayed idle on external event 8

001: Output 2 delayed idle on external event 8

010: Output 1 and output 2 delayed idle on external event 8

011: Balanced idle on external event 8

100: Output 1 delayed idle on external event 9

101: Output 2 delayed idle on external event 9

110: Output 1 and output 2 delayed idle on external event 9

111: Balanced idle on external event 9

Note: This bitfield must not be modified once the delayed protection is enabled (DLYPRTEN bit set).

Bit 9 DLYPRTEN : Delayed protection enable

This bit enables the delayed protection scheme.

0: No action

1: Delayed protection is enabled, as per DLYPRT[2:0] bits

Note: This parameter cannot be changed once the timer x is enabled (TxEN bit set).

Bit 8 DTEN: Deadtime enable

This bit enables the deadtime insertion on output 1 and output 2.

0: Output 1 and output 2 signals are independent.

1: Deadtime is inserted between output 1 and output 2 (reference signal is output 1 signal generator)

Note: This parameter cannot be changed once the timer is operating (TxEN bit set) or if its outputs are enabled and set/reset by another timer.

Bit 7 DIDL1: Output 1 deadtime upon burst mode idle entry

This bit delays the idle mode entry by forcing a deadtime insertion before switching the outputs to their idle state. This setting only applies when entering the idle state during a burst mode operation.

0: The programmed idle state is applied immediately to the output 1

1: Deadtime (inactive level) is inserted on output 1 before entering the idle mode. The deadtime value is set by DTRx[8:0].

Note: This parameter cannot be changed once the timer x is enabled.

DIDL=1 is set only if one of the outputs is active during the burst mode (IDLES=1), and with positive deadtimes (SDTR/SDTF set to 0).

Bit 6 CHP1: Output 1 chopper enable

This bit enables the chopper on output 1.

0: Output signal is not altered

1: Output signal is chopped by a carrier signal

Note: This parameter cannot be changed once the timer x is enabled.

Bits 5:4 FAULT1[1:0]: Output 1 fault state

These bits select the output 1 state after a fault event

00: No action: the output is not affected by the fault input and stays in run mode.

01: Active

10: Inactive

11: High-Z

Note: This parameter cannot be changed once the timer x is enabled (TxCEN bit set), if FLTENx bit is set or if the output is in FAULT state.

Bit 3 IDLES1: Output 1 Idle State

This bit selects the output 1 idle state.

0: Inactive

1: Active

Note: This parameter must be set prior to HRTIM controlling the outputs.

Bit 2 IDLEM1: Output 1 Idle mode

This bit selects the output 1 idle mode.

0: No action: the output is not affected by the burst mode operation.

1: The output is in idle state when requested by the burst mode controller.

Note: This bit is preloaded and is changed during runtime, but must not be changed while burst mode is active.

Bit 1 POL1: Output 1 polarity

This bit selects the output 1 polarity.

0: Positive polarity (output active high)

1: Negative polarity (output active low)

Note: This parameter cannot be changed once the timer x is enabled.

Bit 0 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

28.5.53 HRTIM timer x fault register (HRTIM_FLTxR) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x0E8

Address offset: Block B: 0x168

Address offset: Block C: 0x1E8

Address offset: Block D: 0x268

Address offset: Block E: 0x2E8

Address offset: Block F: 0x368

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
FLT
LCK
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
rwo
1514131211109876543210
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.FLT6
EN
FLT5
EN
FLT4
EN
FLT3
EN
FLT2
EN
FLT1
EN
rwrwrwrwrwrw

Bit 31 FLTLOCK : Fault sources lock

0: FLT1EN..FLT6EN bits are read/write

1: FLT1EN..FLT6EN bits are read only

The FLTLOCK bit is write-once. Once it has been set, it cannot be modified till the next system reset.

Bits 30:6 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 5 FLT6EN : Fault 6 enable

0: Fault 6 input ignored

1: Fault 6 input is active and disables HRTIM outputs

Bit 4 FLT5EN : Fault 5 enable

0: Fault 5 input ignored

1: Fault 5 input is active and disables HRTIM outputs

Bit 3 FLT4EN : Fault 4 enable

0: Fault 4 input ignored

1: Fault 4 input is active and disables HRTIM outputs

Bit 2 FLT3EN : Fault 3 enable

0: Fault 3 input ignored

1: Fault 3 input is active and disables HRTIM outputs

Bit 1 FLT2EN : Fault 2 enable

0: Fault 2 input ignored

1: Fault 2 input is active and disables HRTIM outputs

Bit 0 FLT1EN : Fault 1 enable

0: Fault 1 input ignored

1: Fault 1 input is active and disables HRTIM outputs

28.5.54 HRTIM timer x control register 2 (HRTIM_TIMxCR2) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x0EC

Address offset: Block B: 0x16C

Address offset: Block C: 0x1EC

Address offset: Block D: 0x26C

Address offset: Block E: 0x2EC

Address offset: Block F: 0x36C

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.TRG
HLF
Res.Res.GT
CMP3
GT
CMP1
rwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
FEROM[1:0]BMROM[1:0]ADROM[1:0]OUTROM[1:0]ROM[1:0]Res.UDMRes.DCDRDCDSDCDE
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:21 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 20 TRGHLF: Triggered-half mode

This bitfield defines whether the compare 2 register is behaving in standard mode (compare match issued as soon as counter equal compare), or in triggered-half mode (see Section : Triggered-half mode ).

0: CMP2 register is written by the user only (standard compare mode)

1: CMP2 value is set by hardware as soon as a capture 1 event occurs. It is loaded with the (capture 1 divided by 2) value. The initial value can be written by the user (as long as TRGHLF is reset), but is ignored once the first capture has been triggered (the preload mechanism is disabled for CMP2 when the TRGHLF bit is set).

Note: This bitfield must not be modified once the counter is enabled (TxCEN bit set).

Bits 19:18 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 17 GTCMP3: Greater than compare 3 PWM mode

This bit defines the compare 3 operating mode.

0: The compare 3 event is generated when the counter is equal to the compare value (compare match mode)

1: The compare 3 event is generated when the counter is greater than the compare value. If the compare value is changed on-the-fly, the new compare value is compared with the current counter value and an output SET or RESET can be generated.

Bit 16 GTCMP1: Greater than compare 1 PWM mode

This bit defines the compare 1 operating mode.

0: The compare 1 event is generated when the counter is equal to the compare value (compare match mode)

1: The compare 1 event is generated when the counter is greater than the compare value. If the compare value is changed on-the-fly, the new compare value is compared with the current counter value and an output SET or RESET can be generated.

Bits 15:14 FEROM[1:0] : Fault and event roll-over mode

This bit defines when the roll-over is generated, in up-down counting mode. It only concerns the Roll-over event used by the fault and event counters.

00: Event generated when the counter is equal to 0 or to HRTIM_PERxR value

01: Event generated when the counter is equal to 0

10: Event generated when the counter is equal to HRTIM_PERxR

11: Reserved

Note: This setting only applies when the UDM bit is set. It is not significant otherwise.

Note: This bitfield cannot be changed once the timer is operating (TxEN bit set).

Bits 13:12 BMROM[1:0] : Burst mode roll-over mode

This bit defines when the roll-over is generated, in up-down counting mode. It only concerns the roll-over event used in the burst mode controller, as clock as burst mode trigger.

00: Event generated when the counter is equal to 0 or to HRTIM_PERxR value

01: Event generated when the counter is equal to 0

10: Event generated when the counter is equal to HRTIM_PERxR

11: Reserved

Note: This setting only applies when the UDM bit is set. It is not significant otherwise.

Note: This parameter cannot be changed once the timer is operating (TxEN bit set).

Bits 11:10 ADROM[1:0] : ADC roll-over mode

This bit defines when the roll-over is generated, in up-down counting mode. It only concerns the roll-over event which triggers the ADC.

00: Event generated when the counter is equal to 0 or to HRTIM_PERxR value

01: Event generated when the counter is equal to 0

10: Event generated when the counter is equal to HRTIM_PERxR

11: Reserved

Note: This setting only applies when the UDM bit is set. It is not significant otherwise.

Note: This bitfield cannot be changed once the timer is operating (TxEN bit set).

Bits 9:8 OUTROM[1:0] : Output roll-over mode

This bit defines when the roll-over is generated, in up-down counting mode. It only concerns the roll-over event which sets and/or resets the outputs, as per HRTIM_SETxyR and HRTIM_RSTxyR settings.

00: Event generated when the counter is equal to 0 or to HRTIM_PERxR value

01: Event generated when the counter is equal to 0

10: Event generated when the counter is equal to HRTIM_PERxR

11: Reserved

Note: This setting only applies when the UDM bit is set. It is not significant otherwise.

Note: This bitfield cannot be changed once the timer is operating (TxEN bit set).

Bits 7:6 ROM[1:0] : Roll-over mode

This bit defines when the roll-over is generated, in up-down counting mode. It only concerns the roll-over event with the following destinations: update trigger (to transfer content from preload to active registers), IRQ and DMA requests, repetition counter decrement and external event filtering.

00: Event generated when the counter is equal to 0 or to HRTIM_PERxR value

01: Event generated when the counter is equal to 0

10: Event generated when the counter is equal to HRTIM_PERxR

11: Reserved

Note: This setting only applies when the UDM bit is set. It is not significant otherwise.

Note: This bitfield cannot be changed once the timer is operating (TxEN bit set).

Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 4 UDM : Up-Down mode

This bit defines if the counter is operating in up or up-down counting mode.

0: The counter is operating in up-counting mode

1: The counter is operating in up-down counting mode

Note: This bit cannot be changed once the timer is operating (TxEN bit set).

Bit 3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 2 DCDR : Dual channel DAC reset trigger

This bit defines when the hrtim_dac_reset_trgx trigger is generated.

0: The trigger is generated on counter reset or roll-over event

1: The trigger is generated on output 1 set event

Note: The DCDR bit is not significant when the DCDE bit is reset (Dual channel DAC trigger disabled).

Bit 1 DCDS : Dual channel DAC Step trigger

This bit defines when the hrtim_dac_step_trgx trigger is generated.

0: The trigger is generated on compare 2 event

1: The trigger is generated on output 1 reset event

Note: The DCDR bit is not significant when the DCDE bit is reset (Dual channel DAC trigger disabled).

Bit 0 DCDE : Dual channel DAC trigger enable

This bit enables the dual channel DAC triggering mechanism.

0: Dual channel DAC trigger disabled

1: Dual channel DAC trigger enabled

Note: This bit cannot be changed once the timer is operating (TxEN bit set).

28.5.55 HRTIM timer x external event filtering register 3 (HRTIM_TIMxEEFR3) (x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x0F0

Address offset: Block B: 0x170

Address offset: Block C: 0x1F0

Address offset: Block D: 0x270

Address offset: Block E: 0x2F0

Address offset: Block F: 0x370

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
Res.Res.EEVACNT[5:0]EEVASEL[3:0]Res.EEVARSTMEEVACRESEEVACE
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:14 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 13:8 EEVACNT[5:0] : External event A counter

This bitfield selects the external event A counter threshold. An event is considered valid when the number of events is equal to the (EEVACNT[5:0]+1) value.

Bits 7:4 EEVASEL[3:0] : External event A Selection

This bit selects the external event A source.

0: External event 1 is used as external event A source

1: External event 2 is used as external event A source

...

9: External event 10 is used as external event A source

Others: Reserved

Bit 3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 2 EEVARSTM : External event A reset mode

This bit selects the external event x counter reset mode.

0: External event counter A is reset on each reset / roll-over event

1: External event counter A is reset on each reset / roll-over event only if no event occurs during last counting period

Bit 1 EEVACRES : External event A counter reset

This bit resets the external event A counter. It is set by software and reset by hardware.

0: No action

1: External event counter A is reset

Bit 0 EEVACE : External event A counter enable

This bit enables the external event x counter.

0: External event A counter disabled

1: External event A counter enabled

28.5.56 HRTIM control register 1 (HRTIM_CR1)

Address offset: 0x380

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.AD4USRC[2:0]AD3USRC[2:0]AD2USRC[2:0]AD1USRC[2:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.TF
UDIS
TE
UDIS
TD
UDIS
TC
UDIS
TB
UDIS
TA
UDIS
MUDIS
rwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:28 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 27:25 AD4USRC[2:0] : ADC trigger 4 update source
Refer to AD1USRC[2:0] description.

Bits 24:22 AD3USRC[2:0] : ADC trigger 3 update source
Refer to AD1USRC[2:0] description.

Bits 21:19 AD2USRC[2:0] : ADC trigger 2 update source
Refer to AD1USRC[2:0] description.

Bits 18:16 AD1USRC[2:0] : ADC trigger 1 update source

These bits define the source which triggers the update of the HRTIM_ADC1R register (transfer from preload to active register). It only defines the source timer. The precise condition is defined within the timer itself, in HRTIM_MCR or HRTIM_TIMxCR.

000: Master timer

001: Timer A

010: Timer B

011: Timer C

100: Timer D

101: Timer E

110: Timer F

111: Reserved

Bits 15:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 6 TFUDIS : Timer F update disable
Refer to TAUDIS description.

Bit 5 TEUDIS : Timer E update disable
Refer to TAUDIS description

Bit 4 TDUDIS : Timer D update disable
Refer to TAUDIS description.

Bit 3 TCUDIS : Timer C update disable
Refer to TAUDIS description.

Bit 2 TBUDIS : Timer B update disable

Refer to TAUDIS description.

Bit 1 TAUDIS : Timer A update disable

This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable an update event generation temporarily on timer A.

0: Update enabled. The update occurs upon generation of the selected source.

1: Update disabled. The updates are temporarily disabled to allow the software to write multiple registers that have to be simultaneously taken into account.

Bit 0 MUDIS : Master update disable

This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable an update event generation temporarily.

0: Update enabled.

1: Update disabled. The updates are temporarily disabled to allow the software to write multiple registers that have to be simultaneously taken into account.

28.5.57 HRTIM control register 2 (HRTIM_CR2)

Address offset: 0x384

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.SWPFSWPESWPDSWPCSWPBSWPA
rwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
Res.TFRSTTERSTTDRSTTCRSTTBRSTTARSTMRSTRes.TFTETDTCTBTAMSWU
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 21 SWPF : Swap timer F outputs

Refer to SWPA description.

Note: This bit is not significant when the Push-pull mode is enabled (PSHPLL = 1).

Bit 20 SWPE : Swap timer E outputs

Refer to SWPA description.

Note: This bit is not significant when the Push-pull mode is enabled (PSHPLL = 1).

Bit 19 SWPD : Swap timer D outputs

Refer to SWPA description.

Note: This bit is not significant when the Push-pull mode is enabled (PSHPLL = 1).

Bit 18 SWPC : Swap timer C outputs

Refer to SWPA description.

Note: This bit is not significant when the Push-pull mode is enabled (PSHPLL = 1).

Bit 17 SWPB : Swap timer B outputs

Refer to SWPA description.

Note: This bit is not significant when the Push-pull mode is enabled (PSHPLL = 1).

Bit 16 SWPA : Swap timer A outputs

This bit allows to swap the timer A outputs.

0: HRTIM_SETA1R and HRTIM_RSTA1R are coding for the output A1, HRTIM_SETA2R and HRTIM_RSTA2R are coding for the output A2

1: HRTIM_SETA1R and HRTIM_RSTA1R are coding for the output A2, HRTIM_SETA2R and HRTIM_RSTA2R are coding for the output A1

Note: This bit is not significant when the Push-pull mode is enabled (PSHPLL = 1).

Bit 15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 14 TFRST : Timer F counter software reset

Refer to TARST description.

Bit 13 TERST : Timer E counter software reset

Refer to TARST description.

Bit 12 TDRST : Timer D counter software reset

Refer to TARST description.

Bit 11 TCRST : Timer C counter software reset

Refer to TARST description.

Bit 10 TBRST : Timer B counter software reset

Refer to TARST description.

Bit 9 TARST : Timer A counter software reset

Setting this bit resets the timer A counter.

The bit is automatically reset by hardware.

Bit 8 MRST : Master counter software reset

Setting this bit resets the master timer counter.

The bit is automatically reset by hardware.

Bit 7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 6 TFSWU : Timer F software update

Refer to TASWU description.

Bit 5 TESWU : Timer E software update

Refer to TASWU description.

Bit 4 TDSWU : Timer D software update

Refer to TASWU description.

Bit 3 TCSWU : Timer C software update

Refer to TASWU description.

Bit 2 TBSWU : Timer B software update

Refer to TASWU description.

Bit 1 TASWU : Timer A software update

This bit is set by software and automatically reset by hardware. It forces an immediate transfer from the preload to the active register and any pending update request is canceled.

Bit 0 MSWU : Master timer software update

This bit is set by software and automatically reset by hardware. It forces an immediate transfer from the preload to the active register in the master timer and any pending update request is canceled.

28.5.58 HRTIM interrupt status register (HRTIM_ISR)

Address offset: 0x388

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.BMPE
R
DLL
RDY
rr
1514131211109876543210
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.FLT6SYSFLTFLT5FLT4FLT3FLT2FLT1
rrrrrrr

Bits 31:18 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 17 BMPER : Burst mode period interrupt flag

This bit is set by hardware when a single-shot burst mode operation is completed or at the end of a burst mode period in continuous mode. It is cleared by software writing it at 1.

0: No burst mode period interrupt occurred

1: Burst mode period interrupt occurred

Bit 16 DLLRDY : DLL Ready Interrupt Flag

This bit is set by hardware when the DLL calibration is completed. It is cleared by software writing it at 1.

0: No DLL calibration ready interrupt occurred

1: DLL calibration ready interrupt occurred

Bits 15:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 6 FLT6 : Fault 6 interrupt flag

Refer to FLT1 description.

Bit 5 SYSFLT : System fault interrupt flag

Refer to FLT1 description.

Bit 4 FLT5 : Fault 5 interrupt flag

Refer to FLT1 description.

Bit 3 FLT4 : Fault 4 interrupt flag

Refer to FLT1 description.

Bit 2 FLT3 : Fault 3 interrupt flag

Refer to FLT1 description.

Bit 1 FLT2 : Fault 2 interrupt flag

Refer to FLT1 description.

Bit 0 FLT1 : Fault 1 interrupt flag

This bit is set by hardware when fault 1 event occurs. It is cleared by software writing it at 1.

0: No fault 1 interrupt occurred

1: Fault 1 interrupt occurred

28.5.59 HRTIM interrupt clear register (HRTIM_ICR)

Address offset: 0x38C

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.BMPE
RC
DLL
RDYC
ww
1514131211109876543210
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.FLT6CSYSFLT
TC
FLT5CFLT4CFLT3CFLT2CFLT1C
wwwwwww

Bits 31:18 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 17 BMPERC : Burst mode period flag clear

Writing 1 to this bit clears the BMPER flag in HRTIM_ISR register.

Bit 16 DLLRDYC : DLL Ready Interrupt flag Clear

Writing 1 to this bit clears the DLLRDY flag in HRTIM_ISR register.

Bits 15:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 6 FLT6C : Fault 6 interrupt flag clear

Writing 1 to this bit clears the FLT6 flag in HRTIM_ISR register.

Bit 5 SYSFLTC : System fault interrupt flag clear

Writing 1 to this bit clears the SYSFLT flag in HRTIM_ISR register.

Bit 4 FLT5C : Fault 5 interrupt flag clear

Writing 1 to this bit clears the FLT5 flag in HRTIM_ISR register.

Bit 3 FLT4C : Fault 4 interrupt flag clear

Writing 1 to this bit clears the FLT4 flag in HRTIM_ISR register.

Bit 2 FLT3C : Fault 3 interrupt flag clear

Writing 1 to this bit clears the FLT3 flag in HRTIM_ISR register.

Bit 1 FLT2C : Fault 2 interrupt flag clear

Writing 1 to this bit clears the FLT2 flag in HRTIM_ISR register.

Bit 0 FLT1C : Fault 1 interrupt flag clear

Writing 1 to this bit clears the FLT1 flag in HRTIM_ISR register.

28.5.60 HRTIM interrupt enable register (HRTIM_IER)

Address offset: 0x390

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.BMPE
RIE
DLL
RDYIE
rwrw
1514131211109876543210
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.FLT6
IE
SYSFL
TIE
FLT5IEFLT4IEFLT3IEFLT2IEFLT1IE
rwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:18 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 17 BMPPERIE : Burst mode period interrupt enable

This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the burst mode period interrupt.

0: Burst mode period interrupt disabled

1: Burst mode period interrupt enabled

Bit 16 DLLRDYIE : DLL Ready Interrupt Enable

This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the DLL ready interrupt.

0: DLL ready interrupt disabled

1: DLL ready interrupt enabled

Bits 15:7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 6 FLT6IE : Fault 6 interrupt enable

Refer to FLT1IE description.

Bit 5 SYSFLTIE : System fault interrupt enable

Refer to FLT1IE description.

Bit 4 FLT5IE : Fault 5 interrupt enable

Refer to FLT1IE description.

Bit 3 FLT4IE : Fault 4 interrupt enable

Refer to FLT1IE description.

Bit 2 FLT3IE : Fault 3 interrupt enable

Refer to FLT1IE description.

Bit 1 FLT2IE : Fault 2 interrupt enable

Refer to FLT1IE description.

Bit 0 FLT1IE : Fault 1 interrupt enable

This bit is set and cleared by software to enable/disable the fault 1 interrupt.

0: Fault 1 interrupt disabled

1: Fault 1 interrupt enabled

28.5.61 HRTIM output enable register (HRTIM_OENR)

Address offset: 0x394

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
Res.Res.Res.Res.TF2O ENTF1O ENTE2O ENTE1O ENTD2O ENTD1O ENTC2O ENTC1O ENTB2O ENTB1O ENTA2O ENTA1O EN
rsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrs

Bits 31:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 11 TF2OEN : Timer F output 2 enable

Refer to TA1OEN description.

Bit 10 TF1OEN : Timer F output 1 enable

Refer to TA1OEN description

Bit 9 TE2OEN : Timer E output 2 enable

Refer to TA1OEN description.

Bit 8 TE1OEN : Timer E output 1 enable

Refer to TA1OEN description.

Bit 7 TD2OEN : Timer D output 2 enable

Refer to TA1OEN description.

Bit 6 TD1OEN : Timer D output 1 enable

Refer to TA1OEN description.

Bit 5 TC2OEN : Timer C output 2 enable

Refer to TA1OEN description.

Bit 4 TC1OEN : Timer C output 1 enable

Refer to TA1OEN description.

Bit 3 TB2OEN : Timer B output 2 enable

Refer to TA1OEN description.

Bit 2 TB1OEN : Timer B output 1 enable

Refer to TA1OEN description.

Bit 1 TA2OEN : Timer A output 2 enable

Refer to TA1OEN description.

Bit 0 TA1OEN : Timer A output 1 enable

Setting this bit enables the timer A output 1. Writing "0" has no effect.

Reading the bit returns the output enable/disable status.

This bit is cleared asynchronously by hardware as soon as the timer-related fault input(s) is (are) active.

0: output A1 disabled. The output is either in fault or Idle state.

1: output A1 enabled

Note: The disable status corresponds to both idle and fault states. The output disable status is given by TA1ODS bit in the HRTIM_ODSR register.

28.5.62 HRTIM output disable register (HRTIM_ODISR)

Address offset: 0x398

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
Res.Res.Res.Res.TF2
ODIS
TF1
ODIS
TE2
ODIS
TE1
ODIS
TD2
ODIS
TD1
ODIS
TC2
ODIS
TC1
ODIS
TB2
ODIS
TB1
ODIS
TA2
OD
IS
TA1
OD
IS
wwwwwwwwwwww

Bits 31:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 11 TF2ODIS : Timer F output 2 disable
Refer to TA1ODIS description.

Bit 10 TF1ODIS : Timer F output 1 disable
Refer to TA1ODIS description

Bit 9 TE2ODIS : Timer E output 2 disable
Refer to TA1ODIS description.

Bit 8 TE1ODIS : Timer E output 1 disable
Refer to TA1ODIS description.

Bit 7 TD2ODIS : Timer D output 2 disable
Refer to TA1ODIS description.

Bit 6 TD1ODIS : Timer D output 1 disable
Refer to TA1ODIS description.

Bit 5 TC2ODIS : Timer C output 2 disable
Refer to TA1ODIS description.

Bit 4 TC1ODIS : Timer C output 1 disable
Refer to TA1ODIS description.

Bit 3 TB2ODIS : Timer B output 2 disable
Refer to TA1ODIS description.

Bit 2 TB1ODIS : Timer B output 1 disable
Refer to TA1ODIS description.

Bit 1 TA2ODIS : Timer A output 2 disable
Refer to TA1ODIS description.

Bit 0 TA1ODIS : Timer A output 1 disable

Setting this bit disables the timer A output 1. The output enters the idle state, either from the run state or from the fault state.

Writing “0” has no effect.

28.5.63 HRTIM output disable status register (HRTIM_ODSR)

Address offset: 0x39C

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
Res.Res.Res.Res.TF2 ODSTF1 ODSTE2 ODSTE1 ODSTD2 ODSTD1 ODSTC2 ODSTC1 ODSTB2 ODSTB1 ODSTA2 ODSTA1 ODS
rrrrrrrrrrrr

Bits 31:12 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 11 TF2ODS : Timer F output 2 disable status
Refer to TA1ODS description.

Bit 10 TF1ODS : Timer F output 1 disable status
Refer to TA1ODS description.

Bit 9 TE2ODS : Timer E output 2 disable status
Refer to TA1ODS description.

Bit 8 TE1ODS : Timer E output 1 disable status
Refer to TA1ODS description.

Bit 7 TD2ODS : Timer D output 2 disable status
Refer to TA1ODS description.

Bit 6 TD1ODS : Timer D output 1 disable status
Refer to TA1ODS description.

Bit 5 TC2ODS : Timer C output 2 disable status
Refer to TA1ODS description.

Bit 4 TC1ODS : Timer C output 1 disable status
Refer to TA1ODS description.

Bit 3 TB2ODS : Timer B output 2 disable status
Refer to TA1ODS description.

Bit 2 TB1ODS : Timer B output 1 disable status
Refer to TA1ODS description.

Bit 1 TA2ODS : Timer A output 2 disable status
Refer to TA1ODS description.

Bit 0 TA1ODS : Timer A output 1 disable status
Reading the bit returns the output disable status. It is not significant when the output is active (Tx1OEN or Tx2OEN = 1).
0: Output A1 disabled, in Idle state.
1: Output A1 disabled, in fault state.

28.5.64 HRTIM burst mode control register (HRTIM_BMCR)

Address offset: 0x3A0

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
BMSTA
T
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.TFBMTEBMTDBMTCBMTBBMTABMMTBM
rc_w0rwrwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.BMPR
EN
BMPRSC[3:0]BMCLK[3:0]BMOMBME
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bit 31 BMSTAT : Burst mode status

This bit gives the current operating state.

0: Normal operation

1: Burst operation on-going. Writing this bit to 0 causes a burst mode early termination.

Bits 30:23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 22 TFBM : Timer F burst mode

Refer to TABM description.

Bit 21 TEBM : Timer E burst mode

Refer to TABM description.

Bit 20 TDBM : Timer D burst mode

Refer to TABM description.

Bit 19 TCBM : Timer C burst mode

Refer to TABM description.

Bit 18 TBBM : Timer B burst mode

Refer to TABM description.

Bit 17 TABM : Timer A burst mode

This bit defines how the timer behaves during a burst mode operation. This bitfield cannot be changed while the burst mode is enabled.

0: TA counter clock is maintained and the timer operates normally

1: TA counter clock is stopped and the counter is reset

Note: This bit must not be set when the balanced idle mode is active (DLYPRT[2:0] = 0x11).

Bit 16 MTBM : Master timer burst mode

This bit defines how the timer behaves during a burst mode operation. This bitfield cannot be changed while the burst mode is enabled.

0: Master Timer counter clock is maintained and the timer operates normally

1: Master Timer counter clock is stopped and the counter is reset

Bits 15:11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 10 BMPREN : Burst mode preload enable

This bit enables the registers preload mechanism and defines whether a write access into a preloadable register (HRTIM_BMCMPR, HRTIM_BMPER) is done into the active or the preload register.

0: Preload disabled: the write access is directly done into active registers

1: Preload enabled: the write access is done into preload registers

Bits 9:6 BMPRSC[3:0] : Burst mode prescaler

Defines the prescaling ratio of the \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock for the burst mode controller. This bitfield cannot be changed while the burst mode is enabled.

0000: Clock not divided
0001: Division by 2
0010: Division by 4
0011: Division by 8
0100: Division by 16
0101: Division by 32
0110: Division by 64
0111: Division by 128
1000: Division by 256
1001: Division by 512
1010: Division by 1024
1011: Division by 2048
1100: Division by 4096
1101: Division by 8192
1110: Division by 16384
1111: Division by 32768

Bits 5:2 BMCLK[3:0] : Burst mode clock source

This bitfield defines the clock source for the burst mode counter. It cannot be changed while the burst mode is enabled (refer to Table 225 for on-chip events 1..4 connections details).

0000: Master timer counter reset/roll-over
0001: Timer A counter reset/roll-over
0010: Timer B counter reset/roll-over
0011: Timer C counter reset/roll-over
0100: Timer D counter reset/roll-over
0101: Timer E counter reset/roll-over
0110: On-chip event 1 (hrtim_bm_ck1), acting as a burst mode counter clock
0111: On-chip event 2 (hrtim_bm_ck2) acting as a burst mode counter clock
1000: On-chip event 3 (hrtim_bm_ck3) acting as a burst mode counter clock
1001: On-chip event 4 (hrtim_bm_ck4) acting as a burst mode counter clock
1010: Prescaled \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock (as per BMPRSC[3:0] setting)
1011: Timer F counter reset/roll-over
Others: Reserved

Bit 1 BMOM : Burst mode operating mode

This bit defines if the burst mode is entered once or if it is continuously operating.

0: Single-shot mode
1: Continuous operation

Bit 0 BME : Burst mode enable

This bit starts the burst mode controller which becomes ready to receive the start trigger.

Writing this bit to 0 causes a burst mode early termination.

0: Burst mode disabled
1: Burst mode enabled

28.5.65 HRTIM burst mode trigger register (HRTIM_BMTRGR)

Address offset: 0x3A4

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
OCHP
EV
EEV8EEV7TDEEV
8
TAEEV
7
TECMP
2
TECMP
1
TEREPTF
CMP1
TDCM
P2
TF
REP
TDREPTDRSTTF
RST
TCCM
P1
TCREP
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
TCRSTTBCMP
2
TBCMP
1
TBREPTBRSTTACMP
2
TACMP
1
TAREPTARSTMSTC
MP4
MSTC
MP3
MSTC
MP2
MSTC
MP1
MSTRE
P
MSTRS
T
SW
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bit 31 OCHPEV : On-chip event

A rising edge on the hrtim_bm_trg input (connected to general purpose timer TRGO output) triggers a burst mode entry (see Table 222 for details).

Bit 30 EEV8 : External event 8 (TIMD filters applied)

The external event 8 conditioned by TIMD filters is starting the burst mode operation.

Bit 29 EEV7 : External event 7 (TIMA filters applied)

The external event 7 conditioned by TIMA filters is starting the burst mode operation.

Bit 28 TDEEV8 : Timer D period following external event 8

The timer D period following an external event 8 (conditioned by TIMD filters) is starting the burst mode operation.

Bit 27 TAEEV7 : Timer A period following external event 7

The timer A period following an external event 7 (conditioned by TIMA filters) is starting the burst mode operation.

Bit 26 TECMP2 : Timer E compare 2 event

Refer to TACMP1 description.

Bit 25 TECMP1 : Timer E compare 1 event

Refer to TACMP1 description.

Bit 24 TEREP : Timer E repetition

Refer to TAREP description.

Bit 23 TFCMP1 : Timer F compare 1 event

Refer to TACMP1 description.

Bit 22 TDCMP2 : Timer D compare 2 event

Refer to TACMP1 description.

Bit 21 TFREP : Timer F repetition

Refer to TAREP description.

Bit 20 TDREP : Timer D repetition

Refer to TAREP description.

Bit 19 TDRST : Timer D reset or roll-over

Refer to TARST description.

Bit 18 TFRST : Timer F reset

Refer to TARST description.

  1. Bit 17 TCCMP1 : Timer C compare 1 event
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  2. Bit 16 TCREP : Timer C repetition
    Refer to TAREP description.
  3. Bit 15 TCRST : Timer C reset or roll-over
    Refer to TARST description.
  4. Bit 14 TBCMP2 : Timer B compare 2 event
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  5. Bit 13 TBCMP1 : Timer B compare 1 event
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  6. Bit 12 TBREP : Timer B repetition
    Refer to TAREP description.
  7. Bit 11 TBRST : Timer B reset or roll-over
    Refer to TARST description.
  8. Bit 10 TACMP2 : Timer A compare 2 event
    Refer to TACMP1 description.
  9. Bit 9 TACMP1 : Timer A compare 1 event
    The timer A compare 1 event is starting the burst mode operation.
  10. Bit 8 TAREP : Timer A repetition
    The Timer A repetition event is starting the burst mode operation.
  11. Bit 7 TARST : Timer A reset or roll-over
    The Timer A reset or roll-over event is starting the burst mode operation.
  12. Bit 6 MSTCMP4 : Master compare 4
    Refer to MSTCMP1 description.
  13. Bit 5 MSTCMP3 : Master compare 3
    Refer to MSTCMP1 description.
  14. Bit 4 MSTCMP2 : Master compare 2
    Refer to MSTCMP1 description.
  15. Bit 3 MSTCMP1 : Master compare 1
    The master timer compare 1 event is starting the burst mode operation.
  16. Bit 2 MSTREP : Master repetition
    The master timer repetition event is starting the burst mode operation.
  17. Bit 1 MSTRST : Master reset or roll-over
    The master timer reset and roll-over event is starting the burst mode operation.
  18. Bit 0 SW : Software start
    This bit is set by software and automatically reset by hardware.
    When set, It starts the burst mode operation immediately.
    This bit is not active if the burst mode is not enabled (BME bit is reset).

28.5.66 HRTIM burst mode compare register (HRTIM_BMCMR)

Address offset: 0x3A8

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
BMCMP[15:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 15:0 BMCMP[15:0] : Burst mode compare value

Defines the number of periods during which the selected timers are in idle state.

This register holds either the content of the preload register or the content of the active register if the preload is disabled.

Note: BMCMP[15:0] cannot be set to 0x0000 when using the f HRTIM clock without a prescaler as the burst mode clock source (BMCLK[3:0] = 1010 and BMPRESC[3:0] = 0000).

28.5.67 HRTIM burst mode period register (HRTIM_BMPER)

Address offset: 0x3AC

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
BMPER[15:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 15:0 BMPER[15:0] : Burst mode period

Defines the burst mode repetition period.

This register holds either the content of the preload register or the content of the active register if preload is disabled.

Note: The BMPER[15:0] must not be null when the burst mode is enabled.

28.5.68 HRTIM timer external event control register 1 (HRTIM_EECR1)

Address offset: 0x3B0

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.EE5FAST
ST
EE5SNS[1:0]EE5POL
L
EE5SRC[1:0]EE4FAST
ST
EE4SNS[1:0]EE4POL
L
EE4SRC[1:0]EE3FAST
ST
EE3SNS[1]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
EE3SNS[0]EE3POL
L
EE3SRC[1:0]EE2FAST
ST
EE2SNS[1:0]EE2POL
L
EE2SRC[1:0]EE1FAST
ST
EE1SNS[1:0]EE1POL
L
EE1SRC[1:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:30 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 29 EE5FAST : External event 5 fast mode
Refer to EE1FAST description.

Bits 28:27 EE5SNS[1:0] : External event 5 sensitivity
Refer to EE1SNS[1:0] description.

Bit 26 EE5POL : External event 5 polarity
Refer to EE1POL description.

Bits 25:24 EE5SRC[1:0] : External event 5 source
Refer to EE1SRC[1:0] description.

Bit 23 EE4FAST : External event 4 fast mode
Refer to EE1FAST description.

Bits 22:21 EE4SNS[1:0] : External event 4 sensitivity
Refer to EE1SNS[1:0] description.

Bit 20 EE4POL : External event 4 polarity
Refer to EE1POL description.

Bits 19:18 EE4SRC[1:0] : External event 4 source
Refer to EE1SRC[1:0] description.

Bit 17 EE3FAST : External event 3 fast mode
Refer to EE1FAST description.

Bits 16:15 EE3SNS[1:0] : External event 3 sensitivity
Refer to EE1SNS[1:0] description.

Bit 14 EE3POL : External event 3 polarity
Refer to EE1POL description.

Bits 13:12 EE3SRC[1:0] : External event 3 source
Refer to EE1SRC[1:0] description.

Bit 11 EE2FAST : External event 2 fast mode
Refer to EE1FAST description.

Bits 10:9 EE2SNS[1:0] : External event 2 sensitivity
Refer to EE1SNS[1:0] description.

  1. Bit 8 EE2POL : External event 2 polarity
    Refer to EE1POL description.
  2. Bits 7:6 EE2SRC[1:0] : External event 2 source
    Refer to EE1SRC[1:0] description.
  3. Bit 5 EE1FAST : External event 1 fast mode
    0: External event 1 is re-synchronized by the HRTIM logic before acting on outputs, which adds a \( f_{HRTIM} \) clock-related latency
    1: External event 1 is acting asynchronously on outputs (low latency mode)
    Note: This bit must not be modified once the counter in which the event is used is enabled (TxCEN bit set).
  4. Bits 4:3 EE1SNS[1:0] : External event 1 sensitivity
    00: On active level defined by EE1POL bit
    01: Rising edge, whatever EE1POL bit value
    10: Falling edge, whatever EE1POL bit value
    11: Both edges, whatever EE1POL bit value
  5. Bit 2 EE1POL : External event 1 polarity
    This bit is only significant if EE1SNS[1:0] = 00.
    0: External event is active high
    1: External event is active low
    Note: This parameter cannot be changed once the timer x is enabled. It must be configured prior to setting EE1FAST bit.
  6. Bits 1:0 EE1SRC[1:0] : External event 1 source
    This bitfield selects the External event 1 source. See Table 223 for details.
    00: hrtim_eev1_1
    01: hrtim_eev1_2
    10: hrtim_eev1_3
    11: hrtim_eev1_4
    Note: This parameter cannot be changed once the timer x is enabled. It must be configured prior to setting EE1FAST bit.

28.5.69 HRTIM timer external event control register 2 (HRTIM_EECR2)

Address offset: 0x3B4

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.EE10SNS[1:0]EE10POLEE10SRC[1:0]Res.EE9SNS[1:0]EE9POLEE9SRC[1:0]Res.EE8SNS[1]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
EE8SNS[0]EE8POLEE8SRC[1:0]Res.EE7SNS[1:0]EE7POLEE7SRC[1:0]Res.EE6SNS[1:0]EE6POLEE6SRC[1:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:29 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 28:27 EE10SNS[1:0] : External event 10 sensitivity

Refer to EE1SNS[1:0] description.

Bit 26 EE10POL : External event 10 polarity

Refer to EE1POL description.

Bits 25:24 EE10SRC[1:0] : External event 10 source

Refer to EE1SRC[1:0] description.

Bit 23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 22:21 EE9SNS[1:0] : External event 9 sensitivity

Refer to EE1SNS[1:0] description.

Bit 20 EE9POL : External event 9 polarity

Refer to EE1POL description.

Bits 19:18 EE9SRC[1:0] : External event 9 source

Refer to EE1SRC[1:0] description.

Bit 17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 16:15 EE8SNS[1:0] : External event 8 sensitivity

Refer to EE1SNS[1:0] description.

Bit 14 EE8POL : External event 8 polarity

Refer to EE1POL description.

Bits 13:12 EE8SRC[1:0] : External event 8 source

Refer to EE1SRC[1:0] description.

Bit 11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 10:9 EE7SNS[1:0] : External event 7 sensitivity

Refer to EE1SNS[1:0] description.

Bit 8 EE7POL : External event 7 polarity

Refer to EE1POL description.

Bits 7:6 EE7SRC[1:0] : External event 7 source

Refer to EE1SRC[1:0] description.

Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 4:3 EE6SNS[1:0] : External event 6 sensitivity
Refer to EE1SNS[1:0] description.

Bit 2 EE6POL : External event 6 polarity
Refer to EE1POL description.

Bits 1:0 EE6SRC[1:0] : External event 6 source
Refer to EE1SRC[1:0] description.

28.5.70 HRTIM timer external event control register 3 (HRTIM_EECR3)

Address offset: 0x3B8

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
EEVSD[1:0]Res.Res.EE10F[3:0]Res.Res.EE9F[3:0]Res.Res.
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
EE8F[3:0]Res.Res.EE7F[3:0]Res.Res.EE6F[3:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:30 EEVSD[1:0] : External event sampling clock division

This bitfield indicates the division ratio between the timer clock frequency ( \( f_{HRTIM} \) ) and the external event signal sampling clock ( \( f_{EEVS} \) ) used by the digital filters.

Bits 29:28 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 27:24 EE10F[3:0] : External event 10 filter
Refer to EE6F[3:0] description.

Bits 23:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 21:18 EE9F[3:0] : External event 9 filter
Refer to EE6F[3:0] description.

Bits 17:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 15:12 EE8F[3:0] : External event 8 filter
Refer to EE6F[3:0] description.

Bits 11:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 9:6 EE7F[3:0] : External event 7 filter

Refer to EE6F[3:0] description.

Bits 5:4 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 3:0 EE6F[3:0] : External event 6 filter

This bitfield defines the frequency used to sample external event 6 input and the length of the digital filter applied to EEV6. The digital filter is made of a counter in which N valid samples are needed to validate a transition on the output.

0000: Filter disabled

0001: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) , N=2

0010: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) , N=4

0011: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{HRTIM}} \) , N=8

0100: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{EEVS}}/2 \) , N=6

0101: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{EEVS}}/2 \) , N=8

0110: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{EEVS}}/4 \) , N=6

0111: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{EEVS}}/4 \) , N=8

1000: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{EEVS}}/8 \) , N=6

1001: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{EEVS}}/8 \) , N=8

1010: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{EEVS}}/16 \) , N=5

1011: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{EEVS}}/16 \) , N=6

1100: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{EEVS}}/16 \) , N=8

1101: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{EEVS}}/32 \) , N=5

1110: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{EEVS}}/32 \) , N=6

1111: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{EEVS}}/32 \) , N=8

28.5.71 HRTIM ADC trigger 1 register (HRTIM_ADC1R)

Address offset: 0x3BC

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
ADC1
TEPER
ADC1
TEC4
ADC1
TEC3
ADC1
TFRST
ADC1
TDPER
ADC1
TDC4
ADC1
TDC3
ADC1
TFPER
ADC1
TCPER
ADC1
TCC4
ADC1
TCC3
ADC1
TFC4
ADC1
TBRST
ADC1
TBPER
ADC1
TBC4
ADC1
TBC3
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
ADC1
TFC3
ADC1
TARST
ADC1
TAPER
ADC1
TAC4
ADC1
TAC3
ADC1
TFC2
ADC1
EEV5
ADC1
EEV4
ADC1
EEV3
ADC1
EEV2
ADC1
EEV1
ADC1
MPER
ADC1
MC4
ADC1
MC3
ADC1
MC2
ADC1
MC1
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bit 31 ADC1TEPER : ADC trigger 1 on timer E period

Refer to ADC1TAPER description.

Bit 30 ADC1TEC4 : ADC trigger 1 on timer E compare 4

Refer to ADC1TFC2 description.

Bit 29 ADC1TEC3 : ADC trigger 1 on timer E compare 3

Refer to ADC1TFC2 description.

Bit 28 ADC1TFRST : ADC trigger 1 on timer F reset and counter roll-over (1)

Refer to ADC1TARST description.

Bit 27 ADC1TDPER : ADC trigger 1 on timer D period

Refer to ADC1TAPER description.

  1. Bit 26 ADC1TDC4 : ADC trigger 1 on timer D compare 4
    Refer to ADC1TFC2 description.
  2. Bit 25 ADC1TDC3 : ADC trigger 1 on timer D compare 3
    Refer to ADC1TFC2 description.
  3. Bit 24 ADC1TFPER : ADC trigger 1 on timer F period
    Refer to ADC1TAPER description.
  4. Bit 23 ADC1TCPER : ADC trigger 1 on timer C period
    Refer to ADC1TAPER description.
  5. Bit 22 ADC1TCC4 : ADC trigger 1 on timer C compare 4
    Refer to ADC1TFC2 description.
  6. Bit 21 ADC1TCC3 : ADC trigger 1 on timer C compare 3
    Refer to ADC1TFC2 description.
  7. Bit 20 ADC1TFC4 : ADC trigger 1 on timer F compare 4
    Refer to ADC1TAC2 description.
  8. Bit 19 ADC1TBRST : ADC trigger 1 on timer B reset and counter roll-over (1)
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon timer B reset and roll-over event, on ADC trigger 1 output.
  9. Bit 18 ADC1TBP : ADC trigger 1 on timer B period
    Refer to ADC1TAPER description.
  10. Bit 17 ADC1TBC4 : ADC trigger 1 on timer B compare 4
    Refer to ADC1TFC2 description.
  11. Bit 16 ADC1TBC3 : ADC trigger 1 on timer B compare 3
    Refer to ADC1TFC2 description.
  12. Bit 15 ADC1TFC3 : ADC trigger 1 on timer F compare 3
    Refer to ADC1TFC2 description.
  13. Bit 14 ADC1TARST : ADC trigger 1 on timer A reset and counter roll-over (1)
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon timer A reset and roll-over event, on ADC trigger 1 output.
  14. Bit 13 ADC1TAPER : ADC trigger 1 on timer A period
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon timer A period event, on ADC trigger 1 output.
  15. Bit 12 ADC1TAC4 : ADC trigger 1 on timer A compare 4
    Refer to ADC1TFC2 description.
  16. Bit 11 ADC1TAC3 : ADC trigger 1 on timer A compare 3
    Refer to ADC1TFC2 description.
  17. Bit 10 ADC1TFC2 : ADC trigger 1 on timer F compare 2
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon timer F compare 2 event, on ADC trigger 1 output.
  18. Bit 9 ADC1EEV5 : ADC trigger 1 on external event 5 (1)
    Refer to ADC1EEV1 description.
  19. Bit 8 ADC1EEV4 : ADC trigger 1 on external event 4 (1)
    Refer to ADC1EEV1 description.
  1. Bit 7 ADC1EEV3 : ADC trigger 1 on external event 3 (1)
    Refer to ADC1EEV1 description.
  2. Bit 6 ADC1EEV2 : ADC trigger 1 on external event 2 (1)
    Refer to ADC1EEV1 description.
  3. Bit 5 ADC1EEV1 : ADC trigger 1 on external event 1 (1)
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon external event 1, on ADC trigger 1 output.
  4. Bit 4 ADC1MPER : ADC trigger 1 on master period
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon master timer period event, on ADC trigger 1 output.
  5. Bit 3 ADC1MC4 : ADC trigger 1 on master compare 4
    Refer to ADC1MC1 description.
  6. Bit 2 ADC1MC3 : ADC trigger 1 on master compare 3
    Refer to ADC1MC1 description.
  7. Bit 1 ADC1MC2 : ADC trigger 1 on master compare 2
    Refer to ADC1MC1 description.
  8. Bit 0 ADC1MC1 : ADC trigger 1 on master compare 1
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon master compare 1 event, on ADC trigger 1 output.
  1. 1. These triggers are differing from HRTIM_ADC2R/HRTIM_ADC4R to HRTIM_ADC1R/HRTIM_ADC3R.

28.5.72 HRTIM ADC trigger 2 register (HRTIM_ADC2R)

Address offset: 0x3C0

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
ADC2 TERSTADC2 TEC4ADC2 TEC3ADC2 TEC2ADC2 TDRSTADC2 TDPERADC2 TDC4ADC2 TFPERADC2T DC2ADC2T CRSTADC2T CPERADC2T CC4ADC2 TFC4ADC2T CC2ADC2T BPERADC2T BC4
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
ADC2 TFC3ADC2 TBC2ADC2 TAPERADC2 TAC4ADC2 TFC2ADC2 TAC2ADC2 EEV10ADC2 EEV9ADC2 EEV8ADC2 EEV7ADC2 EEV6ADC2 MPERADC2 MC4ADC2 MC3ADC2 MC2ADC2 MC1
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bit 31 ADC2TERST : ADC trigger 2 on timer E reset and counter roll-over (1)

Refer to ADC2TCRST description.

Bit 30 ADC2TEC4 : ADC trigger 2 on timer E compare 4

Refer to ADC2TAC2 description.

Bit 29 ADC2TEC3 : ADC trigger 2 on timer E compare 3

Refer to ADC2TAC2 description.

Bit 28 ADC2TEC2 : ADC trigger 2 on timer E compare 2

Refer to ADC2TAC2 description.

Bit 27 ADC2TDRST : ADC trigger 2 on timer D reset and counter roll-over (1)

Refer to ADC2TCRST description.

Bit 26 ADC2TDPER : ADC trigger 2 on timer D period

Refer to ADC2TAPER description.

Bit 25 ADC2TDC4 : ADC trigger 2 on timer D compare 4

Refer to ADC2TAC2 description.

Bit 24 ADC2TFPER : ADC trigger 2 on timer F period

Refer to ADC2TAPER description.

Bit 23 ADC2TDC2 : ADC trigger 2 on timer D compare 2

Refer to ADC2TAC2 description.

Bit 22 ADC2TCRST : ADC trigger 2 on timer C reset and counter roll-over (1)

This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon timer C reset and roll-over event, on ADC trigger 1 output.

Bit 21 ADC2TCPER : ADC trigger 2 on timer C period

Refer to ADC2TAPER description.

Bit 20 ADC2TCC4 : ADC trigger 2 on timer C compare 4

Refer to ADC2TAC2 description.

Bit 19 ADC2TFC4 : ADC trigger 2 on timer F compare 4

Refer to ADC2TAC2 description.

Bit 18 ADC2TCC2 : ADC trigger 2 on timer C compare 2

Refer to ADC2TAC2 description.

Bit 17 ADC2TBPER : ADC trigger 2 on timer B period

Refer to ADC2TAPER description.

  1. Bit 16 ADC2TBC4 : ADC trigger 2 on timer B compare 4
    Refer to ADC2TAC2 description.
  2. Bit 15 ADC2TFC3 : ADC trigger 2 on timer F compare 3
    Refer to ADC2TAC2 description.
  3. Bit 14 ADC2TBC2 : ADC trigger 2 on timer B compare 2
    Refer to ADC2TAC2 description.
  4. Bit 13 ADC2TAPER : ADC trigger 2 on timer A period
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon timer A event, on ADC trigger 2 output.
  5. Bit 12 ADC2TAC4 : ADC trigger 2 on timer A compare 4
    Refer to ADC2TAC2 description.
  6. Bit 11 ADC2TFC2 : ADC trigger 2 on timer F compare 2
    Refer to ADC2TAC2 description.
  7. Bit 10 ADC2TAC2 : ADC trigger 2 on timer A compare 2
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon timer A compare 2, on ADC trigger 2 output.
  8. Bit 9 ADC2EEV10 : ADC trigger 2 on external event 10 (1)
    Refer to ADC2EEV6 description.
  9. Bit 8 ADC2EEV9 : ADC trigger 2 on external event 9 (1)
    Refer to ADC2EEV6 description.
  10. Bit 7 ADC2EEV8 : ADC trigger 2 on external event 8 (1)
    Refer to ADC2EEV6 description.
  11. Bit 6 ADC2EEV7 : ADC trigger 2 on external event 7 (1)
    Refer to ADC2EEV6 description.
  12. Bit 5 ADC2EEV6 : ADC trigger 2 on external event 6 (1)
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon external event 6, on ADC trigger 2 output.
  13. Bit 4 ADC2MPER : ADC trigger 2 on master period
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon master period event, on ADC trigger 2 output.
  14. Bit 3 ADC2MC4 : ADC trigger 2 on master compare 4
    Refer to ADC2MC1 description.
  15. Bit 2 ADC2MC3 : ADC trigger 2 on master compare 3
    Refer to ADC2MC1 description.
  16. Bit 1 ADC2MC2 : ADC trigger 2 on master compare 2
    Refer to ADC2MC1 description.
  17. Bit 0 ADC2MC1 : ADC trigger 2 on master compare 1
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon master compare 1 event, on ADC trigger 2 output.
  1. 1. These triggers are differing from HRTIM_ADC1R/HRTIM_ADC3R to HRTIM_ADC2R/HRTIM_ADC4R.

28.5.73 HRTIM ADC trigger 3 register (HRTIM_ADC3R)

Address offset: 0x3C4

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
ADC3
TEPER
ADC3
TEC4
ADC3
TEC3
ADC3
TFRST
ADC3
TDPER
ADC3
TDC4
ADC3
TDC3
ADC3
TFPER
ADC3
TCPER
ADC3
TCC4
ADC3
TCC3
ADC3
TFC4
ADC3
TBRST
ADC3
TBPER
ADC3
TBC4
ADC3
TBC3
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
ADC3
TFC3
ADC3
TARST
ADC3
TAPER
ADC3
TAC4
ADC3
TAC3
ADC3
TFC2
ADC3
EEV5
ADC3
EEV4
ADC3
EEV3
ADC3
EEV2
ADC3
EEV1
ADC3
MPER
ADC3
MC4
ADC3
MC3
ADC3
MC2
ADC3
MC1
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bit 31 ADC3TEPER : ADC trigger 3 on timer E period

Refer to ADC3TAPER description.

Bit 30 ADC3TEC4 : ADC trigger 3 on timer E compare 4

Refer to ADC3TFC2 description.

Bit 29 ADC3TEC3 : ADC trigger 3 on timer E compare 3

Refer to ADC3TFC2 description.

Bit 28 ADC3TFRST : ADC trigger 3 on timer F reset and counter roll-over (1)

Refer to ADC3TARST description.

Bit 27 ADC3TDPER : ADC trigger 3 on timer D period

Refer to ADC3TAPER description.

Bit 26 ADC3TDC4 : ADC trigger 3 on timer D compare 4

Refer to ADC3TFC2 description.

Bit 25 ADC3TDC3 : ADC trigger 3 on timer D compare 3

Refer to ADC3TFC2 description.

Bit 24 ADC3TFPER : ADC trigger 3 on timer F period

Refer to ADC3TAPER description.

Bit 23 ADC3TCPER : ADC trigger 3 on timer C period

Refer to ADC3TAPER description.

Bit 22 ADC3TCC4 : ADC trigger 3 on timer C compare 4

Refer to ADC3TFC2 description.

Bit 21 ADC3TCC3 : ADC trigger 3 on timer C compare 3

Refer to ADC3TFC2 description.

Bit 20 ADC3TFC4 : ADC trigger 3 on timer F compare 4

Refer to ADC3TAC2 description.

Bit 19 ADC3TBRST : ADC trigger 3 on timer B reset and counter roll-over (1)

This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon timer B reset and roll-over event, on ADC trigger 1 output.

Bit 18 ADC3TBPER : ADC trigger 3 on timer B period

Refer to ADC3TAPER description.

Bit 17 ADC3TBC4 : ADC trigger 3 on timer B compare 4

Refer to ADC3TFC2 description.

  1. Bit 16 ADC3TBC3 : ADC trigger 3 on timer B compare 3
    Refer to ADC3TFC2 description.
  2. Bit 15 ADC3TFC3 : ADC trigger 3 on timer F compare 3
    Refer to ADC3TFC2 description.
  3. Bit 14 ADC3TARST : ADC trigger 3 on timer A reset and counter roll-over (1)
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon timer A reset and roll-over event, on ADC trigger 1 output.
  4. Bit 13 ADC3TAPER : ADC trigger 3 on timer A period
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon timer A period event, on ADC trigger 1 output.
  5. Bit 12 ADC3TAC4 : ADC trigger 3 on timer A compare 4
    Refer to ADC3TFC2 description.
  6. Bit 11 ADC3TAC3 : ADC trigger 3 on timer A compare 3
    Refer to ADC3TFC2 description.
  7. Bit 10 ADC3TFC2 : ADC trigger 3 on timer F compare 2
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon timer F compare 2 event, on ADC trigger 3 output.
  8. Bit 9 ADC3EEV5 : ADC trigger 3 on external event 5 (1)
    Refer to ADC3EEV1 description.
  9. Bit 8 ADC3EEV4 : ADC trigger 3 on external event 4 (1)
    Refer to ADC3EEV1 description.
  10. Bit 7 ADC3EEV3 : ADC trigger 3 on external event 3 (1)
    Refer to ADC3EEV1 description.
  11. Bit 6 ADC3EEV2 : ADC trigger 3 on external event 2 (1)
    Refer to ADC3EEV1 description.
  12. Bit 5 ADC3EEV1 : ADC trigger 3 on external event 1 (1)
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon external event 1, on ADC trigger 3 output.
  13. Bit 4 ADC3MPER : ADC trigger 3 on master period
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon master timer period event, on ADC trigger 3 output.
  14. Bit 3 ADC3MC4 : ADC trigger 3 on master compare 4
    Refer to ADC3MC1 description.
  15. Bit 2 ADC3MC3 : ADC trigger 3 on master compare 3
    Refer to ADC3MC1 description.
  16. Bit 1 ADC3MC2 : ADC trigger 3 on master compare 2
    Refer to ADC3MC1 description.
  17. Bit 0 ADC3MC1 : ADC trigger 3 on master compare 1
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon master compare 1 event, on ADC trigger 3 output.

1. These triggers are differing from HRTIM_ADC2R/HRTIM_ADC4R to HRTIM_ADC1R/HRTIM_ADC3R.

28.5.74 HRTIM ADC trigger 4 register (HRTIM_ADC4R)

Address offset: 0x3C8

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
ADC4
TERST
ADC4
TEC4
ADC4
TEC3
ADC4
TEC2
ADC4
TDRST
ADC4
TDPER
ADC4
TDC4
ADC4
TFPER
ADC4T
DC2
ADC4T
CRST
ADC4T
CPER
ADC4T
CC4
ADC4
TFC4
ADC4T
CC2
ADC4T
BPER
ADC4T
BC4
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
ADC4
TFC3
ADC4
TBC2
ADC4
TAPER
ADC4
TAC4
ADC4
TFC2
ADC4
TAC2
ADC4
EEV10
ADC4
EEV9
ADC4
EEV8
ADC4
EEV7
ADC4
EEV6
ADC4
MPER
ADC4
MC4
ADC4
MC3
ADC4
MC2
ADC4
MC1
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bit 31 ADC4TERST : ADC trigger 4 on timer E reset and counter roll-over (1)

Refer to ADC4TCRST description.

Bit 30 ADC4TEC4 : ADC trigger 4 on timer E compare 4

Refer to ADC4TAC2 description.

Bit 29 ADC4TEC3 : ADC trigger 4 on timer E compare 3

Refer to ADC4TAC2 description.

Bit 28 ADC4TEC2 : ADC trigger 4 on timer E compare 2

Refer to ADC4TAC2 description.

Bit 27 ADC4TDRST : ADC trigger 4 on timer D reset and counter roll-over (1)

Refer to ADC4TCRST description.

Bit 26 ADC4TDPER : ADC trigger 4 on timer D period

Refer to ADC4TAPER description.

Bit 25 ADC4TDC4 : ADC trigger 4 on timer D compare 4

Refer to ADC4TAC2 description.

Bit 24 ADC4TFPER : ADC trigger 4 on timer F period

Refer to ADC4TAPER description.

Bit 23 ADC4TDC2 : ADC trigger 2 on timer D compare 2

Refer to ADC4TAC2 description.

Bit 22 ADC4TCRST : ADC trigger 4 on timer C reset and counter roll-over (1)

This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon timer C reset and roll-over event, on ADC trigger 1 output.

Bit 21 ADC4TCPER : ADC trigger 4 on timer C period

Refer to ADC4TAPER description.

Bit 20 ADC4TCC4 : ADC trigger 4 on timer C compare 4

Refer to ADC4TAC2 description.

Bit 19 ADC4TFC4 : ADC trigger 4 on timer F compare 4

Refer to ADC4TAC2 description.

Bit 18 ADC4TCC2 : ADC trigger 4 on timer C compare 2

Refer to ADC4TAC2 description.

Bit 17 ADC4TBPER : ADC trigger 4 on timer B period

Refer to ADC4TAPER description.

  1. Bit 16 ADC4TBC4 : ADC trigger 4 on timer B compare 4
    Refer to ADC4TAC2 description.
  2. Bit 15 ADC4TFC3 : ADC trigger 4 on timer F compare 3
    Refer to ADC4TAC2 description.
  3. Bit 14 ADC4TBC2 : ADC trigger 4 on timer B compare 2
    Refer to ADC4TAC2 description.
  4. Bit 13 ADC4TAPER : ADC trigger 4 on timer A period
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon timer A event, on ADC trigger 2 output.
  5. Bit 12 ADC4TAC4 : ADC trigger 4 on timer A compare 4
    Refer to ADC4TAC2 description.
  6. Bit 11 ADC4TFC2 : ADC trigger 4 on timer F compare 2
    Refer to ADC4TAC2 description.
  7. Bit 10 ADC4TAC2 : ADC trigger 4 on timer A compare 2
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon timer A compare 2, on ADC trigger 2 output.
  8. Bit 9 ADC4EEV10 : ADC trigger 4 on external event 10 (1)
    Refer to ADC4EEV6 description.
  9. Bit 8 ADC4EEV9 : ADC trigger 4 on external event 9 (1)
    Refer to ADC4EEV6 description.
  10. Bit 7 ADC4EEV8 : ADC trigger 4 on external event 8 (1)
    Refer to ADC4EEV6 description.
  11. Bit 6 ADC4EEV7 : ADC trigger 4 on external event 7 (1)
    Refer to ADC4EEV6 description.
  12. Bit 5 ADC4EEV6 : ADC trigger 4 on external event 6 (1)
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon external event 6, on ADC trigger 2 output.
  13. Bit 4 ADC4MPER : ADC trigger 4 on master period
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon master period event, on ADC trigger 2 output.
  14. Bit 3 ADC4MC4 : ADC trigger 4 on master compare 4
    Refer to ADC4MC1 description.
  15. Bit 2 ADC4MC3 : ADC trigger 4 on master compare 3
    Refer to ADC4MC1 description.
  16. Bit 1 ADC4MC2 : ADC trigger 4 on master compare 2
    Refer to ADC4MC1 description.
  17. Bit 0 ADC4MC1 : ADC trigger 4 on master compare 1
    This bit enables the generation of an ADC trigger upon master compare 1 event, on ADC trigger 2 output.
  1. 1. These triggers are differing from HRTIM_ADC1R/HRTIM_ADC3R to HRTIM_ADC2R/HRTIM_ADC4R.

28.5.75 HRTIM DLL control register (HRTIM_DLLCR)

Address offset: 0x3CC

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.CALRTE[1:0]CALENCAL
rwrwrww

Bits 31:4 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 3:2 CALRTE[1:0] : DLL Calibration rate

This defines the DLL calibration periodicity.

00: \( 1048576 \cdot t_{HRTIM} \) (6.168 ms for \( f_{HRTIM} = 170 \) MHz)

01: \( 131072 \cdot t_{HRTIM} \) (771 \( \mu \) s for \( f_{HRTIM} = 170 \) MHz)

10: \( 16384 \cdot t_{HRTIM} \) (96 \( \mu \) s for \( f_{HRTIM} = 170 \) MHz)

11: \( 2048 \cdot t_{HRTIM} \) (12 \( \mu \) s for \( f_{HRTIM} = 170 \) MHz)

Bit 1 CALEN : DLL Calibration Enable

This bit enables the periodic DLL calibration, as per CALRTE[1:0] bit setting. When CALEN bit is reset, the calibration can be started in single-shot mode with CAL bit.

0: Periodic calibration disabled

1: Calibration is performed periodically, as per CALRTE[1:0] setting

Note: CALEN must not be set simultaneously with CAL bit

Bit 0 CAL : DLL Calibration Start

This bit starts the DLL calibration process. It is write-only.

0: No calibration request

1: Calibration start

Note: CAL must not be set simultaneously with CALEN bit

28.5.76 HRTIM fault input register 1 (HRTIM_FLTINR1)

Address offset: 0x3D0

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
FLT4LCKFLT4F[3:0]FLT4SRC[0]FLT4PFLT4EFLT3LCKFLT3F[3:0]FLT3SRC[0]FLT3PFLT3E
rworwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
FLT2LCKFLT2F[3:0]FLT2SRC[0]FLT2PFLT2EFLT1LCKFLT1F[3:0]FLT1SRC[0]FLT1PFLT1E
rworwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bit 31 FLT4LCK : Fault 4 lock

Refer to FLT5LCK description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Bits 30:27 FLT4F[3:0] : Fault 4 filter

Refer to FLT5F[3:0] description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Bit 26 FLT4SRC[0] : Fault 4 source bit 0

Refer to FLT5SRC[0] description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Bit 25 FLT4P : Fault 4 polarity

Refer to FLT5P description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Bit 24 FLT4E : Fault 4 enable

Refer to FLT5E description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Bit 23 FLT3LCK : Fault 3 lock

Refer to FLT5LCK description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Bits 22:19 FLT3F[3:0] : Fault 3 filter

Refer to FLT5F[3:0] description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Bit 18 FLT3SRC[0] : Fault 3 source bit 0

Refer to FLT5SRC[0] description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Bit 17 FLT3P : Fault 3 polarity

Refer to FLT5P description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Bit 16 FLT3E : Fault 3 enable

Refer to FLT5E description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Bit 15 FLT2LCK : Fault 2 lock

Refer to FLT5LCK description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Bits 14:11 FLT2F[3:0] : Fault 2 filter

Refer to FLT5F[3:0] description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Bit 10 FLT2SRC[0] : Fault 2 source bit 0

Refer to FLT5SRC[0] description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Bit 9 FLT2P : Fault 2 polarity

Refer to FLT2P description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Bit 8 FLT2E : Fault 2 enable

Refer to FLT5E description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Bit 7 FLT1LCK : Fault 1 lock

Refer to FLT5LCK description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Bits 6:3 FLT1F[3:0] : Fault 1 filter

Refer to FLT5F[3:0] description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Bit 2 FLT1SRC[0] : Fault 1 source bit 0

Refer to FLT5SRC[0] description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Bit 1 FLT1P : Fault 1 polarity

Refer to FLT5P description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

Bit 0 FLT1E : Fault 1 enable

Refer to FLT5E description in HRTIM_FLTINR2 register.

28.5.77 HRTIM fault input register 2 (HRTIM_FLTINR2)

Address offset: 0x3D4

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.FLTSD[1:0]Res.Res.FLT6SRC[1]FLT5SRC[1]FLT4SRC[1]FLT3SRC[1]FLT2SRC[1]FLT1SRC[1]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

1514131211109876543210
FLT6LCKFLT6F[3:0]FLT6SRC[0]FLT6PFLT6EFLT5LCKFLT5F[3:0]FLT5SRC[0]FLT5PFLT5E
rworwrwrwrwrwrwrwrworwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:26 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 25:24 FLTSD[1:0] : Fault sampling clock division

This bitfield indicates the division ratio between the timer clock frequency ( \( f_{HRTIM} \) ) and the fault signal sampling clock ( \( f_{FLTS} \) ) used by the digital filters.

00: \( f_{FLTS}=f_{HRTIM} \)

01: \( f_{FLTS}=f_{HRTIM} / 2 \)

10: \( f_{FLTS}=f_{HRTIM} / 4 \)

11: \( f_{FLTS}=f_{HRTIM} / 8 \)

Note: This bitfield must be written prior to any of the FLTxE enable bits.

Bits 23:22 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 21 FLT6SRC[1] : Fault 6 source bit 1

Refer to FLT5SRC[0] description.

Bit 20 FLT5SRC[1] : Fault 5 source bit 1

Refer to FLT5SRC[0] description.

Bit 19 FLT4SRC[1] : Fault 4 source bit 1

Refer to FLT5SRC[0] description.

Bit 18 FLT3SRC[1] : Fault 3 source bit 1

Refer to FLT5SRC[0] description.

Bit 17 FLT2SRC[1] : Fault 2 source bit 1

Refer to FLT5SRC[0] description.

Bit 16 FLT1SRC[1] : Fault 1 source bit 1

Refer to FLT5SRC[0] description.

Bit 15 FLT6LCK : Fault 6 lock

Refer to FLT5LCK description.

Bits 14:11 FLT6F[3:0] : Fault 6 filter

Refer to FLT5F[3:0] description.

Bit 10 FLT6SRC[0] : Fault 6 source bit 0

Refer to FLT5SRC[0] description.

Bit 9 FLT6P : Fault 6 polarity

Refer to FLT5P description.

Bit 8 FLT6E : Fault 6 enable

Refer to FLT5E description.

Bit 7 FLT5LCK : Fault 5 lock

The FLT5LCK bit modifies the write attributes of the fault programming bit, so that they are protected against spurious write accesses.

This bit is write-once. Once it has been set, it cannot be modified till the next system reset.

0: FLT5E, FLT5P, FLT5SRC[1:0], FLT5F[3:0] and FLT5BLK bits are read/write.

1: FLT5E, FLT5P, FLT5SRC[1:0], FLT5F[3:0] and FLT5BLK bits cannot be written (read-only mode)

Bits 6:3 FLT5F[3:0] : Fault 5 filter

This bitfield defines the frequency used to sample FLT5 input and the length of the digital filter applied to FLT5. The digital filter is made of an event counter in which N events are needed to validate a transition on the output.

0000: No filter, FLT5 acts asynchronously

0001: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{HRTIM}}, N = 2 \)

0010: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{HRTIM}}, N = 4 \)

0011: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{HRTIM}}, N = 8 \)

0100: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{FLT5}}/2, N = 6 \)

0101: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{FLT5}}/2, N = 8 \)

0110: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{FLT5}}/4, N = 6 \)

0111: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{FLT5}}/4, N = 8 \)

1000: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{FLT5}}/8, N = 6 \)

1001: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{FLT5}}/8, N = 8 \)

1010: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{FLT5}}/16, N = 5 \)

1011: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{FLT5}}/16, N = 6 \)

1100: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{FLT5}}/16, N = 8 \)

1101: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{FLT5}}/32, N = 5 \)

1110: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{FLT5}}/32, N = 6 \)

1111: \( f_{\text{SAMPLING}} = f_{\text{FLT5}}/32, N = 8 \)

Note: This bitfield is written only when FLT5E enable bit is reset.

This bitfield is modified when FLT5LOCK has been programmed.

Bit 2 FLT5SRC[0] : Fault 5 source bit 0

The FLT5SRC[1:0] bitfield selects the FAULT5 input source (refer to Table 222 for connection details).

00: Fault 5 input is HRTIM_FLT5 input pin

01: Fault 5 input is connected to a COMPx output

10: Fault 5 input is EEV5_muxout input pin

01: Reserved

Note: This bitfield is written only when FLT5E enable bit is reset.

Bit 1 FLT5P : Fault 5 polarity

This bit selects the FAULT5 input polarity.

0: Fault 5 input is active low

1: Fault 5 input is active high

Note: This bitfield is written only when FLT5E enable bit is reset.

Bit 0 FLT5E : Fault 5 enable

This bit enables the global FAULT5 input circuitry.

0: Fault 5 input disabled

1: Fault 5 input enabled

28.5.78 HRTIM burst DMA master timer update register (HRTIM_BDMUPR)

Address offset: 0x3D8

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.MCMP4MCMP3MCMP2MCMP1MREPMPERMCNTMDIERMICRMCR
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:10 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 9 MCMP4 : MCMP4R register update enable
Refer to MCR description.

Bit 8 MCMP3 : MCMP3R register update enable
Refer to MCR description.

Bit 7 MCMP2 : MCMP2R register update enable
Refer to MCR description.

Bit 6 MCMP1 : MCMP1R register update enable
Refer to MCR description.

Bit 5 MREP : MREP register update enable
Refer to MCR description.

Bit 4 MPER : MPER register update enable
Refer to MCR description.

Bit 3 MCNT : MCNTR register update enable
Refer to MCR description.

Bit 2 MDIER : MDIER register update enable
Refer to MCR description.

Bit 1 MICR : MICR register update enable
Refer to MCR description.

Bit 0 MCR : MCR register update enable

This bit defines if the master timer MCR register is part of the list of registers to be updated by the burst DMA.

0: MCR register is not updated by burst DMA accesses

1: MCR register is updated by burst DMA accesses

28.5.79 HRTIM burst DMA timer x update register (HRTIM_BDTxUPR)
(x = A to F)

Address offset: Block A: 0x3DC

Address offset: Block B: 0x3E0

Address offset: Block C: 0x3E4

Address offset: Block D: 0x3E8

Address offset: Block E: 0x3EC

Address offset: Block F: 0x3F4

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.TIMxE
EER3
TIMx
CR2
TIMxFL
TR
TIMxO
UTR
TIMxC
HPR
TIMxR
STR
TIMxE
EER2
rwrwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
TIMxE
EER1
TIMxR
ST2R
TIMxS
ET2R
TIMxR
ST1R
TIMxS
ET1R
TIMxD
TR
TIMxC
MP4
TIMxC
MP3
TIMxC
MP2
TIMxC
MP1
TIMxR
EP
TIMxP
ER
TIMxC
NT
TIMxDI
ER
TIMxI
CR
TIMxC
R
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 22 TIMxEER3 : HRTIM_EEFxR3 register update enable timer x
Refer to TIMxCR description.

Bit 21 TIMxCR2 : HRTIM_TIMxCR2 register update enable timer x
Refer to TIMxCR description.

Bit 20 TIMxFLTR : HRTIM_FLTxR register update enable timer x
Refer to TIMxCR description.

Bit 19 TIMxOUTR : HRTIM_OUTxR register update enable timer x
Refer to TIMxCR description.

Bit 18 TIMxCHPR : HRTIM_CHPxR register update enable timer x
Refer to TIMxCR description.

Bit 17 TIMxRSTR : HRTIM_RSTxR register update enable timer x
Refer to TIMxCR description.

Bit 16 TIMxEER2 : HRTIM_EEFxR2 register update enable timer x
Refer to TIMxCR description.

Bit 15 TIMxEER1 : HRTIM_EEFxR1 register update enable timer x
Refer to TIMxCR description.

Bit 14 TIMxRST2R : HRTIM_RST2xR register update enable timer x
Refer to TIMxCR description.

Bit 13 TIMxSET2R : HRTIM_SET2xR register update enable timer x
Refer to TIMxCR description.

Bit 12 TIMxRST1R : HRTIM_RST1xR register update enable timer x
Refer to TIMxCR description.

  1. Bit 11 TIMxSET1R : HRTIM_SET1xR register update enable timer x
    Refer to TIMxCR description.
  2. Bit 10 TIMxDTR : HRTIM_DTxR register update enable timer x
    Refer to TIMxCR description.
  3. Bit 9 TIMxCMP4 : HRTIM_CMP4xR register update enable timer x
    Refer to TIMxCR description.
  4. Bit 8 TIMxCMP3 : HRTIM_CMP3xR register update enable timer x
    Refer to TIMxCR description.
  5. Bit 7 TIMxCMP2 : HRTIM_CMP2xR register update enable timer x
    Refer to TIMxCR description.
  6. Bit 6 TIMxCMP1 : HRTIM_CMP1xR register update enable timer x
    Refer to TIMxCR description.
  7. Bit 5 TIMxREP : HRTIM_REPxR register update enable timer x
    Refer to TIMxCR description.
  8. Bit 4 TIMxPER : HRTIM_PERxR register update enable timer x
    Refer to TIMxCR description.
  9. Bit 3 TIMxCNT : HRTIM_CNTxR register update enable timer x
    Refer to TIMxCR description.
  10. Bit 2 TIMxDIER : HRTIM_TIMxDIER register update enable timer x
    Refer to TIMxCR description.
  11. Bit 1 TIMxICR : HRTIM_TIMxICR register update enable timer x
    Refer to TIMxCR description.
  12. Bit 0 TIMxCR : HRTIM_TIMxCR register update enable timer x
    This bit defines if the master timer MCR register is part of the list of registers to be updated by the burst DMA.
    0: HRTIM_TIMxCR register is not updated by burst DMA accesses
    1: HRTIM_TIMxCR register is updated by burst DMA accesses

28.5.80 HRTIM burst DMA data register (HRTIM_BDMADR)

Address offset: 0x3F0

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
BDMADR[31:16]
wwwwwwwwwwwwwwww
1514131211109876543210
BDMADR[15:0]
wwwwwwwwwwwwwwww

Bits 31:0 BDMADR[31:0] : Burst DMA data register

Write accesses to this register triggers:

28.5.81 HRTIM ADC extended trigger register (HRTIM_ADCER)

Address offset: 0x3F8

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.ADC10TRG[4:0]ADC9TRG[4:0]ADC8TRG[4:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
Res.ADC7TRG[4:0]ADC6TRG[4:0]ADC5TRG[4:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bit 31 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 30:26 ADC10TRG[4:0] : ADC trigger 10 selection

This bit selects the ADC trigger 10 source.

Refer to ADC6TRG[4:0] description.

Bits 25:21 ADC9TRG[4:0] : ADC trigger 9 selection

This bit selects the ADC trigger 9 source.

Refer to ADC5TRG[4:0] description.

Bits 20:16 ADC8TRG[4:0] : ADC trigger 8 selection

This bit selects the ADC trigger 8 source.

Refer to ADC6TRG[4:0] description.

Bit 15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 14:10 ADC7TRG[4:0] : ADC trigger 7 selection

This bit selects the ADC trigger 7 source.

Refer to ADC5TRG[4:0] description.

Bits 9:5 ADC6TRG[4:0] : ADC trigger 6 selection

This bit selects the ADC trigger 6 source.

Bits 4:0 ADC5TRG[4:0] : ADC trigger 5 selection

This bit selects the ADC trigger 5 source.

28.5.82 HRTIM ADC trigger update register (HRTIM_ADCUR)

Address offset: 0x3FC

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.AD10USRC[2:0]Res.AD9USRC[2:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
Res.AD8USRC[2:0]Res.AD7USRC[2:0]Res.AD6USRC[2:0]Res.AD5USRC[2:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 22:20 AD10USRC[2:0] : ADC trigger 10 update source

Refer to AD5USRC[2:0] description.

Bit 19 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 18:16 AD9USRC[2:0] : ADC trigger 9 update source

Refer to AD5USRC[2:0] description.

Bit 15 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 14:12 AD8USRC[2:0] : ADC trigger 8 update source

Refer to AD5USRC[2:0] description.

Bit 11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 10:8 AD7USRC[2:0] : ADC trigger 7 update source

Refer to AD5USRC[2:0] description.

Bit 7 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 6:4 AD6USRC[2:0] : ADC trigger 6 update source

Refer to AD5USRC[2:0] description.

Bit 3 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 2:0 AD5USRC[2:0] : ADC trigger 5 update source

These bits define the source which triggers the update of the ADC5TRG[4:0] bitfield in the HRTIM_ADCER register (transfer from preload to active register). It only defines the source timer. The precise condition is defined within the timer itself, with the BRSTDMA[1:0] bitfield in HRTIM_MCR or the UPDGAT[3:0] bitfield in HRTIM_TIMxCR register.

000: Master timer

001: Timer A

010: Timer B

011: Timer C

100: Timer D

101: Timer E

110: Timer F

111: Reserved

28.5.83 HRTIM ADC post scaler register 1 (HRTIM_ADCPS1)

Address offset: 0x400

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.ADC5PSC[4:0]Res.ADC4PSC[4:0]Res.ADC3PSC[4:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
ADC3PSC[3:0]Res.ADC2PSC[4:0]Res.ADC1PSC[4:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:29 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 28:24 ADC5PSC[4:0] : ADC 5 post scaler
Refer to ADC1PSC[4:0] description.

Bit 23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 22:18 ADC4PSC[4:0] : ADC 4 post scaler
Refer to ADC1PSC[4:0] description.

Bit 17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 16:12 ADC3PSC[4:0] : ADC 3 post scaler
Refer to ADC1PSC[4:0] description.

Bit 11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 10:6 ADC2PSC[4:0] : ADC 2 post scaler
Refer to ADC1PSC[4:0] description.

Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 4:0 ADC1PSC[4:0] : ADC 1 post scaler
This bit selects the ADC 1 Post scaler ratio.

28.5.84 HRTIM ADC post scaler register 2 (HRTIM_ADCPS2)

Address offset: 0x404

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.ADC10PSC[4:0]Res.ADC9PSC[4:0]Res.ADC8PSC[4]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
ADC8PSC[3:0]Res.ADC7PSC[4:0]Res.ADC6PSC[4:0]
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:29 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 28:24 ADC10PSC[4:0] : ADC 10 post scaler
Refer to ADC1PSC[4:0] description.

Bit 23 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 22:18 ADC9PSC[4:0] : ADC 9 post scaler
Refer to ADC1PSC[4:0] description.

Bit 17 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 16:12 ADC8PSC[4:0] : ADC 8 post scaler
Refer to ADC1PSC[4:0] description.

Bit 11 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 10:6 ADC7PSC[4:0] : ADC 7 post scaler
Refer to ADC1PSC[4:0] description.

Bit 5 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bits 4:0 ADC6PSC[4:0] : ADC 6 post scaler
Refer to ADC1PSC[4:0] description.

28.5.85 HRTIM fault input register 3 (HRTIM_FLTINR3)

Address offset: 0x408

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
FLT4
RSTM
FLT4
CRES
FLT4CNT[3:0]FLT4
BLKS
FLT4
BLKE
FLT3
RSTM
FLT3
CRES
FLT3CNT[3:0]FLT3
BLKS
FLT3
BLKE
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw
1514131211109876543210
FLT2
RSTM
FLT2
CRES
FLT2CNT[3:0]FLT2
BLKS
FLT2
BLKE
FLT1
RSTM
FLT1
CRES
FLT1CNT[3:0]FLT1
BLKS
FLT1
BLKE
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bit 31 FLT4RSTM : Fault 4 reset mode

Refer to FLT5RSTM description.

Bit 30 FLT4CRES : Fault 4 counter reset

Refer to FLT5CRES description.

Bits 29:26 FLT4CNT[3:0] : Fault 4 counter

Refer to FLT5CNT description.

Bit 25 FLT4BLKS : Fault 4 blanking source

Refer to FLT5BLKS description.

Bit 24 FLT4BLKE : Fault 4 blanking enable

Refer to FLT5BLKE description.

Bit 23 FLT3RSTM : Fault 3 reset mode

Refer to FLT5RSTM description.

Bit 22 FLT3CRES : Fault 3 counter reset

Refer to FLT5CRES description.

Bits 21:18 FLT3CNT[3:0] : Fault 3 counter

Refer to FLT5CNT description.

Bit 17 FLT3BLKS : Fault 3 blanking source

Refer to FLT5BLKS description.

Bit 16 FLT3BLKE : Fault 3 blanking enable

Refer to FLT5BLKE description.

Bit 15 FLT2RSTM : Fault 2 reset mode

Refer to FLT5RSTM description.

Bit 14 FLT2CRES : Fault 2 counter reset

Refer to FLT5CRES description.

Bits 13:10 FLT2CNT[3:0] : Fault 2 counter

Refer to FLT5CNT description.

Bit 9 FLT2BLKS : Fault 2 blanking source

Refer to FLT5BLKS description.

Bit 8 FLT2BLKE : Fault 2 blanking enable

Refer to FLT5BLKE description.

  1. Bit 7 FLT1RSTM : Fault 1 reset mode
    Refer to FLT5RSTM description.
  2. Bit 6 FLT1CRES : Fault 1 counter reset
    Refer to FLT5CRES description.
  3. Bits 5:2 FLT1CNT[3:0] : Fault 1 counter
    Refer to FLT5CNT description.
  4. Bit 1 FLT1BLKS : Fault 1 blanking source
    Refer to FLT5BLKS description.
  5. Bit 0 FLT1BLKE : Fault 1 blanking enable
    Refer to FLT5BLKE description.

28.5.86 HRTIM fault input register 4 (HRTIM_FLTINR4)

Address offset: 0x40C

Reset value: 0x0000 0000

31302928272625242322212019181716
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
1514131211109876543210
FLT6
RSTM
FLT6
CRES
FLT6CNT[3:0]FLT6
BLKS
FLT6
BLKE
FLT5
RSTM
FLT5
CRES
FLT5CNT[3:0]FLT5
BLKS
FLT5
BLKE
rwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrwrw

Bits 31:16 Reserved, must be kept at reset value.

Bit 15 FLT6RSTM : Fault 6 reset mode
Refer to FLT5RSTM description.

Bit 14 FLT6CRES : Fault 6 counter reset
Refer to FLT5CRES description.

Bits 13:10 FLT6CNT[3:0] : Fault 6 counter
Refer to FLT5CNT description.

Bit 9 FLT6BLKS : Fault 6 blanking source
Refer to FLT5BLKS description.

Bit 8 FLT6BLKE : Fault 6 blanking enable
Refer to FLT5BLKE description.

Bit 7 FLT5RSTM : Fault 5 reset mode

This bit selects the FAULT5 counter reset mode

0: Fault 5 counter is reset on each reset / roll-over event

1: Fault 5 counter is reset on each reset / roll-over event only if no fault occurred during last counting period.

Note: This bitfield is written only when FLT5E enable bit is reset.

Bit 6 FLT5CRES : Fault 5 counter reset

This bit resets the FAULT5 counter. It is set by software and reset by hardware.

0: No action

1: Fault 5 counter is reset

Bits 5:2 FLT5CNT[3:0]: Fault 5 counter

This bitfield selects the FAULT5 counter threshold. A fault is considered valid when the number of events is equal to the (FLT5CNT[3:0]+1) value.

Bit 1 FLT5BLKS: Fault 5 blanking source

The FTL5BLKS bit selects the FAULT5 blanking source (refer to Table 252 for details).

0: Fault 5 reset-aligned blanking window

1: Fault 5 Moving blanking window

Note: This bitfield is written only when FLT5E enable bit is reset.

Bit 0 FLT5BLKE: Fault 5 blanking enable

The FTL5BLKE bit selects the FAULT5 blanking mode. The blanking source is defined by the FLT5BLKS bit.

0: No blanking on fault 5

1: Fault 5 blanking mode

Note: This bitfield is written only when FLT5E enable bit is reset

28.5.87 HRTIM register map

The tables below summarize the HRTIM registers mapping.

Table 258. HRTIM Register map and reset values – master timer

OffsetRegister313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
0x000HRTIM_MCRBRSTDMA[1:0]MREPURes.PREENDACSYNC[1:0]Res.Res.Res.Res.TFCENTECENTDCENTCCENTBCENTACENMCENSYNCSRC[1:0]SYNCCOUT[1:0]SYNCSTRMSYNCRSTSYNCIN[1:0]INTLVD[1:0]HALFRETRIGCONTCKPSC[2:0]
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x004HRTIM_MISRRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.MUPDSYNCMREPMCMP4MCMP3MCMP2MCMP1
Reset value0000000
0x008HRTIM_MICRRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.MUPDCSYNCCMREPCMCMP4CMCMP3CMCMP2CMCMP1C
Reset value0000000
0x00CHRTIM_MDIER (1)Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.MUPDDESYNCCDEMREPDEMCMP4DEMCMP3DEMCMP2DEMCMP1DERes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.MUPDIESYNCIEMREPIEMCMP4IEMCMP3IEMCMP2IEMCMP1IE
Reset value00000000000000
0x010HRTIM_MCNTRRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.MCNT[15:0]
Reset value000000000000000
0x014HRTIM_MPER (1)Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.MPER[15:0]
Reset value111111111110111
0x018HRTIM_MREP (1)Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.MREP[7:0]
Reset value000000
0x01CHRTIM_MCMP1R (1)Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.MCMP1[15:0]
Reset value000000000000000
0x020ReservedRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
Reset value
0x024HRTIM_MCMP2R (1)Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.MCMP2[15:0]
Reset value000000000000000
0x028HRTIM_MCMP3R (1)Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.MCMP3[15:0]
Reset value000000000000000
0x02CHRTIM_MCMP4R (1)Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.MCMP4[15:0]
Reset value000000000000000

1. This register can be preloaded (see Table 244 on page 943 ).

Table 259. HRTIM register map and reset values – TIMx (x= A..F)

OffsetRegister313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
0x080 (x=A)
0x100 (x=B)
0x180 (x=C)
0x200 (x=D)
0x280 (x=E)
0x300 (x=F)
HRTIM_
TIMxCR
UPDGAT
[3:0]
PREENRes.DACSYNC[1:0]MSTUTEUTDUTCUTBUTAUTXRSTUTXREPUTFUDELCMP4[1:0]DELCMP2[1:0]SYNCSTRTxSYNCRSTxRSYNCUINTLVD[1:0]PSHPLLHALFRETRIGCONTCKPSCx[2:0]
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x084 (x=A)
0x104 (x=B)
0x184 (x=C)
0x204 (x=D)
0x284 (x=E)
0x304 (x=F)
HRTIM_
TIMxISR
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.O2CPYO1CPYO2STATO1STATIPPSTATCPPSTATRes.DLYPRTRSTRSTx2SETx2RSTx1SETx1CPT2CPT1UPDRes.REPCMP4CMP3CMP2CMP1
00000000000000000000
Reset value00000000000000000000
0x088 (x=A)
0x108 (x=B)
0x188 (x=C)
0x208 (x=D)
0x288 (x=E)
0x308 (x=F)
HRTIM_
TIMxICR
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.DLYPRTCRSTCRSTx2CSETx2CRSTx1CSETx1CCPT2CCPT1CUPDCRes.REPCCMP4CCMP3CCMP2CCMP1C
00000000000000
Reset value00000000000000
0x08C (x=A)
0x10C (x=B)
0x18C (x=C)
0x20C (x=D)
0x28C (x=E)
0x30C (x=F)
HRTIM_
TIMxDIER (1)
Res.DLYPRTDERSTDERSTx2DESETx2DERSTx1DESETx1DECPT2DECPT1DEUPDDERes.REPDECMP4DECMP3DECMP2DECMP1DERes.DLYPRTIERSTIERSTx2IESETx2IERSTx1IESETx1IECPT2IECPT1IEUPDIERes.REPIECMP4IECMP3IECMP2IECMP1IE
0000000000000000000000000000
Reset value0000000000000000000000000000
0x090 (x=A)
0x110 (x=B)
0x190 (x=C)
0x210 (x=D)
0x290 (x=E)
0x310 (x=F)
HRTIM_
CNTxR
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.CNTx[15:0]
Reset value0000000000000000
0x094 (x=A)
0x114 (x=B)
0x194 (x=C)
0x214 (x=D)
0x294 (x=E)
0x314 (x=F)
HRTIM_
PERxR (1)
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.PERx[15:0]
Reset value1111111111101111
0x098 (x=A)
0x118 (x=B)
0x198 (x=C)
0x218 (x=D)
0x298 (x=E)
0x318 (x=F)
HRTIM_
REPxR (1)
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.REPx[7:0]
Reset value00000000
0x09C (x=A)
0x11C (x=B)
0x19C (x=C)
0x21C (x=D)
0x29C (x=E)
0x31C (x=F)
HRTIM_
CMP1xR (1)
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.CMP1x[15:0]
Reset value0000000000000000
0x0A0 (x=A)
0x120 (x=B)
0x1A0 (x=C)
0x220 (x=D)
0x2A0 (x=E)
0x320 (x=F)
HRTIM_
CMP1CxR (1)
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.REPx[7:0]CMP1x[15:0]
Reset value000000000000000000000000
0x0A4 (x=A)
0x124 (x=B)
0x1A4 (x=C)
0x224 (x=D)
0x2A4 (x=E)
0x324 (x=F)
HRTIM_
CMP2xR (1)
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.CMP2x[15:0]
Reset value0000000000000000

Table 259. HRTIM register map and reset values – TIMx (x= A..F) (continued)

OffsetRegister313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
0x0A8 (x=A)
0x128 (x=B)
0x1A8 (x=C)
0x228 (x=D)
0x2A8 (x=E)
0x328 (x=F)
HRTIM_
CMP3xR (1)
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.CMP3x[15:0]
Reset value0000000000000000
0x0AC (x=A)
0x12C (x=B)
0x1AC (x=C)
0x22C (x=D)
0x2AC (x=E)
0x32C (x=F)
HRTIM_
CMP4xR (1)
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.CMP4x[15:0]
Reset value0000000000000000
0x0B0 (x=A)
0x130 (x=B)
0x1B0 (x=C)
0x230 (x=D)
0x2B0 (x=E)
0x330 (x=F)
HRTIM_CPT
1xR
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.DIRCPT1x[15:0]
Reset value00000000000000000
0x0B4 (x=A)
0x134 (x=B)
0x1B4 (x=C)
0x234 (x=D)
0x2B4 (x=E)
0x334 (x=F)
HRTIM_CPT
2xR
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.DIRCPT2x[15:0]
Reset value00000000000000000
0x0B8 (x=A)
0x138 (x=B)
0x1B8 (x=C)
0x238 (x=D)
0x2B8 (x=E)
0x338 (x=F)
HRTIM_DTx
R (1)
DTFLKxDTFSLKxRes.Res.Res.Res.SDTFxDTFx[8:0]DTRLKxDTRSLKxRes.DTPRSC[2:0]SDTRxDTRx[8:0]
Reset value00000000000000000000000000
0x0BC (x=A)
0x13C (x=B)
0x1BC (x=C)
0x23C (x=D)
0x2BC (x=E)
0x33C (x=F)
HRTIM_
SETx1R (1)
UPDATEEXTEVENT10EXTEVENT9EXTEVENT8EXTEVENT7EXTEVENT6EXTEVENT5EXTEVENT4EXTEVENT3EXTEVENT2EXTEVENT1TIMEVENT9TIMEVENT8TIMEVENT7TIMEVENT6TIMEVENT5TIMEVENT4TIMEVENT3TIMEVENT2TIMEVENT1MSTCMP4MSTCMP3MSTCMP2MSTCMP1MSTPERCMP4CMP3CMP2CMP1PERRESYNCSST
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x0C0 (x=A)
0x140 (x=B)
0x1C0 (x=C)
0x240 (x=D)
0x2C0 (x=E)
0x340 (x=F)
HRTIM_
RSTx1R (1)
UPDATEEXTEVENT10EXTEVENT9EXTEVENT8EXTEVENT7EXTEVENT6EXTEVENT5EXTEVENT4EXTEVENT3EXTEVENT2EXTEVENT1TIMEVENT9TIMEVENT8TIMEVENT7TIMEVENT6TIMEVENT5TIMEVENT4TIMEVENT3TIMEVENT2TIMEVENT1MSTCMP4MSTCMP3MSTCMP2MSTCMP1MSTPERCMP4CMP3CMP2CMP1PERRESYNCSRT
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x0C4 (x=A)
0x144 (x=B)
0x1C4 (x=C)
0x244 (x=D)
0x2C4 (x=E)
0x344 (x=F)
HRTIM_
SETx2R (1)
UPDATEEXTEVENT10EXTEVENT9EXTEVENT8EXTEVENT7EXTEVENT6EXTEVENT5EXTEVENT4EXTEVENT3EXTEVENT2EXTEVENT1TIMEVENT9TIMEVENT8TIMEVENT7TIMEVENT6TIMEVENT5TIMEVENT4TIMEVENT3TIMEVENT2TIMEVENT1MSTCMP4MSTCMP3MSTCMP2MSTCMP1MSTPERCMP4CMP3CMP2CMP1PERRESYNCSST
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x0C8 (x=A)
0x148 (x=B)
0x1C8 (x=C)
0x248 (x=D)
0x2C8 (x=E)
0x348 (x=F)
HRTIM_
RSTx2R (1)
UPDATEEXTEVENT10EXTEVENT9EXTEVENT8EXTEVENT7EXTEVENT6EXTEVENT5EXTEVENT4EXTEVENT3EXTEVENT2EXTEVENT1TIMEVENT9TIMEVENT8TIMEVENT7TIMEVENT6TIMEVENT5TIMEVENT4TIMEVENT3TIMEVENT2TIMEVENT1MSTCMP4MSTCMP3MSTCMP2MSTCMP1MSTPERCMP4CMP3CMP2CMP1PERRESYNCSRT
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x0CC (x=A)
0x14C (x=B)
0x1CC (x=C)
0x24C (x=D)
0x2CC (x=E)
0x34C (x=F)
HRTIM_
EEFxR1
Res.Res.Res.EE5FLTR[3:0]EE5LTCHRes.EE4FLTR[3:0]EE4LTCHRes.EE3FLTR[3:0]EE3LTCHRes.EE2FLTR[3:0]EE2LTCHRes.EE1FLTR[3:0]EE1LTCH
Reset value0000000000000000000000000

Table 259. HRTIM register map and reset values – TIMx (x= A..F) (continued)

OffsetRegister313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
0x0D0 (x=A)
0x150 (x=B)
0x1D0 (x=C)
0x250 (x=D)
0x2D0 (x=E)
0x350 (x=F)
HRTIM_
EEFxR2
Res.Res.Res.EE10FLTR[3:0]EE10LTCHRes.EE9FLTR[3:0]EE9LTCHRes.EE8FLTR[3:0]EE8LTCHRes.EE7FLTR[3:0]EE7LTCHRes.EE6FLTR[3:0]EE6LTCH
Reset value0000000000000000000000000
0x0D4HRTIM_
RSTAR (1)
TIMFCMP2TIMECMP4TIMECMP2TIMECMP1TIMDCMP4TIMDCMP2TIMDCMP1TIMCCMP4TIMCCMP2TIMCCMP1TIMBCMP4TIMBCMP2TIMBCMP1EXTEVNT10EXTEVNT9EXTEVNT8EXTEVNT7EXTEVNT6EXTEVNT5EXTEVNT4EXTEVNT3EXTEVNT2EXTEVNT1MSTCMP4MSTCMP3MSTCMP2MSTCMP1MSTPERCMP4CMP2UPDTTIMFCMP1
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x154HRTIM_
RSTBR (1)
TIMFCMP2TIMECMP4TIMECMP2TIMECMP1TIMDCMP4TIMDCMP2TIMDCMP1TIMCCMP4TIMCCMP2TIMCCMP1TIMACMP4TIMACMP2TIMACMP1EXTEVNT10EXTEVNT9EXTEVNT8EXTEVNT7EXTEVNT6EXTEVNT5EXTEVNT4EXTEVNT3EXTEVNT2EXTEVNT1MSTCMP4MSTCMP3MSTCMP2MSTCMP1MSTPERCMP4CMP2UPDTTIMFCMP1
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x1D4HRTIM_
RSTCR (1)
TIMFCMP2TIMECMP4TIMECMP2TIMECMP1TIMDCMP4TIMDCMP2TIMDCMP1TIMCCMP4TIMCCMP2TIMCCMP1TIMACMP4TIMACMP2TIMACMP1EXTEVNT10EXTEVNT9EXTEVNT8EXTEVNT7EXTEVNT6EXTEVNT5EXTEVNT4EXTEVNT3EXTEVNT2EXTEVNT1MSTCMP4MSTCMP3MSTCMP2MSTCMP1MSTPERCMP4CMP2UPDTTIMFCMP1
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x254HRTIM_
RSTDR (1)
TIMFCMP2TIMECMP4TIMECMP2TIMECMP1TIMCCMP4TIMCCMP2TIMCCMP1TIMBCMP4TIMBCMP2TIMBCMP1TIMACMP4TIMACMP2TIMACMP1EXTEVNT10EXTEVNT9EXTEVNT8EXTEVNT7EXTEVNT6EXTEVNT5EXTEVNT4EXTEVNT3EXTEVNT2EXTEVNT1MSTCMP4MSTCMP3MSTCMP2MSTCMP1MSTPERCMP4CMP2UPDTTIMFCMP1
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x2D4HRTIM_
RSTER (1)
TIMFCMP2TIMDCMP4TIMDCMP2TIMDCMP1TIMCCMP4TIMCCMP2TIMCCMP1TIMBCMP4TIMBCMP2TIMBCMP1TIMACMP4TIMACMP2TIMACMP1EXTEVNT10EXTEVNT9EXTEVNT8EXTEVNT7EXTEVNT6EXTEVNT5EXTEVNT4EXTEVNT3EXTEVNT2EXTEVNT1MSTCMP4MSTCMP3MSTCMP2MSTCMP1MSTPERCMP4CMP2UPDTTIMFCMP1
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x354HRTIM_
RSTFR (1)
TIMECMP2TIMDCMP4TIMDCMP2TIMDCMP1TIMCCMP4TIMCCMP2TIMCCMP1TIMBCMP4TIMBCMP2TIMBCMP1TIMACMP4TIMACMP2TIMACMP1EXTEVNT10EXTEVNT9EXTEVNT8EXTEVNT7EXTEVNT6EXTEVNT5EXTEVNT4EXTEVNT3EXTEVNT2EXTEVNT1MSTCMP4MSTCMP3MSTCMP2MSTCMP1MSTPERCMP4CMP2UPDTTIMECMP1
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x0D8 (x=A)
0x158 (x=B)
0x1D8 (x=C)
0x258 (x=D)
0x2D8 (x=E)
0x358 (x=F)
HRTIM_
CHPxR
Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.STRTPW[3:0]CARDTY[2:0]CARFRQ[3:0]
Reset value000000000000
0x0DCHRTIM_
CPT1ACR
TECMP2TECMP1TE1RSTTE1SETTDCMP2TDCMP1TD1RSTTD1SETTCCMP2TCCMP1TC1RSTTC1SETTBCMP2TBCMP1TB1RSTTB1SETTFCMP2TFCMP1TF1RSTTF1SETEXEV10CPTEXEV9CPTEXEV8CPTEXEV7CPTEXEV6CPTEXEV5CPTEXEV4CPTEXEV3CPTEXEV2CPTEXEV1CPTUPDCPTSWCPT
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000

Table 259. HRTIM register map and reset values – TIMx (x= A..F) (continued)

OffsetRegister313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
0x15CHRTIM_CPT1BCRTECMP2TECMP1TE1RSTTE1SETTDCMP2TDCMP1TD1RSTTD1SETTCCMP2TCCMP1TC1RSTTC1SETTFCMP2TFCMP1TF1RSTTF1SETTACMP2TACMP1TA1RSTTA1SETEXEV10CPTEXEV9CPTEXEV8CPTEXEV7CPTEXEV6CPTEXEV5CPTEXEV4CPTEXEV3CPTEXEV2CPTEXEV1CPTUPDCPTSWCPT
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x1DCHRTIM_CPT1CCRTECMP2TECMP1TE1RSTTE1SETTDCMP2TDCMP1TD1RSTTD1SETTFCMP2TFCMP1TF1RSTTF1SETTBCMP2TBCMP1TB1RSTTB1SETTACMP2TACMP1TA1RSTTA1SETEXEV10CPTEXEV9CPTEXEV8CPTEXEV7CPTEXEV6CPTEXEV5CPTEXEV4CPTEXEV3CPTEXEV2CPTEXEV1CPTUPDCPTSWCPT
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x25CHRTIM_CPT1DCRTECMP2TECMP1TE1RSTTE1SETTFCMP2TFCMP1TF1RSTTF1SETTCCMP2TCCMP1TC1RSTTC1SETTBCMP2TBCMP1TB1RSTTB1SETTACMP2TACMP1TA1RSTTA1SETEXEV10CPTEXEV9CPTEXEV8CPTEXEV7CPTEXEV6CPTEXEV5CPTEXEV4CPTEXEV3CPTEXEV2CPTEXEV1CPTUPDCPTSWCPT
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x2DCHRTIM_CPT1ECRTFCMP2TFCMP1TF1RSTTF1SETTDCMP2TDCMP1TD1RSTTD1SETTCCMP2TCCMP1TC1RSTTC1SETTBCMP2TBCMP1TB1RSTTB1SETTACMP2TACMP1TA1RSTTA1SETEXEV10CPTEXEV9CPTEXEV8CPTEXEV7CPTEXEV6CPTEXEV5CPTEXEV4CPTEXEV3CPTEXEV2CPTEXEV1CPTUPDCPTSWCPT
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x35CHRTIM_CPT1FCRTECMP2TECMP1TE1RSTTE1SETTDCMP2TDCMP1TD1RSTTD1SETTCCMP2TCCMP1TC1RSTTC1SETTBCMP2TBCMP1TB1RSTTB1SETTACMP2TACMP1TA1RSTTA1SETEXEV10CPTEXEV9CPTEXEV8CPTEXEV7CPTEXEV6CPTEXEV5CPTEXEV4CPTEXEV3CPTEXEV2CPTEXEV1CPTUPDCPTSWCPT
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x0E0HRTIM_CPT2ACRTECMP2TECMP1TE1RSTTE1SETTDCMP2TDCMP1TD1RSTTD1SETTCCMP2TCCMP1TC1RSTTC1SETTBCMP2TBCMP1TB1RSTTB1SETTFCMP2TFCMP1TF1RSTTF1SETEXEV10CPTEXEV9CPTEXEV8CPTEXEV7CPTEXEV6CPTEXEV5CPTEXEV4CPTEXEV3CPTEXEV2CPTEXEV1CPTUPDCPTSWCPT
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x160HRTIM_CPT2BCRTECMP2TECMP1TE1RSTTE1SETTDCMP2TDCMP1TD1RSTTD1SETTCCMP2TCCMP1TC1RSTTC1SETTFCMP2TFCMP1TF1RSTTF1SETTACMP2TACMP1TA1RSTTA1SETEXEV10CPTEXEV9CPTEXEV8CPTEXEV7CPTEXEV6CPTEXEV5CPTEXEV4CPTEXEV3CPTEXEV2CPTEXEV1CPTUPDCPTSWCPT
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x1E0HRTIM_CPT2CCRTECMP2TECMP1TE1RSTTE1SETTDCMP2TDCMP1TD1RSTTD1SETTFCMP2TFCMP1TF1RSTTF1SETTBCMP2TBCMP1TB1RSTTB1SETTACMP2TACMP1TA1RSTTA1SETEXEV10CPTEXEV9CPTEXEV8CPTEXEV7CPTEXEV6CPTEXEV5CPTEXEV4CPTEXEV3CPTEXEV2CPTEXEV1CPTUPDCPTSWCPT
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x260HRTIM_CPT2DCRTECMP2TECMP1TE1RSTTE1SETTFCMP2TFCMP1TF1RSTTF1SETTCCMP2TCCMP1TC1RSTTC1SETTBCMP2TBCMP1TB1RSTTB1SETTACMP2TACMP1TA1RSTTA1SETEXEV10CPTEXEV9CPTEXEV8CPTEXEV7CPTEXEV6CPTEXEV5CPTEXEV4CPTEXEV3CPTEXEV2CPTEXEV1CPTUPDCPTSWCPT
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000

Table 259. HRTIM register map and reset values – TIMx (x= A..F) (continued)

OffsetRegister313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
0x2E0HRTIM_CPT2ECRTFOMP2TFOMP1TF1RSTTF1SETTDCMP2TDCMP1TD1RSTTD1SETTCCMP2TCCMP1TC1RSTTC1SETTBCMP2TBCMP1TB1RSTTB1SETTACMP2TACMP1TA1RSTTA1SETEXEV10CPTEXEV9CPTEXEV8CPTEXEV7CPTEXEV6CPTEXEV5CPTEXEV4CPTEXEV3CPTEXEV2CPTEXEV1CPTUPDCPTSWCPT
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x360HRTIM_CPT2FCRTECMP2TECMP1TE1RSTTE1SETTDCMP2TDCMP1TD1RSTTD1SETTCCMP2TCCMP1TC1RSTTC1SETTBCMP2TBCMP1TB1RSTTB1SETTACMP2TACMP1TA1RSTTA1SETEXEV10CPTEXEV9CPTEXEV8CPTEXEV7CPTEXEV6CPTEXEV5CPTEXEV4CPTEXEV3CPTEXEV2CPTEXEV1CPTUPDCPTSWCPT
Reset value0000000000000000000000000000000
0x0E4 (x=A)
0x164 (x=B)
0x1E4 (x=C)
0x264 (x=D)
0x2E4 (x=E)
0x364 (x=F)
HRTIM_OUTxRRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.DIDL2CHP2FAULT2[1:0]IDLES2IDLEM2POL2Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.DLYPRT2[2:0]DLYPRTENDTENDIDL1CHP1FAULT1[1:0]IDLES1IDLEM1POL1Res.
Reset value0000000000000000
0x0E8 (x=A)
0x168 (x=B)
0x1E8 (x=C)
0x268 (x=D)
0x2E8 (x=E)
0x368 (x=F)
HRTIM_FLTxRFLT1CKRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.FLT6ENFLT5ENFLT4ENFLT3ENFLT2ENFLT1EN
Reset value0000000
0x0EC (x=A)
0x16C (x=B)
0x1EC (x=C)
0x26C (x=D)
0x2EC (x=E)
0x36C (x=F)
HRTIM_TIMxCR2Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.TRGH LFRes.Res.GTOMP3GTOMP1FE ROM [1:0]BM ROM [1:0]AD ROM [1:0]OUT ROM [1:0]ROM [1:0]Res.Res.Res.Res.UDMRes.Res.DCDRDCDSDCDE
Reset value000000000000000000
0x0F0 (x=A)
0x170 (x=B)
0x1F0 (x=C)
0x270 (x=D)
0x2F0 (x=E)
0x370 (x=F)
HRTIM_TIMxEEFR3Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.EEVACNT[5:0]EEVASEL [5:0]Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.EEVARSTMEEVACRESEEVACERes.
Reset value0000000000000

1. This register can be preloaded (see Table 244 on page 943 ).

Table 260. HRTIM register map and reset values – common functions

OffsetRegister313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
0x380HRTIM_CR1Res.Res.Res.Res.AD4USRC[2:0]AD3USRC[2:0]AD2USRC[2:0]AD1USRC[2:0]Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.TFUDISTEUDISTDUDISTCUDISTBUDISTAUDISMUDIS
Reset value0000000000000000000
0x384HRTIM_CR2Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.SWPFSWPESWPDSWPCSWPBSWPARes.TFRSTTERSTTDRSTTCRSTTBRSTTARSTMRSTRes.TFESWUTESWUTDSWUTCSWUTBSWUTASWUMSWU
Reset value00000000000000000000
0x388HRTIM_ISRRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.BMPERDLLRDYRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.FLT6SYSFLTFLT5FLT4FLT3FLT2FLT1
Reset value000000000
0x38CHRTIM_ICRRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.BMPERCDLLRDYCRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.FLT6CSYSFLTCFLT5CFLT4CFLT3CFLT2CFLT1C
Reset value000000000
0x390HRTIM_IERRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.BMPERIEDLLRDYIERes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.FLT6IESYSFLTIEFLT5IEFLT4IEFLT3IEFLT2IEFLT1IE
Reset value000000000
0x394HRTIM_OENRRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.TF2OENTF1OENTE2OENTE1OENTD2OENTD1OENTC2OENTC1OENTB2OENTB1OENTA2OENTA1OEN
Reset value000000000000
0x398HRTIM_ODISRRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.TF2ODISTF1ODISTE2ODISTE1ODISTD2ODISTD1ODISTC2ODISTC1ODISTB2ODISTB1ODISTA2ODISTA1ODIS
Reset value000000000000
0x39CHRTIM_ODSRRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.TF2ODSTF1ODSTE2ODSTE1ODSTD2ODSTD1ODSTC2ODSTC1ODSTB2ODSTB1ODSTA2ODSTA1ODS
Reset value000000000000
0x3A0HRTIM_BMCRBMSTATRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.TFBMTEBMTDBMTCBMTBBMTABMMTBMRes.Res.Res.Res.BMPRENBMPRSC[3:0]BMCLK[3:0]BMOMBME
Reset value0000000000000000000
0x3A4HRTIM_BMTRGOCHPEVEEV8EEV7TDEEV8TAEEV7TECMP2TECMP1TEREPTFCMP1TDCMP2TFREPTDREPTDRSTTFRSTTCCMP1TCREPTCRSTTBCMP2TBCMP1TBREPTBRSTTACMP2TACMP1TAREPTARSTMSTCMP4MSTCMP3MSTCMP2MSTCMP1MSTREPMSTRSTSW
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x3A8HRTIM_BMCMPR (1)Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.BMCMP[15:0]
Reset value0000000000000000

Table 260. HRTIM register map and reset values – common functions (continued)

OffsetRegister313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
0x3ACHRTIM_BMPER (1)Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.BMPER[15:0]
Reset value00000000000000000
0x3B0HRTIM_EECR1Res.Res.EE5FASTEE5SNS[1:0]EE5POLEE5SRC[1:0]Res.Res.EE4FASTEE4SNS[1:0]Res.EE4POLEE4SRC[1:0]Res.EE3FASTEE3SNS[1:0]Res.EE3POLEE3SRC[1:0]Res.EE2FASTEE2SNS[1:0]Res.EE2POLEE2SRC[1:0]Res.EE1FASTEE1SNS[1:0]Res.EE1POLEE1SRC[1:0]Res.Res.
Reset value000000000000000000000000000000
0x3B4HRTIM_EECR2Res.Res.Res.EE10SNS[1:0]EE10POLEE10SRC[1:0]Res.Res.Res.EE9SNS[1:0]Res.EE9POLEE9SRC[1:0]Res.Res.EE8SNS[1:0]Res.EE8POLEE8SRC[1:0]Res.Res.EE7SNS[1:0]Res.EE7POLEE7SRC[1:0]Res.Res.EE6SNS[1:0]Res.EE6POLEE6SRC[1:0]Res.Res.
Reset value0000000000000000000000000
0x3B8HRTIM_EECR3EEVSD[1:0]Res.Res.Res.Res.EE10F[3:0]Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.EE9F[3:0]Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.EE8F[3:0]Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000
0x3BCHRTIM_ADC1R (1)ADC1TEPERADC1TEC4ADC1TEC3ADC1TFRSTADC1TDPERADC1TDC4ADC1TDC3ADC1TFPERADC1TCPERADC1TCC4ADC1TCC3ADC1TFC4ADC1TBRSTADC1TBPBRADC1TBC4ADC1TBC3ADC1TFC3ADC1TARSTADC1TAPERADC1TAC4ADC1TAC3ADC1TFC2ADC1EEV5ADC1EEV4ADC1EEV3ADC1EEV2ADC1EEV1ADC1MPERADC1MC4ADC1MC3ADC1MC2ADC1MC1Res.
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x3C0HRTIM_ADC2R (1)ADC2TERSTADC2TEC4ADC2TEC3ADC2TEC2ADC2TDRSTADC2TDPERADC2TDC4ADC2TFPERADC2TDC2ADC2TCRSTADC2TCOPERADC2TCC4ADC2TFC4ADC2TCC2ADC2TBPBRADC2TBC4ADC2TFC3ADC2TBC2ADC2TAPERADC2TAC4ADC2TFC2ADC2TAC2ADC2EEV10ADC2EEV9ADC2EEV8ADC2EEV7ADC2EEV6ADC2MPERADC2MC4ADC2MC3ADC2MC2ADC2MC1Res.
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x3C4HRTIM_ADC3R (1)ADC3TEPERADC3TEC4ADC3TEC3ADC3TFRSTADC3TDPERADC3TDC4ADC3TDC3ADC3TFPERADC3TCOPERADC3TCC4ADC3TCC3ADC3TFC4ADC3TBRSTADC3TBPBRADC3TBC4ADC3TBC3ADC3TFC3ADC3TARSTADC3TAPERADC3TAC4ADC3TAC3ADC3TFC2ADC3EEV5ADC3EEV4ADC3EEV3ADC3EEV2ADC3EEV1ADC3MPERADC3MC4ADC3MC3ADC3MC2ADC3MC1Res.
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x3C8HRTIM_ADC4R (1)ADC4TERSTADC4TEC4ADC4TEC3ADC4TEC2ADC4TDRSTADC4TDPERADC4TDC4ADC4TFPERADC4TDC2ADC4TCRSTADC4TCOPERADC4TCC4ADC4TFC4ADC4TCC2ADC4TBPBRADC4TBC4ADC4TFC3ADC4TBC2ADC4TAPERADC4TAC4ADC4TFC2ADC4TAC2ADC4EEV10ADC4EEV9ADC4EEV8ADC4EEV7ADC4EEV6ADC4MPERADC4MC4ADC4MC3ADC4MC2ADC4MC1Res.
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x3CCHRTIM_DLLCRRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.CALRTE [1:0]CALENCALRes.
Reset value0000

Table 260. HRTIM register map and reset values – common functions (continued)

OffsetRegister313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
0x3D0HRTIM_FLTINR1FLT4LCKFLT4F[3:0]FLT4SRC[0]FLT4PFLT4EFLT3LCKFLT3F[3:0]FLT3SRC[0]FLT3PFLT3EFLT2LCKFLT2F[3:0]FLT2SRC[0]FLT2PFLT2EFLT1LCKFLT1F[3:0]FLT1SRC[0]FLT1PFLT1E
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x3D4HRTIM_FLTINR2Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.FLTSD[1:0]Res.Res.FLT6SRC[1]FLT5SRC[1]FLT4SRC[1]FLT3SRC[1]FLT2SRC[1]FLT1SRC[1]FLT6LCKFLT6F[3:0]FLT6SRC[0]FLT6PFLT6EFLT5LCKFLT5F[3:0]FLT5SRC[0]FLT5PFLT5E
Reset value000000000000000000000000
0x3D8HRTIM_BDMUPDRRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.MCOMP4MCOMP3MCOMP2MCOMP1MREPMPERMCNTMDIERMICRMCR
Reset value0000000000
0x3DCHRTIM_BDTAUPRRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.TIMAEFR3TIMACR2TIMFLTRTIMAUSTRTIMACHPRTIMARSTRTIMAEFR2TIMAEFR1TIMARST2RTIMASET2RTIMARST1RTIMASET1RTIMADTXRTIMACMP4TIMACMP3TIMACMP2TIMACMP1TIMAREPTIMAPERTIMACNTTIMADIERTIMAICRTIMACR
Reset value00000000000000000000000
0x3E0HRTIM_BDTBUPRRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.TIMBEEFR3TIMBCR2TIMBFLTRTIMBOUTRTIMBCHPRTIMBRSTRTIMBEEFR2TIMBEEFR1TIMBRST2RTIMBSET2RTIMBRST1RTIMBSET1RTIMBDTXRTIMBCMP4TIMBCMP3TIMBCMP2TIMBCMP1TIMBREPTIMBPERTIMBCNTTIMBDIERTIMBICRTIMBCR
Reset value00000000000000000000000
0x3E4HRTIM_BDTCUPRRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.TIMCEEFR3TIMCCR2TIMCFLTRTIMCOUTRTIMCCHPRTIMCRSTRTIMCEEFR2TIMCEEFR1TIMCRST2RTIMCSET2RTIMCRST1RTIMCSET1RTIMCDTXRTIMCCMP4TIMCCMP3TIMCCMP2TIMCCMP1TIMCREPTIMCPERTIMCCNTTIMCDIERTIMCICRTIMCCR
Reset value00000000000000000000000
0x3E8HRTIM_BDTDUPRRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.TIMDEEFR3TIMDCR2TIMDFLTRTIMDOUTRTIMDCHPRTIMDRSTRTIMDEEFR2TIMDEEFR1TIMDRST2RTIMDSET2RTIMDRST1RTIMDSET1RTIMDDTXRTIMDCMP4TIMDCMP3TIMDCMP2TIMDCMP1TIMDREPTIMDPERTIMDCNTTIMDDIERTIMDICRTIMDCR
Reset value00000000000000000000000
0x3ECHRTIM_BDTEUPRRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.TIMEEFR3TIMECR2TIMEFLTRTIMEOUTRTIMECHPRTIMERSTRTIMEEEFR2TIMEEEFR1TIMERST2RTIMESET2RTIMERST1RTIMESET1RTIMEDTXRTIMECMP4TIMECMP3TIMECMP2TIMECMP1TIMEREPTIMEPERTIMECNTTIMEDIERTIMEICRTIMECR
Reset value00000000000000000000000
0x3F0HRTIM_BDMADRBDMADR[31:0]
Reset value00000000000000000000000000000000
0x3F4HRTIM_BDTFUPRRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.TIMFEEFR3TIMFCR2TIMFFLTRTIMFOUTRTIMFCHPRTIMFRSTRTIMFEEFR2TIMFEEFR1TIMFRST2RTIMFSET2RTIMFRST1RTIMFSET1RTIMFDTXRTIMFCMP4TIMFCMP3TIMFCMP2TIMFCMP1TIMFREPTIMFPERTIMFCNTTIMFDIERTIMFICRTIMFCR
Reset value00000000000000000000000

Table 260. HRTIM register map and reset values – common functions (continued)

OffsetRegister313029282726252423222120191817161514131211109876543210
0x3F8HRTIM_ADCER (1)Res.ADC10TRG[4:0]ADC9TRG[4:0]ADC8TRG[4:0]Res.ADC7TRG[4:0]ADC6TRG[4:0]ADC5TRG[4:0]
Reset value0000000000000000000000000000000
0x3FCHRTIM_ADCURRes.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.AD10U SRC [2:0]Res.AD9U SRC [2:0]Res.AD8U SRC [2:0]Res.AD7U SRC [2:0]Res.AD6U SRC [2:0]
Reset value000000000000000
0x400HRTIM_ADCPS1Res.Res.Res.ADC5PSC[4:0]Res.ADC4PSC[4:0]Res.ADC3PSC[4:0]Res.ADC2PSC[4:0]Res.ADC1PSC[4:0]
Reset value000000000000000000000000
0x404HRTIM_ADCPS2Res.Res.Res.ADC10PSC[4:0]Res.ADC9PSC[4:0]Res.ADC8PSC[4:0]Res.ADC7PSC[4:0]Res.ADC6PSC[4:0]
Reset value000000000000000000000000
0x408HRTIM_FLTINR3FLT4RSTMFLT4CRESFLT4CNT[3:0]FLT4BLKSFLT4BLKEFLT3RSTMFLT3CRESFLT3CNT[3:0]FLT3BLKSFLT3BLKEFLT2RSTMFLT2CRESFLT2CNT[3:0]FLT2BLKSFLT2BLKEFLT1RSTMFLT1CRESFLT1CNT[3:0]FLT1BLKSFLT1BLKE
Reset value0000000000000000000000000000000
0x40CHRTIM_FLTINR4Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.Res.FLT6RSTMFLT6CRESFLT6CNT[3:0]FLT6BLKSFLT6BLKEFLT5RSTMFLT5CRESFLT5CNT[3:0]FLT5BLKSFLT5BLKE
Reset value000000000000000

1. This register can be preloaded (see Table 244 on page 943).

Refer to Section 2.2 on page 82 for the register boundary addresses.